JP7197800B2 - pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a pachinko game machine.

A pachinko game machine generally acquires a random number for a lottery upon entry of a game ball into a starting hole, and temporarily stores the random number as an operation pending ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. Each time a predetermined starting condition is established, such operation-reserving balls are successively consumed one by one, and a determination is made as to whether or not the game corresponds to a big hit. When the result of winning/failure determination is a big hit, after variably displaying the decorative patterns consisting of a plurality of rows, the decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and the big winning port which is normally closed is opened. A special game (jackpot game) to be in the state is established.

In this type of pachinko game machine, in conjunction with the variable display of decorative patterns, there is one that executes a reach effect or a notice effect that preliminarily suggests a high degree of expectation for the transition to a special game (expectation for a big hit). known (see, for example, Patent Literature 1).

JP 2015-16106 A

Since pachinko gaming machines employing such a configuration already exist as conventional models, it is necessary to further improve the amusement of games in order to differentiate them from conventional models.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a pachinko game machine capable of improving the amusement of a game.

In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko game machine according to the present invention includes a game board having a game area formed thereon, a start opening provided in the game area, into which a game ball can enter, and a game ball entering the start opening. a winning /failing determination means for executing a winning/failing determination triggered by the entry of a game ball; a symbol display device for variably displaying and stopping a special symbol indicating the result of the winning/failure determination; A special game execution that can execute a special game accompanied by the opening of the big winning opening that is opened according to the result of the determination so that the game ball can enter, and the big winning opening if the result of the winning/failure determination is a big win. means, an effect display device for displaying a predetermined effect, and an effect determining means for determining the effect to be displayed on the effect display device, and the effect display device has a pattern showing the result of the success/failure judgment in an effect. As the display, it is possible to display the variable display and the stop display of the first symbol, and the variable display and the stop display of the second symbol. It is configured to continue the variable display of the second pattern even during the temporary stop display of the first pattern, has a plurality of types of production stages, and is configured to be capable of outputting BGM according to the type of the production stage. At least in a predetermined performance stage, the predetermined BGM can be continuously output without interruption from the end of the variable display of the special symbols to the start of the next variable display of the special symbols, and the first symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. When the variable display is performed again after that, the output of the predetermined BGM that has been continued is stopped, and then the predetermined BGM is output again or the BGM different from the predetermined BGM is output, When the first symbol is temporarily stopped and then displayed again, and the development effect is executed after the re-variation display, BGM corresponding to the development effect can be output, and when the first symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the second pattern is displayed. While the display mode of one pattern can be changed to a predetermined mode, the display mode of the second pattern does not change to the predetermined mode, and the first pattern is a production pattern in which the development production is not executed during the variable display of the special pattern. It has a production pattern and a second production pattern which is a production pattern for executing a development production during the variable display of the special pattern, and by enabling the display of the first pattern in each of the plurality of pattern rows, the plurality of second patterns is displayed. Variable display and stop display of one symbol can be displayed, and in the first effect pattern, each of the plurality of first symbols can be changed to a predetermined mode, while in the second effect pattern, the plurality of first symbols can be displayed. A part of the first pattern among the patterns is changed to a predetermined mode. The first pattern other than that can be changed is configured not to change to a predetermined mode, and is configured to be able to execute a performance display according to the type of the performance stage, and in the predetermined performance stage, the predetermined performance. A production display corresponding to a stage can be displayed, and in a predetermined production stage, when a development production is executed after re-variation display of the first symbol, production display corresponding to the prescribed production stage is performed during the execution of the development production. Instead, it is possible to display a production display corresponding to the development production, and in a predetermined production stage, the development production is completed by executing a special production during the execution of the development production after the re-variation display of the first symbol. In this case, the effect display corresponding to the development effect is finished, and the effect display corresponding to the predetermined effect stage can be displayed again during the variable display in which the development effect is executed, but the development effect is not executed. Even in a predetermined situation in which the performance display corresponding to the predetermined performance stage is displayed again during the variable display, the predetermined BGM is not output, while the variable display in which the development performance is executed ends. When the next variable display is started, a predetermined BGM is output from the beginning. A plurality of types of symbol combinations indicating the failure are switched in a predetermined order and displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol combination to be displayed first immediately after the start of the variable display is predetermined among the plurality of types of symbol combinations indicating the failure. It is a predetermined specific symbol combination, and the symbol combination that is the first order in the predetermined order is a specific symbol combination, and the symbol combination that is the last order in the predetermined order is a specific symbol combination. is a predetermined symbol combination which is a different symbol combination from the symbol combination of , and when the symbol combination is switched to the predetermined symbol combination in the variable display of the second symbol, the symbol combination to be switched next is the specific symbol combination, which is the predetermined symbol combination. The advance notice effect can be displayed superimposed on the first pattern, but not superimposed on the second pattern, and a specific notice effect different from the predetermined advance notice effect can be displayed superimposed on both the first pattern and the second pattern, but the second pattern. The display priority is higher than the specific notice effect, and the shooting position notification image showing the recommended shooting position of the game ball in a predetermined state can be displayed superimposed on the first pattern, but not superimposed on the second pattern. Characterized by

According to the pachinko game machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. It is a control block diagram of the pachinko game machine. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and effect control board of the pachinko game machine. It is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol success or failure lottery table. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table, and (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. It is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 1 of special symbols. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 2 of a special design. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation pattern table 3 of a special design. It is a schematic diagram which shows the design attribute of a decorative design. It is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the jackpot pattern combination of the decorative pattern, and the production pattern during the jackpot. It is a schematic diagram showing the outline of super longevity jackpot production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline|summary of Kotobuki jackpot A production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline|summary of Kotobuki jackpot B production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline|summary of joy jackpot A production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the outline|summary of the big hit B production. It is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen during a round game. FIG. 11 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of a winning-related effect; It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of over winning a prize production|presentation. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of a large prize mouth count-up production. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a production|presentation of a bonus prize-winning production|presentation. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect of the general winning mouth count-up effect. It is a time chart for explaining the priority of the big winning mouth count-up effect. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram for explaining an emphasis effect; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram for explaining error types of the gaming machine; It is a time chart for explaining whether or not an over-winning effect is executed at the end of the jackpot. It is a time chart for explaining the presence or absence of the execution of the bonus winning effect at the end of the jackpot. 10 is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over winning effect and the general winning effect. It is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed. It is a schematic diagram which shows a volume adjustment screen. FIG. 11 is a time chart for explaining overlapping execution of an over winning effect and a bonus winning effect; FIG. It is a time chart when over winning and bonus winning occur multiple times within a predetermined period. It is a time chart of a winning ball signal when a game ball enters a general winning hole. It is a time chart of a winning ball signal when a game ball enters a big winning hole. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing on the main control side; FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing control processing following FIG. 35 of the main processing on the main control side; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening monitor control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start monitoring control process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows special design control processing. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol control general-purpose process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flow chart showing processing during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flow chart showing processing during special symbol stop symbol display. It is a flow chart showing a special electric accessary product control process. FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing control processing following FIG. 47 of the special electric accessary product control processing. 8 is a flowchart showing reset start processing; It is a flow chart which shows production control side main processing. 4 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing; 10 is a flow chart showing a prize effect content determination process; It is a flow chart which shows production control command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows production control side timer interrupt processing. 9 is a flowchart showing image control command transmission interrupt processing; It is a figure which shows typically the special design success or failure lottery table of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol jackpot symbol table of the second embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state and production mode of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table of the second embodiment. It is a comparison table of the variation time of the special symbol of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the normal symbol lottery of the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram for explaining simultaneous variation processing (variation interruption processing, variation forced stop processing) according to the second embodiment; It is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to a modification of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of the large prize-winning opening of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the special design success or failure lottery table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol jackpot symbol table of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a large winning opening operation pattern table of the third embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state and production mode of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table of the third embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 1 of the third embodiment; FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 2 of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 3 of the third embodiment; FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows the decorative symbol jackpot appearance table 1 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the decorative symbol jackpot appearance table 2 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of an effect|presentation when the special big-hit appearance of 3rd Embodiment is stop-displayed. It is a schematic diagram which shows the round production|presentation pattern table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the jackpot start demonstration effect pattern table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the jackpot start demonstration production of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the jackpot end demonstration effect pattern table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the jackpot type determination effect of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the 1st reward acquisition production|presentation of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect and the type of reward according to the third embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of the 2nd reward acquisition production|presentation of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing types of rewards in the second reward acquisition effect of the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a reward combination pattern table for a second reward acquisition effect of the third embodiment; FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a second reward acquisition effect (main story effect) according to the third embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which shows the flow of special button production|presentation of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing a button count setting table for special button effects according to the third embodiment; It is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol jackpot symbol table of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a large winning opening operation pattern table of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table of the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 1 of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 2 of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 3 of 4th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen for a special meter effect according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing execution timing of a special meter effect according to the fourth embodiment; It is a schematic diagram which shows the production|presentation pattern of the big-hit suggestion production|presentation in holding|holding of 4th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the jackpot suggestion production|presentation lottery table in reservation|holding of 4th Embodiment.

Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[First embodiment]
1 and 2 show a front view and a rear view of the pachinko game machine PM according to the present embodiment. First, with reference to these figures, an overview of the overall configuration of the pachinko game machine PM will be given. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and the first game (first special symbol game) and the second A game (second special symbol game) can be developed.

<Basic Configuration of Pachinko Machines>
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PM (also referred to simply as "game machine PM") has an outer frame 1, which is a vertically oriented fixed holding frame configured in the size of an outer rectangular frame. A front frame 2, which is constructed in the size of a rectangular frame and forms an opening and closing mounting frame, is attached to the front right edge by an upper and lower hinge mechanism 3 arranged on the left edge of the front so that it can be horizontally opened, opened, and detached. The outer frame 1 is always kept in a closed state in which it is engaged and connected by using a locking device 4 called a double lock.

A rectangular glass frame 5 that fits the upper front area of the front frame 2 is attached to the front frame 2 so that it can be horizontally opened, opened, and detached by using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3, and a locking device 4 is used. It is always held in a closed state covering the front surface of the front frame 2.例文帳に追加A game board 20 is detachably set and held on the front frame 2, and the game area PA in front of the game board 20 is visible through the multi-layered glass of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. there is

On the front side of the glass frame 5, there are provided a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the progress of the game, and a speaker 11 that produces sound effects according to the development of the game. Upper and lower ball trays (upper ball tray 8 and lower ball tray 9) for storing game balls are provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5, and the front center of the upper ball tray 8 is pressed by the player. A button (effect switch) 15 is provided, and a shooting handle 12 for shooting game balls is provided on the front right side of the lower ball tray 9 . Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the operation input means for effecting will be referred to as "effect button 15". cross-shaped switch (cross-key, cross-shaped button), tilt-operated lever-type switch, rotary-operated dial switch, proximity switch that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches it, touch sensor , touch panel, etc., the concept includes all operation input means.

The game board 20 is configured with a substrate formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or an ABS resin as a base. On the front surface of the game board 20, an outer rail 41 and an inner rail 42 are fixed in an arc shape to define a substantially circular game area PA in which game balls can roll. In addition, a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the game area PA is formed by the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42, and the position near the exit opening of the game ball in this guide passage (the position of the inner rail 42) A ball return prevention valve 43 is disposed at the tip portion) to prevent the game ball discharged into the game area PA from the outlet opening from returning to the guide passage again. In this game area PA, along with a windmill and a large number of game nails, there are various types of openings such as a first starting opening 51, a second starting opening 52, an operating gate 53, a big winning opening 54, and general winning openings 61, 62, 63, 64. In addition to the winning opening, the first special design display device 71, the second special design display device 72, the first special design reservation lamp 73, the second special design reservation lamp 74, the normal design display device 75, the general design reservation lamp 76, etc. Various display devices are provided. A center decoration 21 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA, and the screen of the performance display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the center opening of the center decoration 21.例文帳に追加

The game area PA is based on the center decoration 21 in the center, and includes a left area PA1 that is the area on the left side of the center decoration 21 (board area corresponding to left-handed hitting) and an area on the right side of the center decoration 21 (corresponding to right-handed hitting). and a right side area PA2 which is a board surface area). A top plate portion 22 is integrally formed on the upper portion of the center ornament 21 and faces the outer rail 41 in a substantially vertical direction. A communication passage 44 is formed through which a game ball can pass to the right area PA2. In this embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 can enter either the first starting hole 51 or the general winning holes 61 to 63, which are mainly arranged below the center decoration 21. On the other hand, game balls flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter any one of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the big winning opening 54, which are mainly arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. is. At the lower end of the game area PA, an out port 29 is provided for discharging the game balls that have rolled down without entering the winning holes to the back side of the game board 20.例文帳に追加Hereinafter, each component provided on the game board 20 will be described in order.

The first starting port 51 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the first special symbol game, and includes a first starting port switch 511 for detecting the entry of game balls. The first starting port 51 is a normally open winning port that is open upward, and mainly allows game balls (left-handed game balls) flowing down the left side area PA1 to enter. The entry of the game ball into the first starting port 51 triggers the first special symbol lottery. In addition, in the present embodiment, a special symbol that is variably displayed or stopped on the first special symbol display device 71 is referred to as a "first special symbol".

The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and has a second starting port switch 521 for detecting the entry of the game ball. The second starting port 51 is arranged in the right area PA2, which is a board area corresponding to hitting to the right, and mainly game balls flowing down the right area PA2 (game balls hit to the right) can enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 triggers the second special symbol lottery. In addition, in the present embodiment, the special symbol that is variably displayed or stopped on the second special symbol display device 72 is referred to as a "second special symbol". The second starting port 52 includes a normal electric accessory 522 generally called an electric chew, and a normal electric accessory solenoid 523 for opening and closing the normal electric accessory 522 . The normal electric accessary 522 is variable between an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter into the second starting port 52 . That is, the normal electric accessory 522 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and at a predetermined opportunity (a chance to win the normal symbol lottery) described later. In the open state, the ease of entering a game ball increases. This ordinary electric accessory 522 has a front-rear slide type movable member 524 for opening and closing the second starting port 52 . The movable member 524 has a closed position (protruding position) that closes the second starting port 52 to make it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball, and a closed position (protruding position) that opens the second starting port 52 to allow the entering of the game ball. It is slidable in the front-rear direction (direction orthogonal to the board surface) between an open position (retracted position) that makes it easier. The upper surface of the movable member 524 has a passage width of about one game ball or more in the front-rear direction, and is formed so as to slope down from the right side to the left side in a front view. Therefore, when the movable member 524 is in the closed position (when the second starting port 52 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down the upper surface of the movable member 524 as a guide path, and from the right to the left on the guide path. It flows downward and falls from the left end of the normal electric accessory 522 .

The operation gate 53 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the normal symbol game, and has an operation gate switch 531 for detecting passage of game balls. In addition, passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 serves as a trigger for a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not the second starting port 52 is to be opened.

The big winning opening 54 is formed as a horizontally rectangular winning opening that is opened when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big win or a small win. The big winning opening 54 includes a big winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a big winning opening for driving the special electric accessory 542 to open and close. A solenoid 543 is provided. The special electric accessory 542 changes between an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter into the big winning opening 54 . In this example, the big winning opening 54 is provided in the right area PA2 in the game area PA. Therefore, in the special game (big win game, small win game), when the game ball is shot, it can be easily entered into the big winning hole 54 by hitting the right side area PA2, i.e. hitting the right side. It's becoming

The general winning holes 61 to 63 are arranged in the left side area PA1, which is a board area corresponding to left-handed hitting, and game balls flowing down the left side area PA1 can enter. The general winning openings 61 to 63 are provided with a left general winning opening switch 611 for detecting entry of game balls. This left general winning hole switch 611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) for the three general winning holes 61 to 63 from the viewpoint of cost reduction, etc. Incoming balls can also be detected.

The general winning hole 64 is arranged in the right side area PA2, which is a board area corresponding to hitting to the right, and a game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter. The general winning opening 64 has a right general winning opening switch 641 for detecting the entry of a game ball. It should be noted that the entry of a game ball into each of the general winning openings 61 to 64 does not trigger the lottery of special symbols or ordinary symbols, but like the other winning openings (except for the operation gate 53), it gives the opportunity to win prize balls. becomes.

The first special symbol display device 71 performs variable display and fixed display of the first special symbol when the gaming ball enters the first starting port 51 as a trigger. This first special symbol display device 71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the first special symbol is represented according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp stops and switches to lighting display. , the first special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

The second special symbol display device 72 performs variable display and fixed display of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting port 52 . The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, and the variable display of the second special symbol is represented according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp stops and switches to lighting display. , the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

The 1st special figure reservation lamp 73 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 74 are each composed of, for example, two LED lamps. (up to 4 of each). The number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is a number related to the random number acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 51 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the jackpot game. indicates the number of times the obtained random number is suspended, that is, the success/failure determination is temporarily suspended until the success/failure determination permission condition (fluctuation start condition) is satisfied for the obtained random value. In the same way, the number of balls with the operation pending of the second special symbol is a random value acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 52 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the execution of the big hit game. This number indicates the number of times that the obtained random number value is suspended, that is, the success/failure determination is temporarily suspended until the success/failure determination permission condition (fluctuation start condition) is satisfied for the obtained random value. there is

The normal symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs variable display and fixed display of normal symbols. The normal design reservation lamp 76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lamps lit corresponds to the number of normal design fluctuations reserved (the number of normal design fluctuations that have not yet been executed). In addition, on the left side of the normal symbol display device 75, a round indicator 77 for displaying the number of round games (unit games) in the jackpot game (the number of rounds: the number of times the special electric accessory 542 operates continuously) is provided. ing.

The effect display device 70 mainly includes a variable effect of a decorative pattern that is variably displayed/stopped in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and an effect including a notice effect that suggests or notifies the expectation of a big hit in advance. An image is displayed, and a suspension display corresponding to the operation suspension ball of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, a decorative pattern display area 700 in which variable display of decorative patterns, advance notice effect display, etc. are executed, a first special figure reservation lamp 73 and a second special figure reservation lamp 74 A suspended image display area 710 in which the suspended image of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is displayed in synchronization with, and a varying image display area 720 in which the varying image corresponding to the varying display is displayed are provided. there is In this embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the rendering display device 70 . In the decorative pattern display section 700, three rows of display regions (left pattern display region Z1, middle pattern display region Z2, right pattern display region Z3), which are variable display regions of decorative patterns, are arranged on a predetermined effective line (not shown). ) are provided, the left pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the left pattern display region Z1, the middle pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the middle pattern display region Z2, and the right side of the decorative pattern corresponding to the right pattern display region Z3. Each pattern is stopped and displayed. The reserved image display section 710 displays a reserved image (a reserved icon) corresponding to the first special symbol actuation reserved ball and a reserved image (a reserved icon) corresponding to the second special symbol actuation reserved ball. The reserved images are displayed in order according to the order of occurrence (ball entry order) of the operation reserved balls of the special symbols. Display is possible. Further, in the changing image display area 720, a changing image (changing icon) corresponding to the change display currently being executed is displayed.

The center decoration 21 is installed around the performance display device 70, and has functions such as the flow path of game balls, the protection of the performance screen, and the decoration. The center decoration 21 is provided with a movable accessory 24 for executing a performance action according to the development of the game. The movable accessory 24 is configured with a motor M (for example, a stepping motor) as a drive source. In addition, the game board 20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light according to the progress of the game. In the following description, for convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as "effect lamp LP".

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko game machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. On the rear side of the front frame 2, a rear set board 30 is provided on the upper and lower sides of the base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape which is slightly smaller than the front frame 2 and which has a front-to-rear communication window in the center. It is connected to the rear side of the front frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 3 so that it can be horizontally opened, opened, and detached. A back set cover 30C having a rectangular box shape with an open front is detachably attached to the back set board 30, and is always arranged to cover the back side of the game board 20 attached to the front frame 2.例文帳に追加(The main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the image control board 300, which will be described later, are thereby covered with the back set cover 30C).

Each part of the back set board 30 includes a storage tank 31 that stores a large number of game balls, a tank rail 32 that extends rightward from the storage tank 31 with a gentle downward slope, and a right end of the tank rail 32 that connects downward. a ball supply passage portion 33 extending to the upper ball tray 6; A ball passage portion 35 and the like are provided.

On the back side of the game board 10, there are a main control board 100 that controls the overall operation of the pachinko game machine PM, an effect control board 200 that controls all effects, an image display corresponding to the game development, and control of sound effects. An image control board 300 for performing image processing is attached. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, there is a payout control board 400 for controlling the shooting and payout of game balls, and power is received from the game facility side and supplied to various control boards and electric/electronic parts. A power supply board 500 for outputting an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the game machine PM, and an external information terminal board 600 (see FIG. 3) are attached. In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are placed in predetermined positions on the back of the game board 20 or the back of the back set board 30 in an assembly state housed in a board case made of transparent resin having a crimping structure and a sealing structure. are placed. These control boards and electric/electronic parts of each part of the pachinko game machine PM are connected to each other via harnesses (connector cables), and the pachinko game machine PM is configured to be operable.

<Pachinko game machine control configuration>
Next, with additional reference to FIG. 3, each control board installed in the pachinko game machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing the control configuration of the pachinko game machine PM.

The main control board 100 includes a main CPU 101 that performs various arithmetic processing related to games, a ROM 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a temporary storage area and a work area and a buffer memory, peripheral boards and various Equipped with a main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 configured with an I/O port circuit 104 for inputting and outputting signals between devices, and the main CPU 101 performs games according to the control program stored in the ROM 102. It is configured to perform the main controls relating to progression. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 includes a clock circuit that divides a clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and resets when the main CPU 101 malfunctions or runs out of control. A WDT circuit that returns to a normal state, a CTC circuit that enables real-time interrupt generation and time measurement, and a program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101 operate as a separate system to generate a predetermined random number (internal random number). A random number generation circuit is installed, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

The main CPU 101 reads various control programs stored in the ROM 102 based on detection information from each switch and performs arithmetic processing, thereby executing various processes related to the main control of the game. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile memory backed up by backup power generated in the power supply board 500 . The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing the data such as the stack pointer and each register held at the time of power failure when the power is turned off. ), the state of the game machine is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information in the backup area.

In addition, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first start switch 511, the second start switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big win switch 541, the left general win switch 611, the right general win switch 641, and the like. , and inputs detection signals from various switches to the main CPU 101 via the I/O port circuit 104 . In addition, the main control board 100 includes a first special symbol display device 71, a second special symbol display device 72, a first special symbol retention lamp 73, a second special symbol retention lamp 74, a normal symbol display device 75 and a general symbol retention lamp. 76, and also electrically connected to the normal electric accessory solenoid 523 and the special electric accessory solenoid 543, and various control signals from the main CPU 101 are received via the I/O port circuit 104. Send to display means and various solenoids. The main control board 100 is also electrically connected to the external information terminal board 600 and transmits game information signals from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board 600 via the I/O port 104 . This external information terminal board 600 transmits various external information signals to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the game machine PM based on the game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100. Send. The game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100 may be input to the external information terminal board 600 via the payout control board 300, for example.

The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communicate only in a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. It is possible to connect, and various production control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the production control board 200. - 特許庁Data cannot be transmitted from the performance control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 cannot be requested to transmit data.

The performance control board 200 includes a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processing related to game performance based on the performance control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores performance control programs and various data, etc., a work area that serves as a temporary storage area, Equipped with an effect control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 configured with a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I/O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals between peripheral boards and devices. A sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control relating to game effects according to a control program stored in a ROM 202 . In addition, although not shown, the effect control board 200 includes a clock circuit that divides the clock signal from the crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and a reset when the sub-main CPU 201 malfunctions or runs out of control. A WDT circuit that returns to a normal state using the system clock, a TPU circuit that outputs various signals based on the system clock, an interrupt controller that activates various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, and a serial data input/output circuit. A serial communication circuit and the like are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

Effect control board 200, in the effect control processing based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, the image control command for instructing the image and sound to the image control board 300, the lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91 (lamp data), drive control signals (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like. The production control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so that two-way communication is possible. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been successfully received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200 .

In addition, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 equipped with a plurality of LED drivers, and transmits a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the effect control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 employ clock synchronous serial communication, and are transmitted via a signal line (clock line) separate from the data line for transmitting the lamp data. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit through the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions upon receiving a lamp control signal for driving the LED transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches on/off the switch in the circuit based on this lamp control signal. By supplying or cutting off the drive current to the production lamp LP, control is performed to turn on or off the production lamp LP.

Furthermore, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to a plurality of motor drivers 92, and sends drive control signals (driving data) for controlling the motor drivers 92 to the motor drivers 92 via the I/O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by switching on/off the switch in the circuit based on the drive control signal for driving the accessory transmitted from the effect control board 200. Alternatively, it is cut off to control each movable accessory 24 to operate. Data transmission to the motor driver 92 employs a parallel communication method.

The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various arithmetic processing related to image effects based on image control commands from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 that stores image control programs and various data, and a work area that serves as a temporary storage area. and an image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 configured with a RAM 303 functioning as a buffer memory and an I/O port circuit 304 for inputting/outputting signals between peripheral boards and devices. , the sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute the main control relating to the image rendering according to the control program stored in the ROM 302 . In addition, although not shown, the image control board 300 includes a VDP that generates image data according to the content of the effect based on the control signal obtained from the sub-sub CPU 301, and a It is equipped with a sound source IC that generates acoustic data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, which reads image data stored in the image ROM according to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, processes the image data, and transmits a generated video signal (image data) to the effect display device. This VDP is connected to a high-speed VRAM used for developing and processing image data read out from the image ROM. The sound source IC reads sound data stored in the sound ROM according to instructions from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs sound data generated by synthesizing the sound data to the speaker 11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

The payout control board 400 is mainly composed of a payout CPU 401 , a ROM 402 and a RAM 403 . The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of two-way communication, and controls the prize ball payout unit 34 based on the payout control command from the main control board 100 to pay out the prize balls. is executed, and the ball feeding mechanism 13 and the shooting mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the operation amount of the shooting handle 12 to control the shooting of the game ball.

Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 includes a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used by each control board based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply equipment of the game island, and a backup power supply. and a power failure monitoring circuit for monitoring power failure due to voltage drop. supply. A power switch for activating the power circuit is connected to the power board 500, and on the premise that primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, when the power switch is turned on, the power board Predetermined power is supplied from a normal power supply circuit 500 to each control board and the like. The power supply board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island has been cut off. , effect control board 200 and payout control board 400. The backup power supply circuit is charged when power is supplied to the pachinko game machine PM from the power supply of the game island. A RAM clear switch (not shown) is connected to the power supply board 500 for temporarily erasing the temporary storage contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting the initial values when the pachinko game machine PM is powered on. ing. The RAM clear switch may be configured to be connected to the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500, for example.

The external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) to the outside of the gaming machine PM based on the game information signal from the main control board 100 . The external information signals that the external information terminal board 600 outputs as external information to an external device outside the machine include, for example, a jackpot signal, a consecutive game signal, a pattern confirmation signal, a prize ball signal (also referred to as a prize ball information signal), a door Frame opening signal, security signal (also called security information signal), magnetic sensor abnormality signal, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, abnormality sensor detection (ball passing time abnormality, etc.) signal, etc. are included. Also, the external devices installed outside the game machine PM include a data display, a hall computer, and the like. The data display is a device that is installed above the gaming machine PM and displays data (game information) regarding the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display serves as useful judgment material for the player to select a gaming machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating states of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on external information signals output from each gaming machine installed in the hall of the gaming arcade, and determines the status of each game. It is a device that manages the operating status of the machine. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via the data display or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without the data display.

<Basic operation of pachinko machine>
The pachinko game machine PM configured as described above is used for games in a state in which the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the game island of the game facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, etc. are closed and locked. A game is started by storing game balls in the tray 8 and rotating the shooting handle 12.例文帳に追加When the shooting handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball tray 8 are delivered one by one to the shooting mechanism 14 by the ball feeding mechanism 13 disposed on the back side of the glass frame 5. The shooting mechanism 14 shoots out to the game area PA. At this time, when the shooting handle 12 is operated by less than the predetermined amount, the game ball does not reach the right side area PA2 and flows down the left side area PA1. In this left area PA1, a left flow path is formed for flowing down the game ball toward the first starting opening 51 and the general winning openings 61-63. On the other hand, when the shooting handle 12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the game ball reaches the right side area PA2 and flows down the right side area PA2. In this right area PA2, a right flow path for flowing down the game ball toward the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the big winning opening 54 is formed. Thus, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 or the right side area PA2 is divided into the first starting port 51, the second starting port 52, and the operation gate 53 according to the route distributed in the left side region PA1 or the right side region PA1. , the special winning opening 54, and the general winning openings 61 to 64. If the ball does not enter any of the winning openings, the ball flows down to the out opening 29.例文帳に追加

When the game ball flowing down the game area PA enters any one of the first starting hole 51, the second starting hole 52, the big winning hole 54, and the general winning holes 61 to 63, a prize corresponding to the type of the winning hole A ball is put out to an upper ball tray 8 or a lower ball tray 9 by a prize ball putting out unit 34. - 特許庁In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when one game ball enters each winning hole (referred to as "unit number of prize balls") is "4" for the first start hole 51, and "4" for the second start hole. "1" is set for the starting opening 52, "3" is set for the general winning openings 61 to 64, and "15" is set for the big winning opening 54.例文帳に追加It should be noted that the number of unit prize balls in each winning hole is not limited to the number exemplified in the present embodiment, and other unit number of prize balls may be applied. For example, as the number of unit winning balls, the number of the first start openings 51 may be set to "1" instead of "4". Also, the number of the second starting ports 52 may be "three" instead of "one". Also, the number of the general prize winning openings 61 to 64 may be "five" instead of "three". Further, the number of big winning openings may be "10" instead of "15".

When the game ball enters the first start port 51 or the second start port 52, the lottery random number value of the special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored up to a predetermined upper limit number as the operation reserve ball of the special symbol. Then, when a predetermined start condition (variation start condition for a special symbol, which will be described later) is established, the determination of whether the special symbol is appropriate, the symbol determination, and the variation pattern determination are performed with respect to the lottery random number value related to the first ball to be activated. , In a manner corresponding to the determination result, the special symbols are variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbols are variably displayed on the performance display device 70. The variable display of the special symbols and the decorative symbols is synchronously stopped and displayed after the lapse of the variation time according to the selected variation pattern.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fixedly displayed in a stop mode indicating a big win, the game shifts to a special game (big win game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game. In each round game (unit game) of this jackpot game, an opening/closing operation is performed to change the big winning opening 54 to an open state only once or a plurality of times. When a prescribed count number of game balls enter the big winning opening 54, or when the opening time of the big winning opening 54 reaches the opening limit time, the round game being executed ends. Here, the mode of stopping the decorative symbols indicating the big hit is, for example, a mode in which the types of the three symbols are the same. In this embodiment, when the special symbols and decorative symbols are fixedly displayed in the stop mode indicating the big win, a plurality of round games (unit games) are executed as the big win game.

In this embodiment, when a predetermined jackpot is won, the special symbol probability variation function may operate until the special symbol variation count reaches a predetermined end count after the jackpot game ends. When the special pattern probability variation function is activated, the special pattern lottery jackpot probability shifts from a normal low probability state to a high probability state, so that a new jackpot (jackpot game) occurs relatively early. Become. It should be noted that the special symbol probability variation function may continue until the next big hit occurs. In addition, as the above-mentioned predetermined final number of times, "10000 times" may be set substantially corresponding to the number of variable display times until the occurrence of the next big win.

In addition, after the jackpot game is over, the special symbol variation time shortening function may operate in association with or independently of the special symbol probability variation function. When the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, the average variation time of special symbols and decorative symbols tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time increases (the number of jackpots per unit time can increase the ease of acquisition).

Furthermore, after the jackpot game is over, an electric chew support function (also simply called "electric support") may operate in conjunction with or independently of the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function. As for the electric chew support function, the normal symbol probability variation function, the normal symbol variation time shortening function, and the normal electric accessary 522 opening extension function are activated to increase the ease of entering the ball into the second starting port 52. state (also referred to as “electric sapo state” or “easy ball entry state”). In addition, when the normal symbol probability variation function operates, the winning probability of the normal symbol becomes higher than the normal state. When the normal symbol variation time shortening function is activated, the normal symbol variation time is shortened. When the opening extension function of the normal electric accessory 522 operates, the opening time of the normal electric accessory 522 is extended from the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, there is a higher possibility that the number of normal symbol variations per fixed time period will increase more than usual, and the ease of entering the second starting port 52 will also increase. The possibility of increasing the number of incoming balls is also improved. Therefore, the operation of the electric chew support function increases the chances of winning a prize ball by entering the second starting hole 52 during the period, and as a result, it is possible to continue the game without reducing the number of balls in the player's possession. Become. That is, the "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot game balls, increases. Hereinafter, the state in which the electric chewing support function is activated is also referred to as a "high base state", and the state in which the electric chewing support function is not activated is also referred to as a "low base state".

<Major Functional Configuration of Pachinko Machines>
Next, various functions of the pachinko game machine PM (mainly the main control board 100/the performance control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIG. Incidentally, FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the game machine PM (mainly the main control board 100/performance control board 200).

The main control board 100 includes, as shown in FIG. Special game control means 150 , symbol display control means 155 , electric accessory control means 160 , game state control means 165 , error monitoring control means 170 , main information storage means 180 and command transmission/reception means 190 are included. The above-described means in the main control board 100 are configured by hardware such as the main CPU 101, ROM 102, RAM 103, and electronic circuits provided on the main control board 100, and software such as control programs stored in the ROM 102 and the like. It is a functional representation of something.

The ball entry judging means 110 determines each winning opening based on detection signals from the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the large winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switches 611 and 641, and the like. Entry of a game ball into is determined. When the entering ball determination means 110 detects the entry of the game ball by the first starting hole switch 511, it generates an effect control command (referred to as a "first starting hole winning command") indicating that effect, When the entry of the game ball is detected by the 2 starting port switch 521, an effect control command indicating that effect (referred to as "second starting port winning command") is generated, and the operation gate switch 531 detects the game ball. When passing is detected, an effect control command (referred to as "operating gate winning command") indicating that is generated. A production control command (referred to as a "large winning opening winning command") is generated, and when the entry of a game ball is detected by the left general winning opening switch 611, a production control command ("left general winning opening When the entry of the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 611, an effect control command (referred to as "right general winning opening winning command") is generated. Then, this is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 .

The game lottery random number generation means 120 takes in the built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software, and adds a soft random number per special symbol to be used for the lottery of the special symbol. Generate a random number per special symbol. The game lottery random number generating means 120 is provided with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by program processing of the main CPU 101 . These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. As the software random numbers, the soft random number per special symbol added to the internal random number for generating the random number per special symbol, and the initial value to be newly updated after one period of updating of the soft random number per special symbol is completed. Special symbol per soft initial value random number for determining , special symbol stop symbol random number used to determine the winning symbol (combination of symbols that will operate the condition device) as a special symbol stop symbol, special symbol stop symbol random number A special symbol stop symbol initial value random number for determining the initial value for a new update after the update of one cycle is completed, a special symbol variation pattern random number for use in selecting a special symbol variation pattern, A random number per normal symbol for use in a lottery for success or failure of a normal symbol, an initial value random number per normal symbol for determining an initial value for newly updating after one cycle of updating of the random number per normal symbol is completed, Ordinary design variation pattern random numbers and the like for use in selecting the variation pattern of the normal design are included. These software random numbers are updated once each time a timer interrupt process occurs (increment, decrement, addition of prime numbers, etc.). during loop processing) is also updated using the remaining time of the interrupt cycle.

Reservation control means 130 includes special symbol reservation control means 131 and normal symbol reservation control means 132 .

The special symbol retention control means 131 is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51 or the second start port 52, and is a random number value per special symbol, which is a random number value related to the special symbol game. A symbol random number value and a special symbol variation pattern random number value are acquired, and the random number value is managed as the operation reservation ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol retention control means 131 stores the operation retention ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number (four) in the form of being combined with the ball entry order of the retention balls. Temporarily stored in the 180 first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area.

In the first special symbol reservation storage area and the second special symbol reservation storage area, the reservation 1 storage area (first reservation storage area), the reservation 2 storage area (2 reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area). Each reservation storage area can store a set of random numbers per special symbol, random numbers per special symbol, and special symbol variation pattern random numbers as operation retention ball information. The operation pending ball information is stored in the order of the pending 1 storage area, the pending 2 storage area, the pending 3 storage area, and the pending 4 storage area, while the pending 1 storage area, the pending 2 storage area, the pending 3 storage area, and the pending 4 storage area. Regions are digested in order (first-in, first-out principle). Further, when the hold ball information in the hold 1 storage area is digested, the hold ball information stored in the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area are respectively shifted to storage areas with lower numbers, Clear the contents of the Reserved 4 storage area to zero.

In addition, the special symbol reservation control means 131 includes a first special symbol reservation ball number counter for counting the number of operation reservation balls of the first special symbol, and a second special symbol reservation ball number counter for counting the number of operation reservation balls of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol reserved ball number counter. The special symbol reservation control means 131 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one operation reservation ball of a special symbol is obtained as an updating process of the number of operation reservation balls of special symbols, and one operation reservation ball is digested. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

In addition, when the special symbol reservation control means 131 updates (adds or subtracts) the number of operation reservation balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect control command ("symbol storage command") and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. FIG. This one command includes information on both the number of activated balls with the first special symbol and the number of activated balls with the second special symbol. In principle, the operation reserve balls of each special symbol are digested in the order of entry, but in this embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed rather than the first special symbol. , In order to adopt the so-called priority digestion, while the operation reservation ball related to the second special symbol game exists, regardless of the existence of the operation reservation ball related to the first special symbol game, the operation reservation related to the second special symbol game Configured to preferentially digest spheres. In addition, under this priority digestion, if there is an operation pending ball of the second special symbol, even if an operation pending ball of the first special symbol exists, the operation pending ball of the first special symbol is digested. will be put on hold.

The normal symbol reservation control means 132 is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the operation gate 53, and is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game, a normal symbol per pattern random value, a normal symbol per symbol random value, a normal symbol variation pattern. A random number value is obtained, and the random number value is managed as normal symbol operation retention ball information. The normal symbol reservation control means 132 stores normal symbol operation reservation ball information up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces) in the normal symbol reservation storage area of the main information storage means 180 in a form that is combined with the ball entry order of the relevant reserved balls. Temporarily store. In addition, the normal design reservation control means 132 has a normal design reservation ball number counter for counting the number of normal design operation reservation balls. The normal symbol reservation control means 132 adds 1 to the corresponding counter each time one operation reservation ball of the normal symbol is obtained as update processing of the number of operation normal symbol reservation balls, and one operation reservation ball is digested. Each time the corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

The pre-determination means 135 executes pre-determination for pre-reading notice targeting the operation-reserving ball with a special symbol at a predetermined pre-determination timing. As an example of the above-mentioned pre-determination timing, (1) while waiting for a hit, and when the operation suspension ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric chew support function is not in operation, (2) while waiting for a hit, and Either of the following: (3) when the operation suspension ball with the second special symbol is obtained while the electric chew support function is in operation; It is time to satisfy the conditions. The above pre-determination timing is an example, and the pre-determination timing is changed according to the specifications of the gaming machine (for example, it has a start port related to the second special symbol that does not have a normal electric accessory, and 8 are normally reserved For models that can be accumulated, the above (1) is targeted not only for the first special symbol but also for the second special symbol, etc.) Or even if you adopt a specification that makes a preliminary judgment at any time without setting a preliminary judgment timing good. Also, in each game state, only the operation-reserving ball of the special symbol that is the subject of the game may be subject to the preliminary determination. For example, in the normal game state, only the operation-reserving ball of the first special symbol is subject to the preliminary determination. Then, in the time-saving gaming state, the latent probability variable gaming state, and the probability variable gaming state, it is preferable that only the second special symbol's operation holding ball is subject to prior determination. Specifically, the prior determination means 135 reads out the random number value corresponding to the operation reservation ball acquired this time from the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main information storage means 180, and determines whether it is correct or not. Pre-determination (property pre-determination), pre-determination of the pattern (pre-determination of the symbol), pre-determination of the variation pattern (pre-determination of the variation pattern) are sequentially executed. Although the pre-determination table used in each pre-determination is not shown, the area corresponding to the total number of random numbers is divided into a plurality of areas in each of the pre-determination table, the pre-determination table for the symbol, and the table for pre-determination of the variation pattern. A lottery ID (a number indicating the result of preliminary determination (also referred to as a "predetermination number")) is assigned to each region (determination number). Therefore, the result of this preliminary determination conforms to the result of the main lottery by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 to be described later (result of winning/failure determination, result of symbol determination, result of variation pattern determination). In addition, the winning/failing preliminary determination table, the symbol preliminary determination table, and the like may be the same as the winning/failure lottery table, the symbol lottery table, and the like used for the lottery when the variation is actually started. Here, the fluctuation pattern pre-determining table has the possibility that the game situation at the start of fluctuation (whether there is a probability change, whether there is a time saving, whether it is during a limited frequency period referring to a special table, the number of pending balls, etc.) Therefore, as described above, it is desirable to determine which of the plurality of regions the region is included in. In addition, as a modification, it is configured to determine in advance a random value such as a register on the main CPU 101 temporarily stored before storing in the first special symbol reservation storage area or the second special symbol reservation storage area. You may Then, the pre-determination means 135 sequentially generates a production control command (referred to as a "pre-determination command") including information on the result of the pre-determination (pre-determination number), and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. store in

The special symbol lottery processing means 140 includes special symbol suitability determination means 141 , special symbol stop symbol determination means 412 , and special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 . In the special symbol lottery processing means 140, when the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is established, in the forefront storage area (suspension 1 storage area) of the special symbol reservation storage area in the main information storage means 180 The stored random number per special symbol, random number per special symbol, and random number of special symbol variation pattern are read out and stored in the special symbol validity determination area, the special symbol determination area, and the special symbol variation pattern of the main information storage means 180. Each is stored in the judgment area. Here, "the fluctuation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied" means (A1) that the jackpot is not in progress, (A2) that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for variation, and (A3) ) that there is a ball with the first special symbol in operation pending, when all the conditions are satisfied. Further, "the second special symbol variation start condition is satisfied" means (B1) that the jackpot is not in progress, (B2) that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for variation, and (B3). It is when all the conditions of the presence of the second special symbol operation pending ball are satisfied. In addition, when the fluctuation start condition of the first special design and the fluctuation start condition of the second special design are satisfied at the same time, the fluctuation start condition of the second special design is preferentially processed based on the above-mentioned priority digestion. do.

The special symbol success/failure determination means 141 reads the special symbol winning random number value from the special symbol success/failure determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes the success/failure determination, and the determination result corresponds to any of a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. decide whether to The result of this success/failure determination is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 (for example, big hit data "55H", small hit data "33H", loss data "00H"), and is used in subsequent processing. After that, it is cleared when the fluctuation of the special symbol stops. The special symbol success/failure determination means 141 holds a special symbol success/failure lottery table referred to during this success/failure determination.

Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol success/fail lottery table. FIG. 5(A) is referred to in the gaming state (low probability state) where the special symbol probability variation function is not operating, and FIG. 5(B) is the gaming state (high probability) where the special symbol probability variation function is operating. state). In the special symbol success/failure lottery table, the random number range of the special symbol per random value and the result of the special symbol success/failure determination (big hit, miss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 5, in the determination of whether the special symbols are valid, in the game state (low probability state) where the probability variation function of the special symbols is not operating, the random number value per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 204". In the game state (high-probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is activated, a big win occurs when the special symbol per random number falls within the range of "0 to 1506". That is, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the winning probability of the big win varies from low probability "1/319.69" to high probability "1/43.49". In this way, the winning probability of the big win changes according to the game state, but the winning probability of the big win is set equally between the winning judgment of the first special symbol and the winning judgment of the second special symbol. In addition, in the present embodiment, "small hit" is not set as the result of the judgment of the special symbol, but "small hit" may be set as the result of the judgment of the special symbol. The winning probability of the small hit is set to the same winning probability regardless of the game state (low-probability state, high-probability state).

The special symbol stop symbol determining means 142 determines the first special symbol or the second special symbol to be stopped based on the result of the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 6, the special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 includes a first special symbol big-hit symbol table and a second special symbol big-hit symbol table and a second It has a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the present embodiment, the "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) that triggers the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbols after the jackpot game ends, and the "normal jackpot" means a special pattern after the jackpot game ends. It means a jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) that does not trigger the operation of the stochastic variable function.

In this embodiment, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, and a probability variation game state are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the types of the game state, (1) the game state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function operate is called "probability variation state" or "probability variation game state", 2) The game state in which the special symbol probability variation function does not operate and the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function operate is called a “time saving state” or “time saving game state”, (3) All The state in which the function is not activated is called "normal state" or "normal game state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variable gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state" are advantageous gaming states for the player compared to the "normal gaming state". Therefore, below, as a game state with a higher degree of advantage for the player than the normal game state, the probability variable game state and the time-saving game state are also referred to as "advantageous game state".

In addition, each game state is a combination of the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state). ) The probability variable gaming state can be expressed as “high probability high base state”, (2) time saving gaming state as “low probability high base state”, and (3) normal gaming state as “low probability low base state”. In addition, while the operating state of the probability variation function is a high probability state, the operating state of the electric chew support function is a low base state (a game state that is advantageous to the player compared to the "normal game state"). One) may be provided, such a game state is called a latent game state, and this latent game state may be expressed as a "high probability low base state". This latent certainty gaming state (“high probability low base state”) is a gaming state suitable for performing a game centered on a small hit, and will be described later in detail. Unless otherwise specified, these states (combination state of low probability/high probability and low base/high base) are game states (win/fail judgment and variable display are possible) in the state not during the big hit or the small hit. state), it is a low probability low base state during the big hit, and it is the same game state as the game state at the time of winning the small hit during the small hit. At this time, the special symbol variation time shortening function is a state in which the variation time of at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is the subject of the game in the game state, is shortened. means that That is, in the present embodiment, when the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated, at least the first special symbol variation time ( average variation time) is shortened, and the variation display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game (probability variation game state, latent probability game state, time reduction game state), at least the variation time of the second special symbol (average variation time) is reduced.

In this embodiment, when the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is a big hit, the game state after the end of the big win game is (1) a big win type (type of symbol group) and (2) a game at the time of winning a big win. determined according to the state. In addition, the number of times each game state continues (the number of times the special symbols are displayed) is the number of times the probability variation function of the special symbols is activated (referred to as the "probability variation number"), and the special symbol variation time reduction function is activated. It is set in accordance with the number of times to operate (referred to as "fluctuation time reduction times") and the number of times the electric chew support function operates (referred to as "electric support times"). In this embodiment, the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the electric chew support function start operating at the same time and end at the same time. (Therefore, in FIG. 6, "number of fluctuation time reductions" and "electric sapo operation number of times" are described in the same column).

FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol big hit symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, for the special symbol per symbol random number, symbol group, jackpot type, probability fluctuation frequency, fluctuation time reduction frequency (electrical support frequency), prescribed round number of big hit game, each round are associated with the opening times (maximum opening times) of the big winning openings 54 (in this example, the stop symbols are omitted for the sake of convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, two types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, as two types of jackpot types (symbol groups), they are distributed to a 4R specific jackpot (symbol group A) and a 4R normal jackpot (symbol group B).

(4R specific jackpot: pattern group A)
When the ``4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)'' of the first special pattern is won, the probability variation frequency ``10000 times'', the variation time reduction frequency ``10000 times'', and the power supply frequency ``10000 times'' are set, and the jackpot game is played. Probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of. In this variable probability game state, a huge number of ``10000 times'' is set as the number of continuations (the number of times of probability variation, the number of times of shortening the variation time, and the number of times of electrical support), and the jackpot is not won until the number of times of continuation is reached. is not probabilistic (approximately 1/44 of winning), so it will continue substantially until the next big win occurs. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning port 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: pattern group B)
When the ``4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)'' of the first special pattern is won, the probability fluctuation frequency ``0 times'', the fluctuation time reduction frequency ``100 times'', and the electric support frequency ``100 times'' are set, and the jackpot game is played. A time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols. Also, when the first special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning port 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

FIG. 6B is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol big hit symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, for special symbol per symbol random number, symbol group, jackpot type, probability fluctuation frequency, fluctuation time reduction frequency (electric power support frequency), prescribed round number of big hit game, each round are associated with the opening times (maximum opening times) of the big winning openings 54 (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for the sake of convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, three types of jackpot types are set corresponding to each symbol group. Specifically, three types of jackpot types (symbol groups) are divided into a 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), a 4R specific jackpot (symbol group D), and a 4R normal jackpot (symbol group E).

(16R specific jackpot: pattern group C)
When the ``16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)'' of the second special pattern is won, the probability fluctuation frequency ``10000 times'', the fluctuation time reduction frequency ``10000 times'', and the power supply frequency ``10000 times'' are set, and the jackpot game is played. Probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of. As described above, this variable probability game state is set to a huge number of "10000 times" as the number of continuations, and substantially continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot (symbol group C)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning port 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds". Also, this 16R specific jackpot may be designed to win even the first special pattern, in which case it is harder to win than the second special pattern (for example, 5% of all jackpot patterns, the second In one special pattern, it is preferable to set the specifications such that the 16R specific jackpot is 5%, the 4R specific jackpot is 60%, and the 4R normal jackpot is 35%.

(4R specific jackpot: pattern group D)
When the ``4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)'' of the second special pattern is won, the probability fluctuation frequency ``10000 times'', the fluctuation time reduction frequency ``10000 times'', and the power supply frequency ``10000 times'' are set, and the jackpot game is played. Probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of. As described above, this variable probability game state is set to a huge number of "10000 times" as the number of continuations, and substantially continues until the next big hit occurs. In addition, when the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot (symbol group D)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning port 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

(4R normal jackpot: pattern group E)
When the ``4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)'' of the second special pattern is won, the probability fluctuation frequency ``0 times'', the fluctuation time reduction frequency ``100 times'', and the electric support frequency ``100 times'' are set, and the jackpot game is played. A time-saving game state is set as the game state after the end of. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 100 times, or until the next big hit occurs within 100 times. When the time-saving game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches 100 times, the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols. In addition, when the second special symbol "4R normal jackpot (symbol group E)" is won, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is "4 rounds", and the maximum opening time of the big winning port 54 in one round game is It is "29 seconds".

Here, in this embodiment, three types of jackpot types are provided: a 16R specific jackpot (symbol group C), a 4R specific jackpot (symbol groups A and D), and a 4R normal jackpot (symbol groups B and E). It is The expected value of prize ball acquisition in the special game (referred to as "prize ball acquisition expected value") is 16R specific jackpot>4R specific jackpot=4R normal jackpot. Here, the actual number of rounds of the special game when winning the jackpot with the first special symbol is "4 rounds", whereas the actual number of rounds of the special game when winning the jackpot with the second special symbol is "4 rounds". 16 rounds", there is a higher possibility of shifting to a special game with a larger number of rounds when a big win occurs with the second special symbol than when a big win occurs with the first special symbol. This is advantageous for the player in that he/she can get the ball. The actual number of rounds of this special game corresponds to the number of executions of the "long open round game" set for the special game. In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum opening time of each round of the jackpot game is set to a fixed time of 29 seconds (all rounds are set to "long open round game"), but a predetermined round in the same jackpot game Alternatively, a ``short opening round game'' is provided in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 is shortened to 2 seconds in all rounds, so that even if the number of rounds of the big winning game is the same, the number of balls to be released is substantially increased. A configuration having jackpots with different numbers of rounds (jackpots with different actual numbers of rounds) may be adopted. In the long open round game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 is set so that a game ball of a prescribed count number (full count = 10 balls) can be entered into the big winning opening 54 or can be easily entered. It is a round game. A short opening round game is a round in which the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 is set to make it impossible or difficult to enter a game ball of a prescribed count number (full count = 10 balls) into the big winning opening 54. It is a game.

The special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 determines a special symbol variation pattern based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. Here, the special symbol variation pattern determining means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a special symbol variation pattern. The special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of types of variation pattern tables based on the current variation pattern selection state. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. Each variation pattern table defines a plurality of variation patterns. In each figure, for convenience of explanation, "selection rate" is indicated, but in fact, the judgment value (random number range) for determining the variation pattern is set according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value. The variation pattern is determined based on which judgment value the variation pattern random number value belongs to. Various variation patterns are associated with a variation time for each variation pattern as a termination condition of the variation display of the special design, and it is assumed that the variation display of the decorative design is also executed at the variation time. .

Here, the variation pattern selection state will be described. The variation pattern selection state is one of selection conditions referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern table). In this example, "normal selection state", "time saving selection state", and "probability variation selection state" are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states. The normal selection state is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to a game state (normal game state) in which none of the special pattern probability variation function, variation time shortening function, and electric chew support function are in operation. In the time reduction selection state, the special symbol probability variation function is not activated, but the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function are activated. It is in the pattern selection state. The probability variation selection state is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to the gaming state (probability variation gaming state) in which all of the special symbol probability variation function, variation time reduction function, and electric chew support function are operating.

In the special symbol variation pattern table, as shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, columns to be referred to are different for the first special symbol and for the second special symbol, and the same special symbol variation pattern random number value is acquired. Even so, different variation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of operation pending balls described in each figure ("0 pending", "1 to 2 pending", "3 pending") is the first special symbol fluctuation pattern lottery, It means the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation pending balls after holding digestion), and if it is a fluctuation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol (after holding digestion number of operation retention balls). The number of balls with pending operation is the number of balls with pending operation that exist at the time of the fluctuation pattern lottery (at the start of the relevant fluctuation display/after digestion of the holding) (does not include balls with pending operation that have been digested by the relevant fluctuation display). . In addition, as a modification thereof, the total value of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

The variation effect of the decorative symbols performed in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbols is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbols. As a reference, FIGS. 7 to 9 also describe the contents of the variable performance set corresponding to each variation pattern (variation time). In the figure, "super shortened variation", "shortened variation", and "normal variation" are effects in which the decorative patterns in the three rows change, and without going through the reach state even once, they become "off" with so-called loose eyes. is. In the following, ultra-shortening variation, shortening variation and normal variation are also collectively referred to as "non-reach deviation". The non-reach out-of-reach types differ from each other in that the variable display stops in a shorter time in the shortened variation than in the normal variation and in the ultra-shortened variation than in the shortened variation.

"N reach (normal reach)" is a state (reach state) where the same decorative pattern is stopped in 2 rows (generally left and right rows) of the 3 rows of decorative patterns, and the remaining 1 row (generally If a different decorative pattern stops on the middle row), it becomes a "lose", and if the same decorative pattern stops on the remaining one row (generally, the middle row), it becomes a "big hit".

"SP reach (super reach)" is a reach production with relatively higher expectations for big hits than the above N reach. etc. is displayed. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of SP reach A to C are prepared as types of SP reach. The SP reach A is a reach effect executed when the game state currently being executed is the normal state. The SP reach B is a reach effect executed when the game state currently being executed is the time-saving game state. The SP reach C is a reach effect executed when the game state currently being executed is the variable probability game state. In the variation pattern type of the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to increase in the order of "non-reach"<"N reach"<"SP reach". As a modification, the contents of the SP reach are the same (SP reach A) in the normal state and the time saving game state, and in the variable probability game state, the SP reach (SP reach C) may be different. Also, as another modified example, a variation pattern including pseudo-runs may be prepared. Pseudo-continuation means that the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop, temporary stop) and again variably displayed during one variative display of the decorative symbols. It is a production (pseudo-continuous production, pseudo-fluctuation production, pseudo-continuous fluctuation production, re-variation production) to be shown. In other words, the pseudo-run is an effect in which the pseudo-variation is executed a plurality of times in which all of the decorative symbols in the three rows start to fluctuate or re-variate and then temporarily stop or stop. The higher the number of pseudo-runs (the number of pseudo-variations), the higher the possibility of developing into an SP reach with a high degree of expectation for a big hit.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. As shown in FIG. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the normal selection state. The variation pattern table 1 has different table contents according to the result of the special symbol win/loss determination (big win, loss).

Variation patterns PH1-1 (shortened variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), and PH1-4 (SP reach A) are set in the variation pattern table 1 for loss. Here, if the result of the validity determination of the first special symbol is "off", the variation pattern PH1-1 (shortened variation), PH1-2 (normal variation), PH1-3 (N reach), PH1-4 (SP reach A) is selected. In this embodiment, if the result of the validity determination of the first special symbol is "missing", the reference destination according to the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the first special symbol are set so that the contents of the table are different, and even if the acquired special symbol variation pattern random number values are the same, different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the larger the number of balls with the first special symbol activated, the easier it is to select a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set relatively short, and the number of the balls with the first special symbol activated is more likely to be selected. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the fluctuation time is relative A variation pattern PH1-1 (shortened variation) or PH1-2 (normal variation), which is set to be relatively short, is selected. In addition, as a modification, when the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", only the main variation pattern PH1-2 of the shortened variation is selected regardless of the number of operation suspensions of the second special symbol. Alternatively, the variation pattern PH1-2 of the shortened variation is most easily selected (it is preferable that the selection ratio is the same regardless of the number of balls that are held in operation of the second special symbol).

Variation patterns PA1-1 (N reach) and PA1-2 (SP reach A) are set in the variation pattern table 1 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit/fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach A) is selected without depending on the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. As shown in FIG. The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the time reduction selection state. The variation pattern table 2 has different table contents according to the result of the special symbol win/loss determination (big win, loss).

In the fluctuation pattern table 2 for loss, fluctuation patterns PH2-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation), PH2-2 (normal fluctuation), PH2-3 (N reach), and PH2-4 (SP reach B) are set. . Here, if the result of the determination of the suitability of the first special symbol is a loss, the variation pattern PH2- 2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 (SP reach A) are selected. That is, if the result of the suitability determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the variation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortened variation) is selected regardless of how many balls with the first special symbol are activated. never. On the other hand, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the variation pattern PH2-1 (super shortened variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 (SP reach B) is selected. In this embodiment, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the reference destination according to the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the second special symbol are set so that the contents of the table are different, and even if the acquired special symbol variation pattern random number values are the same, different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, when the second special symbol operation pending ball does not exist, the variation pattern PH2-1 (super shortening variation) is not selected, and the second special symbol operation pending ball does not exist. If there is, the larger the number of balls with the second special symbol activated, the more easily the variation pattern PH2-1 (ultra-shortened variation) is likely to be selected.

Variation patterns PA2-1 (N reach) and PA2-2 (SP reach B) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit/fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA2-1 (N reach) or PA2-2 (SP reach B) is selected without depending on the big hit type.

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. As shown in FIG. The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the probability variation selection state. The variation pattern table 3 has different table contents according to the result of the special symbol win/loss determination (big win, loss).

In the fluctuation pattern table 3 for loss, fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortening fluctuation), PH3-2 (normal fluctuation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) are set. Here, if the result of the suitability determination of the first special symbol is "miss", the variation pattern PH3- 2 (normal variation) or PH 3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. That is, if the result of the suitability determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the variation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortened variation) is selected regardless of how many balls with the first special symbol are activated. never. On the other hand, if the result of the right or wrong determination of the second special symbol is lost, one of the variation patterns PH3-1 (super shortened variation), PH3-2 (normal variation), and PH3-3 (SP reach C) is selected. be done. At this time, if the result of the right or wrong judgment of the second special symbol is a loss, depending on the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol (in detail, depending on the presence or absence of the operation pending ball of the second special symbol) Reference destination are set so that the contents of the table are different, and even if the acquired special symbol variation pattern random number values are the same, different variation patterns can be selected. Specifically, when the second special symbol operation pending ball does not exist, the variation pattern PH3-1 (super shortened variation) is not selected, and the second special symbol operation pending ball exists. Since the variation pattern PH3-1 (ultra-shortening variation) can be selected only when there is a second special symbol operation retention ball is present than when the second special symbol operation retention ball does not exist This tends to make it easier for a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time to be selected.

A variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is set in the variation pattern table 3 for big hits. Here, when the result of the hit/fail determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is selected without depending on the big hit type (4R specific big hit, 4R normal big hit). Similarly, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is a jackpot, the variation pattern PA3-1 (SP reach C) is independent of the jackpot type (16R specific jackpot, 4R specific jackpot, 4R normal jackpot). selected.

As described above, in the variation pattern tables 1 to 3, the variation time of the special symbol is defined for each variation pattern, but even if any variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time of the special symbol (fixed display time) is set to "0.5 second". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the special symbols is the time during which the special symbols are definitely stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained). In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time and fixed stop time of the decorative symbols are also set corresponding to the variable time and fixed stop time of the special symbols. In addition, in the variation pattern tables 1 to 3, the performance contents and variation time at the time of the big win can be the same as those at the time of the loss, but it is preferable to make the final performance contents different at the time of the big win and the time of the loss. In other words, even if it is the same N reach, the decorative pattern will be doubled (example: "7, 7, 7") at the time of the big hit, while the decorative pattern will be out of reach (example: "7, 8").・ 7”), or even if the SP reach is the same A to C, the final production content will be the production content showing success at the time of the big hit, and the decorative pattern will be double (example: ally character wins the enemy character. , and then "7, 7, 7" is displayed). and then "7-8-7" is displayed). In addition, it is preferable that the variation time (production time) is longer at the time of the big hit than at the time of the loss, even if the contents of the production are the same (when it develops into the same SP reach). , It is preferable that the SP reach A to C at the time of the big hit have a longer variation time (performance time) than the SP reach A to C at the time of loss by 10 seconds.

After selecting the special symbol variation pattern, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 instructs the effect control board 200 to start varying the decorative symbol, so whether the communication with the effect control board 200 is normally performed. Production control command (communication inspection command) for confirming whether or not, production control command (variation additional information designation command) including special design variation addition pattern (information for adding or subtracting variation time), special design variation pattern Generate a production control command (variation pattern specification command) containing information, a production control command (symbol specification command) containing information on the character production number (symbol group and game state), etc. (Hereafter, these commands are collectively called " ), which is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 .

The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 has normal symbol suitability determination means 146 , normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 , and normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148 . The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 reads out the normal symbol random number and the normal symbol variation pattern random number stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol reserve storage area when the normal symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied. They are stored in the normal symbol suitability determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, the "normal symbol variation start condition" is (1) normal symbol variation standby, and (2) presence of a normal symbol operation pending ball. When all these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal symbols are in a state where fluctuation can be started (state where the fluctuation start condition is established).

The normal symbol suitability determination means 146 reads out the normal symbol hit random number value from the normal symbol suitability determination area of the main information storage means 180, executes the normal symbol suitability determination, and the determination result is either "hit" or "loss". to determine whether The result of the normal symbol determination is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180, used in subsequent processes, and then cleared when the normal symbol variation stops. The normal symbol suitability determination means 146 holds a normal symbol success/failure lottery table (not shown) that is referred to when the normal symbol success/failure determination is made. The probability of hitting the normal pattern is set to "1/3001" when the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of normal patterns) is not operating, and the electric chew support function (probability fluctuation function of normal patterns) is operating. is set to "2999/3001".

The normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown), and if the result of the determination of whether the normal symbol is a win, a predetermined winning symbol (a trigger for the normal electric accessory 522 to operate While selecting the stop pattern to become), when the result of the judgment of the normal pattern is a loss, a predetermined losing pattern (a stop pattern that does not trigger the operation of the normal electric accessory 522) is selected. In the present embodiment, the symbol A and the symbol B are assigned as the winning symbols of the normal symbols, while the symbol C is assigned as the losing symbol of the normal symbols.

The normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148 reads a normal symbol variation pattern random number value from the normal symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, and refers to a normal symbol variation pattern table (not shown) to determine the normal symbol variation pattern. (variation time) is determined. The fluctuation time of normal symbols is set to "0.6 seconds" when the electric chew support function (normal symbol fluctuation time reduction function) is not operating, and the electric chew support function (normal symbol fluctuation time reduction function) is set to "0.2 seconds". Regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbols is set to "0.1 second". The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of normal symbols is the time during which the normal symbols are definitely stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained). In addition, in the normal design control, in order to reduce the processing load of the main control board 100, if the electric chew support function is not operating, the normal design hit probability is set to "0", and the normal design It is also conceivable to adopt a specification that makes the variable time uniform.

In addition, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 determines the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric accessary 522 according to the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol is appropriate. The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 holds a normal electric accessory opening pattern table referred to when determining the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric accessory 522 . The opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric accessories 522 is set to "0.2 seconds" when the electric chewing support function (opening extension function) is not operating, and the electric chewing support function (opening extension function) is set to "0.2 seconds". If activated, "5.8 seconds" is set. It should be noted that the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 522 may be different according to the type of the winning pattern of the normal pattern. For example, as an opening pattern of the normal electric accessary 522, when the electric chew support function (open extension function) is in operation, if the hit pattern of the normal pattern is pattern A, "open for 3 seconds x 1 time -> 2. 8 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5.8 seconds)", and if the winning pattern of the normal symbol is symbol B, "2.8 seconds open x 1 time → 3 seconds open x 1 time (total open time 5.8 seconds)" .8 seconds)”.

The special game control means 150, when the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is a jackpot, according to the determined jackpot type (symbol group), the execution time (demonstration time) of the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot end demonstration, A round game execution time (round time) is determined. Then, the special game control means 150 instructs the performance control board 200 to execute a performance control command (referred to as a “jackpot start demo command”) for instructing execution of a jackpot start demonstration performance and a jackpot end demonstration performance. A performance control command (referred to as a "jackpot end demo command") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. - 特許庁The jackpot start demo command is also a trigger for determining the contents of a series of jackpot middle effects (jackpot start demo effect, round effect, and jackpot end demo effect) developed during the jackpot game on the effect control board 200 side. Become. In addition, the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a "round effect designation command") for instructing the start of a round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the jackpot game. , is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . This round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds, information on opening and closing of the big winning opening 54, and the like. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 11, in this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is uniformly set to 5 seconds, and the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is uniformly set to 20 seconds. Regarding the execution time of the end demo (demonstration time), not only the jackpot type (symbol group) but also the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, even if it is the same jackpot type (symbol group), the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot. The execution time of the end demonstration (demonstration time) may be different. For example, on the premise that the 16R specific jackpot is won even in the first special pattern, and for the 4R normal jackpot, if the jackpot is won in a low probability and low base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is 5 seconds (as a jackpot start demo effect , Execution of production A-1 displaying ``start of normal jackpot''), execution time of jackpot end demonstration is 15 seconds (as jackpot end demonstration production, production B-1 and prepaid A high-probability high-base state or a low-probability effect C is executed to call attention to forgetting to take out a card (*a storage medium storing information about the amount of money required to borrow a game ball for a game). When the jackpot is won in the high base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is 5 seconds (execution A-1 as the jackpot start demonstration effect), and the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is 10 seconds (as the jackpot end demo effect, production B-1 is executed and production C is not executed), and for 16R specific jackpots and 4R specific jackpots, when a jackpot is hit in a low-probability low-base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is 5 seconds (jackpot start demo As a production, the production A-2 displaying ``Start of the probability variable jackpot'' is executed), and the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is 20 seconds (Production B-2 displaying ``Entering the probability variable mode'' as the jackpot end demonstration production. and performance C), on the other hand, when the jackpot is won in the high-probability high-base state or the low-probability high-base state, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is 5 seconds (the performance A-2 is executed as the jackpot start demonstration performance). The execution time of the jackpot end demonstration may be set to 10 seconds (as the jackpot end demonstration production, the production B-3 displaying "Continue variable probability mode" is executed, and the production C is not executed). In addition, on the premise that the 16R specific jackpot is won even in the first special pattern, if the jackpot is won in the first special pattern, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is 5 seconds (16R specific jackpot) regardless of the game state at the time of the jackpot. , 4R specific jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot are set to 5 seconds, and as jackpot start demonstration effects, the effect A-1 or effect A-2 is executed), and the jackpot end demonstration execution time is 30 seconds (16R specific jackpot 30 seconds for the 4R specific jackpot, the performance B-2 and the performance C are executed as the jackpot end demonstration performance, but for the 4R normal jackpot, the performance is set to 15 seconds, and the performance B-1 and the performance C are executed as the jackpot end demonstration performance. On the other hand, if the second special symbol is a big hit, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is 5 seconds (in any of the 16R specific jackpot, 4R specific jackpot, and 4R normal jackpot), regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot. The execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is 20 seconds (20 seconds for the 16R specific jackpot and the 4R specific jackpot, and the jackpot end demo is executed for 5 seconds, and the jackpot start demonstration production is performed by the production A-1 or the production A-2). As a performance, the performance B-3 is executed and the performance C is not executed, but the 4R normal jackpot is set to 10 seconds, and as the jackpot end demonstration performance, the performance B-1 is executed and the performance C is not executed). . This relationship of time values is an example, and if the magnitude relationship of each demonstration time in each situation is the same as the above, it is not limited to this time value. Also, in any of the above specifications, when a big hit is made in the high-probability high-base state or the low-probability high-base state, the effect C does not occur. When a power failure occurs and the power is restored during the fluctuation or during the big win game, the performance C may be generated exceptionally.

The symbol display control means 155 includes special symbol display control means 156 and normal symbol display control means 157 . The special symbol display control means 156 causes the first special symbol display device 71 to variably display the first special symbol according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and after the variation display, the first special symbol is definitely displayed. Let In addition, the special symbol display control means 156 variably displays the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 72 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and displays the second special symbol after the variation display. Confirm display. The special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (fluctuation time, fixed display time) relating to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180 . The special symbol display control means 156 requests the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbol when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol game timer becomes "0"). To generate a production control command (referred to as a “variation stop command”). The normal symbol display control means 157 causes the normal symbol display device 75 to variably display the normal symbol according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and also causes the normal symbol to be displayed after the variable display. The normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (fluctuation time, fixed display time) relating to the display of normal symbols. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180 .

In addition, the special symbol display control means 156 issues an effect control command (referred to as a "waiting demo command") that triggers the execution of a waiting demo effect (customer waiting demo effect) when the game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time or more. This is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . "The game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time or longer" means that a period in which there is no special symbol operation pending ball and no variable display of special symbols continues for a predetermined period of time or longer. If the period in which no game ball is fired continues for a predetermined period of time or longer, or if the period in which no game ball enters any of the winning holes continues for a predetermined period of time or longer, the game will be interrupted for a predetermined period of time or longer. It is good also as a specification which continues.

The electric role product control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric role product solenoid 543 as a jackpot game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed when the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is a big hit, and a special electric role is performed. The object 542 is controlled to open and close according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the jackpot game, one opening and closing operation of the special electric accessory 542 is regarded as one round game (unit game), and the round game is continuously executed for the prescribed number of rounds. The electric accessory control means 160 holds a big winning opening counter for storing the number of times the special electric accessory 542 is activated (that is, the number of rounds being executed). Here, the operation end condition (unit game end condition) of the special electric accessory 542 in the jackpot game is that a game ball of a prescribed count (“10” in this embodiment) enters the big winning hole 54. Alternatively, the opening time of the big winning opening 54 has reached the maximum opening time (“29 seconds” in this embodiment).

In addition, the electric role product control means 160 outputs a control signal to the ordinary electric role product solenoid 523 when the result of the determination of whether or not the normal symbol corresponds to a hit, and the normal electric role product 522 (the second 2 Controls the opening and closing of the starting port 52). Here, as described above, the electric accessory control means 160 opens the normal electric accessory 522 for only 0.2 seconds in the low base state in which the electric chew support function (open extension function) is not activated. Then, in the high base state in which the electric chew support function (open extension function) is operating, the normal electric accessory 522 is opened for 5.8 seconds. Here, the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory 522 is that a predetermined number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls enter the second start port 52, or that the second start port 52 The opening time reaches the maximum opening time (“0.2 seconds” or “5.8 seconds” in this embodiment).

The game state control means 165, when the result of the winning judgment of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the big win game based on the big win type (the kind of the symbol group) and the game state at the time of winning the big win. determines the game state after the end of , and switches the game state after the big win game ends. In this embodiment, as described above, as the game state of multiple types, normal game state (low probability low base state), time-saving game state (low probability low base state), variable game state (high probability high base state) One of a plurality of types of game states is set alternatively. Since each game state has already been described in detail, redundant description will be omitted here.

In addition, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the end of the big win game based on the big win type (type of symbol group) when the big win game is executed, and after the end of the big win game Toggle the variation pattern selection state of . In this embodiment, as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection state, normal selection state, time saving selection state, probability variation selection state is set, depending on the determined game state and jackpot type, the number of times of variation display of special symbols, etc. Therefore, one of a plurality of variations pattern selection states is set alternatively. Since each variation pattern selection state has already been described in detail, redundant description will be omitted here.

In addition, the game state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as a "game state designation command") including the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information, and stores this command in the main information storage means 180. Store in the area.

The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I/O port circuit 104, and inspects the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, radio wave detection signal by the radio wave sensor, door/frame opening signal, etc. , determines whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, in order to instruct the effect control board 200 to perform an error state effect, a effect control command ("error effect designation command") including the error information is requested. Although omitted in FIG. 4 and the like, the door opening switch is means for detecting whether or not the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame opening switch detects whether or not the front frame 2 is open. The back set open switch is means for detecting whether or not the back set board 30 is open. Also, the magnetic sensor and radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting so-called fraudulent gaming behavior.

The main information storage means 180 stores the random number information acquired in the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, the operation reservation ball information of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the game state (probability fluctuation function, fluctuation time) related to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game shortening function, electric chew support function) information, information on variation pattern selection status, information on the result of judging the success or failure of special symbols and normal symbols (big hit, lose), stop symbols (including symbol groups) related to special symbols and normal symbols Information, information on special symbols and normal symbols variation pattern (including variation addition pattern), information on big hit game (number of rounds, opening time, opening mode (number of openings per round game), etc.), special symbol display device 71, 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric accessory 542, information on the performance control command data, etc., and a predetermined storage for storing each information. have an area.

The command transmission/reception means 190 is configured to transmit various performance control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 to the performance control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when there is a command transmission request. It is Each effect control command has a 2-byte configuration including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. Bit 7 of EVENT data is set to "0". When transmitting such information as valid information, a strobe signal is output at each transmission timing of MODE and EVENT. As a general rule, the effect control commands generated in each process are transmitted one command per interrupt period according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 .

As shown in FIG. 4, the effect control board 200 includes effect lottery random number generation means 210, effect control means 220, lamp control means 230, role control means 240, error effect control means 250, sub-main information storage means 260, command transmitting and receiving means 270; It should be noted that the above-described means in the effect control board 200, sub-main CPU201 arranged on the effect control board 200, ROM202, RAM203, hardware such as electronic circuits, and software such as control programs stored in the ROM202. It is a functional representation of something.

The effect lottery random number generating means 210 includes a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by program processing of the sub-main CPU 201 . These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. The software random numbers include the pre-reading lottery random number used in the lottery of the pre-reading effect, the decorative pattern random number used in the lottery of the stop pattern of the decorative pattern, the variable effect pattern random number used in the lottery of the variable effect pattern of the decorative pattern, and the advance notice effect. It includes a notice lottery random number used for lottery, a jackpot performance pattern random number used for lottery for a jackpot performance pattern, and a stage lottery random number used for stage shift lottery. These random numbers are updated using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the main processing of the effect control side described later (when the effect control command is not received from the main control board 100). do.

Effect generalizing means 220 includes effect mode control means 221 , pending information display control means 222 , prefetching notice control means 223 , fluctuation effect control means 224 , decoration pattern control means 225 , notice effect control means 226 and special game effect control means 227 . include.

The production mode control means 221, based on the game state designation command etc. from the main control board 100, controls the production mode (" (also referred to as "game production mode"). In this embodiment, as a plurality of production modes, "normal production mode", "time saving production mode", "probability variable production mode" are set, and the game state (or fluctuation pattern) managed on the main control board 100 side Selected state) and the number of variable display times of special symbols, one of a plurality of types of performance modes is set alternatively, and a variable performance corresponding to the set performance mode is executed. In this embodiment, when the game state is the normal game state, the "normal production mode" is set, and when the game state is the time-saving game state, the "time-saving production mode" is set, and the game state is the variable probability game state. When there is, "probability variation production mode" is set. When one of the production modes is set, as a production (variable production) that suggests that you are staying in the production mode, a background image dedicated to the production mode (a background image that is displayed on the back of the decorative pattern) is displayed on the screen. ) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11 . Since the background image and BGM are set differently for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode the player is currently staying in from the type of the background image or BGM. ing.

The holding information display control means 222 has a first holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and a second holding ball number counter for counting the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol. have. Reservation information display control means 222, when receiving a pattern memory number command from main control board 100, updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information on the number of operation reservation balls included in this command. On the other hand, when the hold information display control means 222 receives a variation start command from the main control board 100, that is, when the operation hold ball is digested, it updates (subtracts) the value of the corresponding counter. In addition, the pending information display control means 222 displays the number of active pending balls of the first special symbol on the pending image display section 710 of the effect display device 70 based on the values of the first pending ball number counter and the second pending ball number counter. and the number of pending images corresponding to the number of active pending balls of the second special symbol are displayed. In addition, the pending information display control means 222 is displayed in the changing image display area 720 of the effect display device 70 by digesting the operation pending ball (first active pending ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. , control is performed to display a changing image that is displayed after being switched to a holding image corresponding to this operation holding ball. In this embodiment, unless explicitly mentioned, the reserved image of the first special symbol and the reserved image of the second special symbol are simply referred to as "held image" without distinguishing between them, and the changing image of the first special symbol It may simply be referred to as a "fluctuation image" without distinguishing it from the fluctuation image of the second special symbol.

The pre-reading notice control means 223 executes a pre-reading determination (referred to as "pre-reading lottery") for the operation suspension ball to be the target of the pre-reading notice effect. The look-ahead notice effect is a so-called continuous notice effect that foretells the possibility of a jackpot winning or a high-expectation effect (such as a reach effect) occurring over one or more times of variable display before the operation reserve ball targeted for look-ahead is digested. is generated as an aspect of At this time, the pre-reading lottery is performed based on the information of the pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command from the main control board 100 . Here, when the pre-reading notice control means 223 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 100, it distinguishes between the information of the pre-determination result of the first special symbol and the information of the pre-determination result of the second special symbol, respectively Up to a predetermined upper limit number (4), they are temporarily stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 in a form linked to the entry order of the pending balls. This look-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the reservation storage area of the main control board 100, and the reservation 1 storage area (first reservation storage area), A reserved 2 storage area (second reserved storage area), a reserved 3 storage area (third reserved storage area), and a reserved 4 storage area (fourth reserved storage area) are provided. Each reservation storage area can store information on the result of propriety prior determination, information on the result of prior determination of pattern, and information on the result of prior determination of variation pattern as a set. The information of the pre-determination result is stored in the order of reservation 1 storage area, reservation 2 storage area, reservation 3 storage area, reservation 4 storage area, reservation 1 storage area, reservation 2 storage area, reservation 3 storage area, reservation 4. It is digested in order of storage area (first-in first-out principle). In addition, when the information of the preliminary judgment result in the reservation 1 storage area is digested, the information of the preliminary judgment result stored in the reservation 2 storage area, the reservation 3 storage area, and the reservation 4 storage area is stored in the storage areas of lower numbers. While shifting, clear the contents of the reserved 4 storage area to zero.

The variation production control means 224 controls the variation process (production process ) is determined by lottery. The variable performance control means 224 holds a plurality of types of variable performance pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variable performance pattern of decorative symbols, and selects a special symbol variation pattern from among these multiple types of variable performance pattern tables. A variable effect pattern table corresponding to (variable time) is selected. Here, on the side of the main control board 100, the main variation pattern of the special symbol (for example, "SP reach A", "SP reach B", etc.) is determined, while on the production control board 200 side, based on the main variation pattern A sub-variation pattern (for example, “SP reach A1, A2 . In the decorative pattern fluctuation production pattern, the decorative pattern fluctuation display mode, that is, the scenario of the series of production display process from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the end of the fluctuation is defined. Timings for producing effects are also stipulated as a time schedule. Also, regarding the variation production pattern of this decorative pattern, even if the variation pattern of the special pattern is the same (even if the same information variation start command is received), if the production mode during stay is different, production Variation performance patterns with different contents can be selected. That is, the variable effect pattern table is prepared for each effect mode during stay.

In addition, the fluctuation effect control means 224 is triggered by the reception of the standby demonstration command from the main control board 100 until the fluctuation display of the special symbol is started after receiving the standby demonstration command (the next fluctuation start During the customer waiting period (until the command is received), for example, a standby demonstration effect (customer waiting demonstration effect) for reproducing a moving image for demonstration is executed.

The decoration symbol control means 225 is based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100 and the variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect control means 224. The final combination of symbols to be stopped (left, middle, and right symbols) is determined by lottery. In this example, three pattern rows containing a plurality of types of decorative patterns are formed, and the decorative patterns are formed by identifying elements such as numbers. In addition, the decorative symbol control means 225 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when determining a combination of decorative symbol stop symbols (also referred to as a "stop symbol pattern") by lottery. The plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for big hits, a stop symbol pattern table for out of reach, and a stop symbol pattern table for non-out of reach. A stop pattern of the decorative pattern is formed as a combination of three patterns, and includes a ``stop pattern indicating a big win (big hit pattern)'' and a ``stop pattern indicating a loss (lost pattern)''. A jackpot pattern indicating a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "7, 7, 7") in which three identical odd-numbered patterns are aligned. A jackpot pattern indicating a normal jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is a combination of stop modes (for example, "2, 2, 2") in which three patterns of the same even number are aligned. A winning pattern is a combination of stop patterns (for example, "1, 3, 8") in which at least one of the three patterns is a pattern with a number different from the other numbers. Here, out of the winning symbols, the reach-losing symbols are a combination of stop modes (for example, "3.1.3") in which only the middle symbols are shifted back and forth by several frames while the left and right symbols match. Become. In addition, in the case of a small winning pattern or a 2R big winning pattern even if it is a big winning pattern, there may be a combination of predetermined stop modes such as "3, 5, 7", for example. Also, if the lottery result is a non-reach out, a specific outcome called a so-called "chance eye" (for example, "1, 2, 3" or "5, 6, 7", etc. "2, 2, 3", "5, 5, 6", etc.) may be selected as the offset. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous effect, when performing temporary stop display and re-fluctuation display before final stop symbol is confirmed and displayed, a special symbol ( Pseudo consecutive pattern) is selected. In the case of displaying temporary stop symbols suggesting the occurrence of a pseudo-run, at least one stop symbol (typically a middle symbol) out of the stop symbols of the three rows of decorative symbols is displayed with characters such as "NEXT". There are cases where special symbols (pseudo-continuous symbols) are replaced and displayed (for example, "2, NEXT, 3", etc.). The order of stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each variable effect pattern to be described later. In this embodiment, as a rule, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol→right symbol→middle symbol. However, in the case of a variable production pattern with a shortened variation in which the fluctuation time is set to be extremely short, the left design, middle design, and right design are stopped almost simultaneously, and in the case of a special fluctuation production pattern, the right design → It is also possible to stop in the order of middle symbols→left symbols, and in this case, there is a tendency that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes relatively high. In addition, it is desirable that the left pattern, the right pattern, and the middle pattern start to fluctuate at the same time, regardless of the stop order. However, as a special variation effect pattern, the variation may be started in the order of the left design, the right design, and the middle design.

Here, FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the symbol attributes of the decorative symbols in this embodiment. A decorative pattern is formed by a combination of an identification element consisting of numbers and a color (display color) given to the identification element. In this embodiment, a total of 9 types of numerals "1" to "9" are set as identification elements (that is, there are a total of 9 types of decorative patterns). Each decorative pattern is arranged in the order of "1" to "9" according to the arrangement of the pattern rows, and the order of "1" to "9" (or the order of "9" to "1") on the effect display device 70. is cyclically displayed or scrolled in each display area Z1, Z2, Z3, and after "9", it returns to "1" (or returns to "9" again after "1"). . This specification is the same in other embodiments. Each decorative pattern has a pattern attribute determined by the type of color applied to the identification element. That is, even if a plurality of decorative patterns are composed of different identification elements, they are grouped into the same pattern attribute by being given the same color. In this example, three colors of "blue", "red" and "gold" are set as the colors of the decorative pattern. In the drawings, the display modes of the three types of decorative patterns of "blue", "red", and "gold" are represented by "outline", "diagonal lines", and "solid". Specifically, decorative patterns "2", "4", "6", and "8" are classified into blue pattern attributes (blue attributes), and decorative patterns "1", "3", "5", and "9" are classified into blue pattern attributes (blue attributes). ” is classified into the red design attribute (red attribute), and the decorative design “7” is classified into the gold design attribute (golden attribute). In the present embodiment, as the symbol attributes of the decorative symbols, the expectation of winning ball output and the expectation of probability change increase in the order of "blue"<"red"<"golden" one step at a time. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the decorative design with the blue attribute is also referred to as "blue design", the decorative design with red attribute is also referred to as "red design", and the decorative design with gold attribute is also referred to as "gold design".

A notice performance control means 226 draws lots for notice performance patterns defining details of the notice performance executed at each stage of the variation process of the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variation performance pattern determined by the variation performance control means 224. - 特許庁Determined by The notice performance patterns include performance patterns for temporarily or stepwise image display of specific character images, animations, etc., performance patterns for outputting specific sounds, performance patterns for operating movable accessories, and the like. The advance notice performance is executed in parallel with the variable display of the decorative pattern, and suggests in advance that the degree of reliability of the big win that the pattern fluctuation is stopped in the big win mode is high. The advance notice performance includes the advance notice performance executed before the ready-to-win state occurs (including when the ready-to-win state occurs) in the variable display process of the decorative pattern, and the notice performance to be executed after the ready-to-win state occurs. Each notice effect has a different hit reliability, and basically, the notice effect displayed after the occurrence of reach is relatively more expected than the notice effect displayed before the occurrence of reach. getting higher. A notice performance control means 226 holds a notice lottery table referred to when selecting a notice performance pattern for each kind of notice performance, and makes a notice corresponding to the kind of notice performance occurring along the scenario of the variable performance pattern. A lottery table is selected. Specific types of notice effects include, for example, comment notice effects, background notice effects, SU (step-up) notice effects, logo notice effects, mini character notice effects, group notice effects, and role notice effects. ing. This advance notice effect is basically performed by synthesizing display of one or a plurality of advance notice effects with the variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 70 . Therefore, even if the variable display of decorative symbols is performed by the same variable performance pattern, it is possible to generate various performance modes by combining with one or a plurality of advance notice performances.

The special game effect control means 227 determines the contents of the effect during the big win (big win effect pattern) for notifying that the big win game is in progress. The performance during the big win includes a big win start demonstration performance for reporting the start of the big win game, a round performance for reporting that the round game is in progress, and a big win end demonstration performance for reporting the end of the big win game. When the special game effect control means 227 receives the jackpot start demonstration command from the main control board 100, the special game effect control means 227, based on the information of the jackpot type stored in the sub-main information storage means 260, generates a effect pattern during the jackpot (jackpot start demo effect pattern). , round performance pattern, jackpot end demo performance pattern) are determined. In this big win performance pattern, a big win start demonstration performance time, a round performance time (a performance time corresponding to the opening pattern of the big prize winning port 54), and a big win end demonstration performance time are set along the time axis. A series of performance contents are set. In addition, the special game effect control means 227 executes the big win start demonstration effect in response to receiving the big win start demonstration command from the main control board 100 according to the big win effect pattern, and in response to receiving the round effect designation command. Each round performance is executed, and when a big win end demonstration command is received, the big win end demonstration performance is executed. In the jackpot start demonstration effect, for example, the words "jackpot start" are displayed on the screen to announce the start of the jackpot game. In addition, in the round effect, for example, the number of rounds currently being executed and the number of prize balls won are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that liven up the jackpot game are displayed. Then, in the jackpot end demonstration performance, for example, characters of "jackpot end" are displayed on the screen to announce the end of the jackpot game, and then the performance indicating the game state (mode) to be shifted to is displayed.

As described above, the effect control means 220 generates image control commands related to images and sounds based on the determined effect contents (prefetch effect pattern, variable effect pattern, advance notice effect pattern, stop symbol pattern, jackpot effect pattern, etc.), This is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. FIG.

The lamp control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the color of light emitted, etc. according to the content of the effect set by the effect control means 220 . The lamp control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling lighting of the effect lamps LP (the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 80), and lamp data corresponding to the determined effect pattern. , and transmits this lamp control signal (lamp data) to the lamp connection board 91 .

The role control means 240 controls driving of each movable role 24 according to the content of the effect set by the effect control means 220 . The role control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for controlling the driving of the movable role 24, and transmits a drive control signal (driving data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. .

The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and to notify that an error state has occurred in the game machine according to the error effect pattern. there is

The sub-main information storage means 260 is configured to temporarily store decorative pattern information, variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, control command information, and the like. It has a storage area. For example, the command storage area includes an effect control command buffer for storing effect control commands from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands for the image control board 300, and an image control board 300. includes an ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

The command transmission/reception means 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 . Command transmitting/receiving means 270 generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal described above from the main control board 100, executes the reception interrupt processing of the production control command (details will be described later), and transmits various production control commands in this interrupt processing. It is designed to be acquired. In addition, when the command transmitting/receiving means 270 receives the strobe signal, the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command is preferentially performed over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing with a priority level less than 7, which will be described later). ing.

Also, the command transmitting/receiving means 270 is stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 in order to instruct the execution of the effect contents (fluctuation effect pattern information, advance notice effect pattern information, decoration pattern information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The received image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by serial communication. In principle, the image control commands are transmitted at predetermined intervals (500 μs in this example) according to the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 . Thereby, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. , the notice effect is displayed in the form of being superimposed on the design change effect at each stage of the variable display process. Furthermore, the command transmission/reception means 270 receives an ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300 and stores this ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 .

[Various productions]
As described above, the pachinko game machine PA having such a configuration is configured such that various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game. Below, among various game effects, the contents of the effect during the big hit will be described. In the following, "restricting execution" or "regulating execution" means, for example, not executing all, not executing part of, relatively low priority of display or output, etc. It is used as a concept including Also, hereinafter, "execute (overlapping)" means that one execution period (or execution timing) overlaps with the other execution period (or execution timing). It is used as a concept including a case where the entire periods (or execution timings) overlap and a case where both execution periods (or execution timings) partially overlap.

[Production during the jackpot]
As described above, the during-big-hit production includes the big-hit start demonstration production, the round production, and the big-hit end demonstration production. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type (type of pattern group), the jackpot pattern combination (combination of decorative patterns when the jackpot occurs), and the production pattern during the jackpot. (A) in the figure is referred to when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal game state, and (B) in the figure is referred to when the game state at the time of the jackpot is the time-saving game state or the variable probability game state. . As shown in FIG. 11, the type of the jackpot symbol combination and the type of the jackpot effect pattern are determined according to the jackpot type (symbol group) selected in the special symbol lottery process. In this embodiment, even if the jackpot types are the same, the type of the jackpot pattern combination and the jackpot medium performance pattern can be different according to the game state when the jackpot is won.

The jackpot pattern combination is composed of a combination of stop modes "*.*.*" in which three decorative patterns of the same number (identification element) are aligned (*: decorative pattern of an arbitrary number). The jackpot pattern combinations are “specific jackpots” such as “1.1.1”, “3.3.3”, “5.5.5”, “7.7.7” and “9.9.9”. The odd number pattern combination (red pattern combination, gold pattern combination) and "specific jackpots" such as "2 2 2", "4 4 4", "6 6 6", "8 8 8" ” or an even symbol combination (blue symbol combination) indicating a “normal jackpot”. In other words, the odd pattern combination (gold pattern combination, red pattern combination) is a jackpot pattern combination that confirms that you have won the "specific jackpot", while the even number pattern combination (blue pattern combination) is a "specific jackpot" and " It is an undetermined jackpot pattern combination which jackpot type of "normal jackpot" is won.

The gold symbol combination is a jackpot symbol combination that notifies that the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds" and that the player has won a "specific jackpot" that triggers the shift to the probability variable gaming state. That is, the gold pattern combination is a jackpot pattern combination that definitely informs that the player wins the maximum advantage jackpot (16R specific jackpot) which is the most advantageous to the player among a plurality of jackpot types. The red symbol combination is uncertain whether the actual number of rounds is either ``16 rounds'' or ``4 rounds'', but the winning of the ``specific jackpot'' that triggers the transition to the variable game state. It is a big hit pattern combination that informs of. The blue symbol combination is confirmed that the actual number of rounds is "4 rounds", but whether it is elected to the "specific jackpot" that triggers the transition to the variable gaming state, or to the "time-saving gaming state" It is a jackpot symbol combination that informs that it is uncertain whether the "normal jackpot", which is the trigger for transition, is won. Here, even if it is a blue symbol combination, the actual number of rounds may be "16 rounds" (that is, even if the actual number of rounds is "16 rounds", even if the blue symbol combination However, it is preferable that the red symbol combination is more likely to result in a substantial number of rounds of "16 rounds". In this case, as one of the "joyful jackpot effects" to be described later, a "joyful jackpot C effect" that is a variable promotion and a round promotion may be provided.

In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of jackpot production patterns, "super longevity jackpot performance", "Kotobuki jackpot A performance", "Kotobuki jackpot B performance", "big hit A performance", and "big hit B performance" are set. It is The super longevity jackpot effect is a jackpot mid-win effect pattern type set corresponding to the jackpot pattern combination being the “gold pattern combination”. Kotobuki big hit A production and Kotobuki big hit B production are the big hit medium production pattern types set corresponding to the big win pattern combination being "red pattern combination". The big-hit production A and the big-hit B production are the medium-big-hit production pattern types set corresponding to the big-hit pattern combination being the “blue pattern combination”. In other words, the big hit effect pattern type is set according to the symbol attributes (gold symbol, red symbol, blue symbol) of the big hit symbol combination.

Here, with reference to FIG. 11(A), a description will be given of a big win symbol combination and a big win production pattern selected when the game state at the time of winning the big win is the normal game state. First, when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, the "red symbol combination" or "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and the blue symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when ``red pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, ``Kotobuki jackpot A production'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot pattern, and ``blue pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern combination. In the case of the ``big win B effect'' is selected as the corresponding big win middle effect pattern. In addition, when the ``4R normal jackpot'' of the first special pattern is won, the ``blue pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern, and the ``great jackpot A performance'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot middle performance pattern. In addition, when the ``16R specific jackpot'' of the second special pattern is won, the ``gold pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern, and the ``super longevity jackpot performance'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot performance pattern. In addition, when the ``4R specific jackpot'' of the second special pattern is won, the ``red pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, and the ``Kotobuki jackpot A performance'' is selected as the corresponding performance pattern during the jackpot. In addition, when the ``4R normal jackpot'' of the second special pattern is won, the ``blue pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern, and the ``joy jackpot A performance'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium performance pattern.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 11(B), a description will be given of the jackpot symbol combination selected when the game state when the jackpot is won is the time-saving game state or the probability variable game state, and the effect pattern during the jackpot. When the ``4R specific jackpot'' of the first special pattern is won, the ``red pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, and the ``Kotobuki jackpot A performance'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium performance pattern. In addition, when the ``4R normal jackpot'' of the first special pattern is won, the ``blue pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, and the ``joy jackpot A performance'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot middle performance pattern. Also, when the second special symbol "16R specific jackpot" is won, "gold symbol combination" or "red symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the gold symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and the red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when the "gold pattern combination" is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, the "super longevity jackpot production" is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium production pattern, and the "red pattern combination" is selected as the jackpot pattern combination. In this case, "Kotobuki big win B effect" is selected as the corresponding big win effect pattern. When the second special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won, "red symbol combination" or "blue symbol combination" is selected as the jackpot symbol combination. For example, as the jackpot symbol combination, the red symbol combination is selected with a probability of 80%, and the blue symbol combination is selected with a probability of 20%. At this time, when ``red pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern combination, ``Kotobuki jackpot A production'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot pattern, and ``blue pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern combination. In the case that the pattern is a big win, the corresponding "big win B effect" is selected as the corresponding big win middle effect pattern. In addition, when the ``4R normal jackpot'' of the second special pattern is won, the ``blue pattern combination'' is selected as the jackpot pattern, and the ``joy jackpot A performance'' is selected as the corresponding jackpot medium performance pattern.

The super longevity jackpot performance is a jackpot performance pattern for definitely notifying that the player wins the maximum advantage jackpot (16R specific jackpot) with the highest degree of advantage for the player among a plurality of jackpot types.

Kotobuki jackpot A production and Kotobuki jackpot B production are confirmed to be elected to the "specific jackpot" type that triggers the transition to the variable game state, but until the predetermined number of rounds (4 rounds) is reached. is an effect pattern during a big win in which the effect progresses while the actual number of rounds is either "16 rounds" or "4 rounds" remains uncertain. Here, even if the Kotobuki jackpot A production reaches the predetermined number of rounds (fourth round), the promotion production (round promotion production) is not performed, and the specified number of rounds of the big hit game this time is "4 rounds". Something is certain. On the other hand, in Kotobuki big hit B production, when the predetermined number of rounds (4th round) is reached, a promotion production (round promotion production) occurs, and the specified number of rounds for this big win game is "16 rounds". (The specified number of rounds has been upgraded to "16 rounds") is confirmed.

It is confirmed that the actual number of rounds of the happy jackpot A performance and the happy jackpot B performance is ``four rounds'', but until the jackpot ending demo is reached, the ``specific jackpot'' that triggers the shift to the probability variable gaming state is established. This is a performance pattern during the jackpot, in which the performance progresses while it is uncertain whether the game is won in the ``normal jackpot'' that triggers the transition to the time-saving game state. Here, even if the big hit A production reaches the big hit end demonstration, the promotion production (variable promotion production) is not performed, and the type of this big hit is "normal big hit" (time saving after the end of this big hit game). to shift to the game state) is confirmed. On the other hand, when the big hit B effect reaches the jackpot end demonstration, a promotion effect (probability change promotion effect) occurs, and the current jackpot type is "specific jackpot" (probability change game state after the end of this big hit game ) is confirmed. In addition, in FIG. 11, the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type and the effect pattern during the jackpot is changed according to the game state when the jackpot is won. Correspondence may be established. Also, a 16R specific big hit may be provided for the first special symbol, and in that case, even when the first special symbol is a big hit, a super longevity big hit performance or a Kotobuki big hit B performance may be executed. In addition, the detailed contents of the promotion effect (round promotion effect, probability variation promotion effect) will be described later.

Next, the contents of each jackpot middle effect pattern will be described. 12 to 16 are schematic diagrams showing the contents of the effect pattern during the big hit. In the drawing, the corresponding relationship between the type of individual performance that occurs during the big win game and the generation timing is defined for each performance pattern during the big win. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding of the explanation, the opening mode of the big winning opening 54 is added. However, in this embodiment, as the opening mode of the big winning hole 54, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning hole 54 is set to an opening time in which a game ball of a specified count (full count) can enter or is easy to enter. Only the set "long opening" is prepared, but it is not limited to this configuration, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 is a specified count number (full count). A "short opening" that is set to an opening time that is impossible or difficult to enter may be prepared.

First, during the execution of the jackpot start demonstration, a screen suggesting the type of the jackpot mid-jackpot production (super longevity jackpot production, longevity jackpot production, happy jackpot production) is displayed, and any jackpot production is started for the player. It is suggested that In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is set to "5 seconds" in common for all jackpots.

During execution of each round game, a round effect screen is displayed according to the type of the effect during the big win (super longevity big win effect, Kotobuki big win effect, happy big win effect). That is, when the production pattern during the big hit is the super longevity jackpot production, the super longevity jackpot round screen, when it is the Kotobuki jackpot A production A or Kotobuki jackpot B production, the Kotobuki jackpot round screen, the big hit A production or the big hit B. In the case of production, a joyful big hit round screen is displayed. However, when a round promotion effect described later occurs in a predetermined round game, the type of the effect during the jackpot is promoted, and the round effect screen of the low-rank type is switched to the round effect screen of the high-rank type. It has become.

After the end of each round game, there is an interval which is a pause time (closing time of the big winning opening 54) from when the end of each round game is set until when the setting of the next round game or jackpot end demonstration is started. A period is set. Therefore, the special game is "jack start demo" → "round game" → "interval period" → "round game" → "interval period" → ... → "round game" → "interval period" → "jack end demo" It is deployed in such a way. In this embodiment, the interval time (interval period) is set to "2 seconds" in common for all jackpots. The details of this interval time will be described later.

During the execution of the jackpot end demonstration, the contents of the performance mode (game state) to be shifted to after the end of the jackpot game currently being executed are suggested, and the player is suggested to which direction mode to enter or continue. be done. In addition, during this jackpot end demonstration period, there is a case where a probability variation promotion effect or a holding consecutive suggestion effect, which will be described later, is performed. It should be noted that, in the holding continuation suggestion production performed during this jackpot end demonstration period, the holding continuation suggestion production (over winning production or bonus winning production) that is performed with the occurrence of over winning or bonus winning in the modified example described later Combined performance) is not included. That is, the holding consecutive suggestion effect according to the modified example described later is not the effect performed during the jackpot ending demonstration period, but the effect performed during the interval period. The details of the variable probability promotion effect and the pending consecutive suggestion effect of the present embodiment will be described later. In this embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpots. Regarding the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot end demonstration, as described above, the jackpot game at the time of the first hit (that is, the jackpot from the low-probability low base state) or the jackpot game during the series (that is, the high-probability Each demo time may be configured to be different depending on whether it is a high base state or a jackpot from a low probability high base state). Specifically, in the case of a jackpot game during a series of games, compared to the case of a jackpot game at the time of the first hit, the processing of the game before and after the jackpot proceeds more quickly. to advance), each demo time may be set to a relatively short time. In addition, as described above, when performing an effect to call attention to forgetting to take a prepaid card in the jackpot game at the time of the first win, it is preferable to perform it within the jackpot end demonstration period set for a relatively long time. There is, when performing an effect to call attention to forgetting to take a prepaid card in a jackpot game during a series of games, it can be performed during the round game execution period, not during the jackpot end demonstration period set for a relatively short time. preferred. In addition, with respect to the holding consecutive suggestion effect, in the jackpot game at the time of the first hit (that is, the jackpot from the low-probability low base state), it is preferable not to execute or to lower the execution probability even if there is a jackpot hold in the hold. Yes, in a jackpot game during a series of games (that is, a jackpot from a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state), it is preferable not to execute or to increase the execution probability even if there is a jackpot hold in the hold. . Furthermore, the holding consecutive suggestion performance is preferably carried out during execution of the special game corresponding to the 16R specific big win, and is carried out when the big win holding in the holding is the big win holding corresponding to the 16R specific big win. (That is, the jackpot in which the holding consecutive suggestion effect is displayed and the jackpot hold in the reservation that triggers the execution of the holding consecutive suggesting effect are only for the 16R specific jackpot, and the 4R specific / normal jackpot is the target It is preferable to avoid this).

Here, FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing the basic screen (round effect screen) during the round game. Although not shown, in the central area of the screen, various images (animation images, etc.) corresponding to the types of effect patterns during the big win are displayed in order to liven up the big win game.

A round display area 730 on the screen displays the number of rounds (the third round in the illustrated example) indicating how many times the round game currently being executed is. For example, when the round game currently being executed is the first round game (first round), "ROUND1" is displayed in the round display area, and the round game currently being executed is the second round game (second round game). If it is the second round), "ROUND2" is displayed in the round display area, and thereafter, "ROUND3", "ROUND4", .

In the right-handed display area 731 of the screen, a right-handed image (also referred to as a shooting instruction effect) is displayed to prompt the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area PA2 (right-handed shooting). In addition, in spite of the situation that should be hit to the right (during the jackpot), contrary to this, if the game ball flows down the left side area PA1 and enters the general winning openings 61 to 63, or the first start When the ball enters the mouth 51, that is, when the game ball is shot toward the left area PA1, an effect (caution notification effect) is executed to call attention so that the player does not hit left. can be In the caution notification effect, a message instructing to hit to the right is displayed on the screen, or the effect lamp LP lights in a special light emission mode (for example, high brightness, high speed or momentary blinking), so that the game ball The player is notified that the ball should be shot toward the right area PA2 (right shot). Note that, as the warning effect, for example, the speaker 11 may output a voice saying "Please hit to the right" (a right-handed instruction voice). As for this caution notification effect, it is desirable that it be in a conspicuous position (for example, the central display area) and size (for example, occupying most of the display area of the effect display device 70) so that the player can clearly see it. , the right-handed image, the display contents in the winning ball acquisition display area 732 described later, the display contents in the accumulated number of winning balls display area 733, the emphasis effect, and the display contents in the round display area 730 are displayed. It is preferable to configure it so that it can be displayed. However, since the right-handed image is also information that should be clearly communicated to the player (information on the appropriate firing position), it is possible to display the right-handed image and the caution notification effect in different display areas so that they are not superimposed. Appropriate. On the other hand, in order not to hinder the visibility of the caution notification effect, the display contents in the prize ball acquisition display area 732, the display contents in the accumulated prize ball number display area 733, the emphasized effect, and the display contents in the round display area 730, which will be described later, are displayed. It is desirable to configure such that the display priority is also high (that is, while superimposed display is possible, in that case the caution notification effect is displayed in front). This shooting instruction effect is displayed under the display condition that the ball enters the general winning holes 61 to 63 or the first starting hole 51 during the big hit, and the display time is set to 10 seconds. It is However, if the display condition is satisfied again before the display time of 10 seconds elapses, the display time is set to 10 seconds again (that is, the display time is extended). In addition, it is preferable to display the right-handed image and warning effect not only during the big win, but also in the high base state such as the high-probability high base state and the low-probability high base state. It is displayed continuously over the high base state, and if the warning effect is displayed when less than 10 seconds are left until the end of the jackpot (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the jackpot end demonstration), the state will change from the middle jackpot to the high base state. It is desirable to be configured so that it is continuously displayed over the entire period.

In the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, when a predetermined prize (over prize or bonus prize to be described later) occurs, the number of prize balls given based on the prize is displayed in order to notify that the prize has occurred. (number of prize balls per unit) is displayed. This prize ball acquisition display area 732 displays the number of prize balls acquired by the over winning when over winning occurs (the number of unit winning balls acquired when one game ball wins in the big winning opening 54). The first prize ball acquisition display area 732A and the number of prize balls acquired by the bonus winning when the bonus winning occurs (unit winning ball number acquired when one game ball wins in the general winning opening 64) and a second winning display area 732B to be displayed. For example, when over winning occurs, "+15pt" corresponding to the number of unit prize balls (15) of the big winning opening 54 is displayed, and when a bonus winning occurs, the unit prize of the general winning opening 64 is displayed. "+3pt" corresponding to the number of balls (three) is displayed. As a modification, the first winning display area 732A and the second winning display area 732B may be separated from each other.

In the cumulative number of winning balls display area 733 of the screen, the cumulative number of winning balls acquired up to the present time based on the game balls entering the big winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 in the jackpot game during the continuous game ( (referred to as "accumulated number of prize balls") is displayed. "Renso" is a state in which the specific game state continues without returning to the non-specific game state after the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state (when the first hit is It is a state in which big hits in a specific game state occur continuously after that as a starting point). In addition, "specific game state" is a game state in which the probability of transition to a special game is increased than the normal game state (low probability low base state), and the probability variation function of special symbols, the variation time of special symbols A state in which at least one of the shortening function and the power chew support function is activated (at least one of the high-probability high-base state, low-probability high-base state, and high-probability low-base state). In this embodiment, the game state (high base state) in which at least the electric chew support function is operating corresponds to the "specific game state". The cumulative number of prize balls also includes the number of prize balls obtained by entering the game balls into the special prize winning opening 54 or the general winning prize opening 64 in the special game when the first hit occurs. Note that the cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls given by the over-win, which will be described later, or may not include the number of prize balls given by the over-win. In addition, the cumulative number of prize balls may include the number of prize balls provided by the bonus prize described later, or may not include the number of prize balls provided by the bonus prize. . The over winning effect, which will be described later, is executed only during the big win (it can be executed because the big winning hole 54 can be opened and the ball can be entered), but the general winning hole 64 is executed during the big win. You can enter the ball with or without it. However, the bonus winning effect, which will be described later, is also configured to be executed only during the big hit. Regarding bonus prizes, if the jackpot is in progress, the bonus prize effect will be executed, but if the probability is low and the base state is low, a special effect that is different from the bonus prize (for example, the line "Don't enter here now!" A special effect with display and sound is executed, however, it may be generated when 3 balls are hit within a predetermined time (for example, within 5 seconds) instead of 1 ball. If it is in the base state or the low-probability high-base state, neither the bonus prize effect nor the special effect is executed (in that case, nothing needs to be executed, but as another effect, a red flame is displayed around the frame of the effect display device 70). may be executed to the extent that is generated for a moment).

In addition to the accumulated number of prize balls, or instead of the number of accumulated prize balls, it is based on the game ball entering the big winning hole 54 or the general winning hole 64 in one big hit game currently being executed. The cumulative value of the number of prize balls acquired up to the present time (referred to as "the number of prize balls during the jackpot") may be displayed. Since the number of prize balls in the jackpot is the number of prize balls that the player actually obtained during execution of one jackpot game, basically, the number of obtainable prize balls set according to the type of jackpot ( It may be less than the theoretical expected number of prize balls), but it will not exceed the number of obtainable prize balls. However, when an over-winning, which will be described later, occurs, the number of prize balls in the jackpot may exceed the number of obtainable prize balls (theoretically expected number of prize balls) set according to the type of jackpot.

In addition, although not shown, during consecutive games, the number of consecutive big wins in a specific game state or the number of consecutive games including the first hit (the number of times with one added) is displayed. good too. For example, if the big win is made three times in the specific game state after the first win, a display such as "three consecutive games" or "four consecutive games" may be displayed during the big win. Also, in each round of the special game, a pseudo decorative pattern (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo decorative pattern") may be displayed in a variable display and a stop display (temporary stop display, fixed stop display). It is preferable that this pseudo decoration pattern is a pattern mode (design dedicated to the big win) different from the normal decoration pattern that is variably displayed during the non-special game. Specifically, if the decorative patterns that are variably displayed during the non-special game consist of patterns (characters) and numbers, during the special game, the decorative patterns are only numbers and their sizes are reduced. Alternatively, if the decorative symbols variably displayed during the non-special game consist only of numbers, during the special game the decorative symbols having only the same numbers are reduced in size. Furthermore, when a double number such as ``7.7.7'' is aligned at the time of a big hit, it is sufficient to recognize which decorative pattern has resulted in a big hit, so ``7.7.7'' is displayed during the special game. Instead, only "7" (not a combination of three decorative symbols, but only one decorative symbol) should be displayed. In addition, during execution of the jackpot game (round game), a “winning-related effect”, which is a characteristic effect of the present embodiment, is executed.

[Award-winning production]
Next, the winning-related effect of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 18 is a conceptual diagram for explaining the configuration of the winning-related effect of this embodiment. Winning-related effects are effects that are executed based on a game ball entering a specific winning hole (big winning hole 54 or general winning hole 64) during execution of a big win game. The prize-winning effects include (A) a special prize-winning effect and (B) a general prize-winning effect.

<A. Grand prize winner performance>
The big winning opening winning effect is an effect that is executed when the game ball enters the big winning opening 54 during execution of the special game. The big prize mouth winning effect includes a big prize mouth normal winning effect, a big prize mouth over winning effect, and a big prize mouth count-up effect. In the following, except for special cases, (a) the game ball enters the big winning hole 54, (b) the game ball enters the big winning hole 54, and (c) the game ball Being detected by the big winning slot switch 541 and (d) receiving a big winning slot winning command from the main control board 100 are used synonymously.

«A-1. Grand Prize Opening Normal Prize-winning Performance≫
The big winning hole normal winning effect is an effect for notifying that the game ball has entered the big winning hole 54, targeting the winning of the game ball within the prescribed count number to the big winning hole 54.例文帳に追加In other words, the large winning opening normal winning effect is performed each time a game ball enters the large winning opening 54 until the number of game balls entering the large winning opening 54 in one round game reaches a prescribed count number. It becomes a performance. In this embodiment, although a specific example of the special prize opening normal prize effect is not particularly specified, at least one of a plurality of effect means such as the effect display device 70, the speaker 11, the effect lamp LP, and the movable accessory 24 is used. A normal prize-winning effect is performed at the big prize-winning mouth. As an example, (1) display an object corresponding to the prescribed count number in one unit game (for example, display a treasure box for the prescribed count number in one unit game), and play the game to the big winning opening 54 (2) A speaker for outputting a sound "charin" every time a game ball enters the big winning slot 54. 11, and (3) an effect with the effect lamp LP in which the lamp blinks twice every time the game ball enters the big winning hole 54, and the like. It should be noted that, as a modification of the present embodiment, only the large winning opening count-up effect described later is provided for the winning of game balls into the large winning opening 54 up to the prescribed count number without providing the large winning opening normal winning effect. may be configured to do so.

«A-2. Grand prize mouth over prize-winning performance≫
The large winning opening over winning effect (also called "over winning effect") targets the winning of game balls that exceed the specified count number to the big winning opening 54 (over winning), and the game ball goes to the big winning opening 54. This is a production that suggests or notifies that a prize has been won. "Over winning" means that a game ball exceeding the specified count number (in this embodiment, the 11th game ball or later) is detected by the big winning opening switch 541 during the execution of one round game. say. In this embodiment, as will be described in detail later, the effective detection period of the big winning opening switch 541 is the detection grace period after each round game is completed (in this embodiment, it is the same period as the interval period, but the interval period is detected). The grace period may be a different period, and for example, it is a waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demonstration, and is closed from the start of the closing operation of the big winning opening 54. If the round game waiting time (unit game waiting time) which is the period during which is maintained or the interval period which is the end demonstration waiting time is set to 2 seconds, the detection grace period is between each round game or the final round It is a period set between the game and the jackpot end demonstration, and it is possible to detect the entry of game balls (such as the entry of game balls exceeding the prescribed count number) after the start of the closing operation of the big prize opening 54. The detection grace period, which is the period for detecting, may be set to 1 second after the start of the closing operation of the big winning opening 54 while at least partially overlapping with the interval period, or may be set to 3 seconds. may be) has passed, and over-winning can occur within this interval period (within the detection grace period). As an example of over-winning, when the tenth count game ball enters the big winning opening 54 and is detected by the big winning opening switch 541, the closing operation of the big winning opening 54 is started. If the subsequent game ball (game ball after the 11th count) is in the big winning hole 54 before the winning opening 54 is closed, this subsequent game ball (the game after the 11th count) Ball) is detected by the large winning opening switch 541 within the interval period (within the detection grace period), thereby causing over winning.

The types of over-winning effects include over-winning image display effects and over-winning sound output effects. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the over winning effect of the present embodiment. It should be noted that the effect mode of the over-winning effect is preferably different from the effect mode of the above-described large winning opening normal winning effect. In addition, as a modified example, as an effect related to over-winning, only over-winning images may be installed (over-winning sounds are not installed), or only over-winning sounds are installed (over-winning images are not installed).

The over-winning image display effect is an effect of displaying an image suggesting that over-winning has occurred (referred to as an "over-winning image"). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, an over-winning image with characters "+15pt" is displayed as an over-winning image in the winning ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, and "15" is displayed based on the occurrence of over-winning. It is suggested that he won the prize ball. As a result, the player can intuitively understand that over-winning has occurred.

The over-winning sound output effect is a effect of outputting from the speaker 11 a sound (“over-winning sound”) suggesting that an over-winning has occurred. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, a sound effect (a character's voice) saying "You did it" is output from the speaker 11, suggesting that an over-win has occurred.

It should be noted that, as a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns for over-winning effect may be provided. In other words, multiple types of over-winning images or multiple types of over-winning sounds may be prepared, and one of the over-winning images and over-winning sounds may be selected by a drawing for production when an over-winning occurs. good. In this case, depending on the type of the over-winning image or the over-winning sound, it is possible to make a suggestion of a holding series, a variable probability, a suggestion of the number of rounds, or the like. As an example, there is only one type of over-winning image, "+15pt", while over-winning sounds include "good", "that's good", and "congratulations" in addition to "you did it". Above all, when an over-winning sound such as "congratulations" is generated, (1) the effect also serves as a suggestion of a holding series, and (2) it also serves as a role of suggesting that the jackpot currently being executed is a definite variable jackpot. (3) It may also play a role of suggesting that the currently executed jackpot is not the 4R jackpot but the 16R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modification of the present embodiment, multiple types of over-winning sounds are set, and in addition to over-winning, an on-hold continuation is generated according to the type of over-winning sound. A configuration may be employed that suggests the possibility that the player is in a winning position (that is, both the over-winning effect and the pending consecutive-suggesting effect are used). Here, "retained within the reserve" means that when the result of the judgment of whether the special symbol performed by digesting a certain preceding ball with pending operation is a big hit, it is related to this preceding ball with pending operation. A big hit is scheduled to occur in one or more succeeding operation pending balls that exist at a predetermined timing from when the special symbol success/failure determination is permitted until the end of the special game executed in the wake of the big win. It means that the operation retention ball (also referred to as “jackpot retention”) is included. In this modified example, an over-winning sound A (“You did it”) and an over-winning sound B (“Congratulations”) are prepared as multiple kinds of over-winning sounds. Then, if there is no jackpot hold when the over-winning occurs (if the suspension-in-residence is not established), the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "100%", and the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is "0%". ”. On the other hand, if there is a jackpot pending at the time of the occurrence of the over-winning (if the suspension is established), the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "0%", and the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is "100%". ”. That is, the over-winning sound A is a sound of a normal mode suggesting that an over-winning has occurred and that the pending game has not been established. The over-winning sound B is a sound of a special mode suggesting that over-winning has occurred and that the pending game has been established. In addition, the selection rate of the over winning sounds A and B may be set as appropriate. may be "80%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B may be "20%". In addition, in the above modification, the case where the holding consecutive suggestion effect is applied to the over winning sound output effect has been described as an example, but the holding consecutive suggesting effect may be applied to the over winning image display effect (for example, over winning If "+15pt" is displayed in black characters as an image display effect, it is unlikely that the pending internal relationship has not been established or has been established, but if it is displayed in gold characters, it means that the pending internal relationship It may be a specification that the Zhuang has been established or has a high possibility of being established). Also, in the above modification, the over-winning sound B as a holding consecutive suggestion has been described, but the over-winning sound B may be a specification that has a role of probability variation suggestion or round number suggestion. Depending on whether the jackpot being played is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), the selection rate of the over-winning sound A and B is set to "100%" in the case of a normal jackpot. , the selection rate of over-winning sound B is "0%", while in the case of a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), the selection rate of over-winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of over-winning sound B is "100". %", or the selection rate of over winning sound A may be set to "80%" and the selection rate of over winning sound B to "20%", depending on whether the currently executed jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot. Accordingly, in the case of the 4R jackpot, the selection rate of the over winning sounds A and B is "100%" and the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "0%", while the selection rate of the over winning sound B is "0%". In the case of , the selection rate of over winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of over winning sound B is "100%", or the selection rate of over winning sound A is "80%" and over winning sound B is selected. The rate may be "20%".

In addition, in this embodiment, a "special figure 2 priority digestion method" is adopted that preferentially digests the operation retention ball of the second special symbol over the operation retention ball of the first special symbol. Only the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol may be targeted as the target operation reservation ball. In addition, when the game state at the time of the occurrence of the jackpot that triggers the execution of the special game is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the special game is also the specific game state (high base state). Alternatively, the holding consecutive suggestion effect may be executed with the over winning occurring during the execution of the special game as a trigger. Also, on the premise that the preceding actuation hold ball will be a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), and if the subsequent actuation hold ball contains a specific hold that will be a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) as the earliest specific hold In addition, it is also possible to execute the holding consecutive suggesting effect with the over winning that occurs during the execution of the special game as a trigger. In other words, even if there is a jackpot hold in the subsequent operation hold, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot hold (if there are multiple jackpot holds, the first jackpot hold) is a low-profit jackpot, the hold It may be configured so as not to execute the suggestion production. In other words, when the holding consecutive suggestion effect occurs during the execution of the special game, it is certain that the holding consecutive game will be played with the high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot).

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, in addition to over winning, the possibility of winning a variable probability jackpot may be indicated by over winning effect. In other words, the over winning effect and the probability variation suggesting effect may be combined. The probability variation suggestion production is that the type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a specific jackpot (variability jackpot), that is, the production that suggests that the special game will shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end is. In this modification, for example, a plurality of types of over-winning sounds A to C are set, and if the jackpot type won this time is the normal jackpot, the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "70%", and the over-winning sound The selection rate of B is "30%", and the selection rate of over winning sound C is "0%". In addition, when the jackpot type won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of the over-winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of the over-winning sound B is "30%", and the selection rate of the over-winning sound C is "30%". It becomes "60%". That is, in the order of "over winning sound A"<"over winning sound B"<"over winning sound C", the probability variation expectation (expectation for transition to probability variation gaming state) increases by one step. In addition, as a further modified example, the over-winning sound may be configured to suggest the number of times of electric support provided after the end of the special game instead of the probability change expectation.

<<A-3. Grand prize mouth count-up performance≫
In the big winning hole count-up effect, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 54 during execution of a special game during a series of games, the value of the accumulated prize ball number displayed in the accumulated prize ball number display area 733 is increased. , the value of the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the big winning hole is added and displayed. In the present embodiment, one game ball enters the big winning hole 54, so that "15" prize balls are paid out (the number of unit prize balls in the big winning hole 54 is 15). When the ball enters the big winning hole 54, the value of the accumulated number of awarded balls displayed in the accumulated number of awarded balls display area 733 is updated in units of "15". In addition, the special game effect control means 227 is provided with a cumulative winning ball number counter for counting the cumulative number of winning balls. Each time a big winning hole winning command is received), the count value of the cumulative winning ball counter is incremented by "15", which is the unit winning ball number of the big winning hole 54, and accordingly, the cumulative winning ball number display area 733 is displayed. A big winning opening count-up effect is performed in which "15" is added to the displayed cumulative number of winning balls. This big winning hole count-up effect is executed regardless of whether the game ball entering the big winning hole 54 is within the specified count number or exceeds the specified count number. is.

FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a series of large winning opening count-up effects. As shown in FIG. 20, the big winning hole count-up effect is, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 54, the number of accumulated prize balls displayed in the accumulated number of prize balls display area 733 is changed to this. This is an effect in which the number of prize balls provided based on the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 54 is sequentially added and displayed in a count-up manner by "1". In the illustrated example, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed by counting up one by one in the order of "7000"→"7001"→...→"7014"→"7015". It should be noted that FIG. 20 shows the flow of the large winning opening count-up effect when over winning occurs. At E), a big winning mouth count-up effect is performed. FIG. 20 shows the large winning opening count-up effect when the over winning effect is performed, but not only when the over winning is performed, but also for the ball entering the game ball within the specified count number, the large winning opening count up effect is done. In addition, while the big winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the entry of the game ball within the specified count number (especially, the big winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the 10th count which is the specified count number) is being performed. Yes, if over-winning occurs when the count-up for 15 balls has not yet been completed, the count-up for the big prize opening count-up effect for which the count-up for 15 balls has not yet been completed will be completed. After that (after 15 balls are counted), it is desirable to start the big winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the over winning. Here, if the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (detection grace period), the big winning opening count-up effect itself corresponding to the over-winning will be started in the next round (after the interval period has elapsed). next round), but during the execution of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period), the big winning mouth count-up effect corresponding to the over winning will be performed. Even if a ball enters the big winning hole 54 during execution, the ball entering timing is during the big winning hole count-up performance corresponding to the over winning, and the count-up for 15 balls is still completed. If not, after the count-up of the big winning mouth count-up effect for which the count-up for 15 balls has not been completed is completed (after the count-up for 15 balls has been performed), the big prize in the next round It is desirable to configure such that the big winning opening count-up effect corresponding to the winning of the winning opening 54 is started.

As a modification of this embodiment, when an over-win occurs during execution of a special game, an over-win effect is executed, and the number of prize balls given based on the over-win is changed to the accumulated number of prize balls. It may be configured not to display addition. In other words, the number of accumulated prize balls is added to the number of prize balls given based on the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 54 within the specified count number, and the specified count number to the big winning hole 54 is added. It may be configured so that the number of prize balls provided based on the excess number of game balls entered is not subject to addition display.

In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, during the execution of a special game performed by the occurrence of the first hit (the result of the success determination of the first special symbol in the normal game state is a big hit), the prescribed count number is exceeded. It may be configured not to execute the over winning performance even if the over winning is generated. In addition, as types of special games, there are high-profit special games (for example, 16R special games) and low-profit special games (for example, 4R special games). It may be constructed so that the over winning performance is executed when the winning is generated, and the over winning performance is not executed even if the over winning over the specified count number is generated during the execution of the low-profit special game. In addition, as a type of round game, a long opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) that allows game balls of a specified count number (full count) to enter or is easy to enter. and a short opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 2 seconds) in which a game ball of a specified count (full count) can enter or is easy to enter. During execution of the open round game, an over winning effect that exceeds the specified count number occurs, and an over winning effect that exceeds the specified count number occurs during the execution of the short open round game. It may be configured not to execute the over winning effect. In addition, during execution of a special game that is performed when a specific jackpot (variable probability jackpot) is won, an over-winning effect exceeding a specified count occurs, and an over-winning effect is executed, and a normal jackpot (non-variable jackpot) is performed. During the execution of the special game that is performed when the player wins , the over-winning performance may not be executed even if the over-winning that exceeds the prescribed count number occurs.

<B. General winning entrance winning performance>
The general winning opening winning effect is an effect executed when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64 as a trigger. The general winning mouth prize effect includes a general winning mouth normal winning effect and a general winning mouth count-up effect.

«B-1. General winning entrance Normal winning performance≫
The general winning opening normal winning effect (also referred to as “bonus winning effect”) is an effect for suggesting or notifying that the game ball has entered the general winning hole 64 . It should be noted that hereinafter, the fact that a game ball enters the general winning port 64 during the execution of a special game is also referred to as "bonus winning", but the game ball wins a general prize other than during the execution of a special game (non-special game state). Winning at mouth 64 may also be referred to as "bonus winning".

The types of the bonus winning effects include a bonus winning image display effect and a bonus winning sound output effect. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the bonus winning effect of the present embodiment. In addition, as a modified example, as an effect related to the bonus prize, only the bonus prize winning image is mounted (no bonus prize winning sound is mounted), or only the bonus prize winning sound is mounted (no bonus prize winning image is mounted). It should be noted that this bonus prize effect is constructed to be executed even during the execution of the round game and while the big prize winning port 54 is closed (during the interval period) during the big win. If the big winning opening 54 is closed (during the interval period), it is configured to be able to be executed at the same time as the over winning effect.

The bonus winning image display effect is an effect of displaying an image (referred to as a "bonus winning image") suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, a bonus winning image with characters "+3pt" is displayed as a bonus winning image in the winning ball winning display area 732 of the screen, and "3" is displayed based on the occurrence of the bonus winning. It is suggested that he won the prize ball. As a result, the player can intuitively understand that a bonus prize has been won.

The bonus winning sound output effect is an effect of outputting a sound (“bonus winning sound”) from the speaker 11 suggesting that a bonus prize has been won. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the sound effect "picon" is output from the speaker 11, suggesting that a bonus prize has been won.

As a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns for the bonus winning effect may be provided. That is, it is also possible to prepare a plurality of types of bonus prize winning images or a plurality of types of bonus prize winning sounds, and to select one of the bonus prize winning images and bonus prize winning sounds by performing a lottery when a bonus prize occurs. good. In this case, depending on the type of the bonus winning image or the bonus winning sound, it is also possible to make a suggestion of the holding series, a variable probability, a suggestion of the number of rounds, and the like. As an example, there is only one type of bonus prize image, "+3pt", while there are other bonus prize sounds such as "Gachan", "Chin", and "Boom" in addition to "Pikon". When the bonus winning sound "" is generated, (1) the effect also serves as a role of suggesting a pending series, (2) also serves as a role of suggesting that the jackpot currently being executed is a variable jackpot, (3) ) It may also play a role of suggesting that the currently executed jackpot is not the 4R jackpot but the 16R jackpot.

More specifically, as a modification of the present embodiment, a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds are set, and in addition to the occurrence of the bonus winning, an on-hold renso is generated according to the type of the bonus winning sound. A configuration may be adopted that suggests the possibility that the player is in the game (that is, both the bonus prize winning effect and the pending consecutive suggesting effect are used). In this modified example, a bonus prize winning sound A (sound effect "picon") and a bonus prize winning sound B (sound effect "boom") are prepared as a plurality of types of bonus prize winning sounds. Then, if there is no jackpot pending at the time of the bonus winning (if the suspension is not established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "100%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%". ”. On the other hand, if there is a jackpot pending at the time of the bonus winning (if the suspension is established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "100%". ”. In other words, the bonus winning sound A is a sound in a normal mode suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred and that the reservation is not established. The bonus winning sound B is a sound of a special mode suggesting that a bonus winning has occurred and that a pending internal reunion has been established. Also, if there is a jackpot pending at the time of the bonus winning (if the suspension is established), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "80%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "20%". ” may be used. In the modified example, the case where the holding consecutive suggestion effect is applied to the bonus winning sound output effect has been described as an example, but the holding consecutive suggesting effect may be applied to the bonus winning prize image display effect (for example, the bonus winning prize image If "+3pt" is displayed in black characters as a display effect, it means that the reservation has not been established or is unlikely to be established, but if it is displayed in gold characters, it means that the reservation is established or is likely to be established). Also, with respect to the above modification, the bonus winning sound B as a holding consecutive suggestion has been described, but the bonus winning sound B may be a specification that has a role of a probability variable suggestion or a round number suggestion. Depending on whether the jackpot being played is a normal jackpot or a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), the selection rate of the bonus prize winning sounds A and B is set to "100%" in the case of a normal jackpot. , the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "0%", while in the case of a specific jackpot (probability variable jackpot), the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "0%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "100 %", or the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A may be set to "80%" and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B to "20%", depending on whether the currently executed jackpot is a 4R jackpot or a 16R jackpot. Accordingly, in the case of the 4R jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus prize winning sounds A and B is "100%" and the selection rate of the bonus prize winning sound B is "0%", while the selection rate of the bonus prize winning sound B is "0%". , the selection rate for bonus winning sound A is "0%", the selection rate for bonus winning sound B is "100%", or the selection rate for bonus winning sound A is "80%", and the selection rate for bonus winning sound B is The rate may be "20%".

In addition, in this embodiment, a "special figure 2 priority digestion method" is adopted that preferentially digests the operation retention ball of the second special symbol over the operation retention ball of the first special symbol. Only the operation reservation ball of the second special symbol may be targeted as the target operation reservation ball. In addition, when the game state at the time of the occurrence of the jackpot that triggers the execution of the special game is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the special game is also the specific game state (high base state). Alternatively, the holding-continue-suggestion effect may be executed with the bonus winning generated during the execution of the special game as a trigger. Also, on the premise that the preceding actuation hold ball will be a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot), and if the subsequent actuation hold ball contains a specific hold that will be a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) as the earliest specific hold In addition, it is also possible to execute the holding consecutive suggesting effect with the bonus winning generated during the execution of the special game as a trigger. In other words, even if there is a jackpot hold in the subsequent operation hold, if the jackpot type related to the jackpot hold (if there are multiple jackpot holds, the earliest jackpot hold) is a low-profit jackpot, the hold It may be configured so as not to execute the suggestion production. In other words, when the holding consecutive suggestion effect occurs during the execution of the special game, it is certain that the holding consecutive game will be played with the high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot).

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, in addition to the fact that a bonus prize has been won, the possibility of winning a variable probability jackpot may be suggested by the bonus prize effect. In other words, the bonus winning effect and the probability variation suggesting effect may be combined. The probability variation suggesting effect is that the type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a specific jackpot (probability variation jackpot), that is, the effect that suggests moving to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game is. In this modification, for example, a plurality of types of bonus winning sounds A to C are set, and if the type of the jackpot won this time is the normal jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "70%", and the bonus winning sound The selection rate of B is "30%", and the selection rate of bonus winning sound C is "0%". In addition, when the jackpot type won this time is a specific jackpot, the selection rate of the bonus winning sound A is "10%", the selection rate of the bonus winning sound B is "30%", and the selection rate of the bonus winning sound C is "30%". It becomes "60%". That is, in the order of "bonus winning sound A"<"bonus winning sound B"<"bonus winning sound C", the probability variation expectation (expectation for transition to probability variation gaming state) increases by one step. In addition, as a further modified example, the bonus winning sound may be configured to suggest the number of times of electric support to be provided after the end of the special game instead of the probability change expectation.

≪General prize gate count-up production≫
In the general winning hole count-up effect, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 64 during execution of a special game in a series of games, the cumulative number of winning balls displayed in the cumulative winning ball number display area 733 is increased. This is an effect of adding and displaying the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) paid out based on the entry of game balls into the general prize winning opening 64 . In the present embodiment, one game ball enters the general winning hole 64 so that "3" prize balls are paid out (the number of unit winning balls in the general winning hole 64 is 3). When the ball enters the general winning hole 64, the accumulated number of prize balls displayed in the accumulated number of prize balls display area 733 is updated in units of "three". In addition, the special game effect control means 227 is provided with a cumulative winning ball number counter for counting the cumulative number of winning balls as described above, and each time a game ball enters the general winning hole 64 (mainly Each time a general winning hole winning command is received from the control board 100), "3" corresponding to the unit winning ball number of the general winning hole 64 is added to the count value of the cumulative winning ball number counter, and the cumulative winning balls are accordingly added. A general winning hole count-up effect is performed in which “3” is added to the value of the cumulative number of prize balls displayed in the number display area 733 .

Here, FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a succession of general winning mouth count-up effects. As shown in FIG. 22, the general winning hole count-up effect is the current value of the cumulative winning ball number displayed in the cumulative winning ball number display area 733 when a game ball enters the general winning hole 54. In addition, the value of the number of unit prize balls awarded based on the entry of the game ball into the general prize winning opening 64 is added and displayed by "1" in order in a count-up manner. In the illustrated example, the value of the cumulative number of winning balls is counted up one by one in the order of "8000"→"8001"→"8002"→"8003".

It should be noted that the general prize-winning effect (bonus prize-winning effect, general prize-winning count-up effect) is performed during the execution of the special game, during execution of the special game, among the plurality of general prize-winning ports 61 to 64, the general prize-winning port 64 provided in the right area PA2. It is performed for the entry of game balls to. Therefore, during execution of the special game, even if a game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 provided in the left area PA1 among the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64, the general winning opening winning effect is executed. can't break However, if a game ball enters any of the general winning openings 61 to 64 during execution of the special game, regardless of the type of the general winning openings 61 to 64 (regardless of whether or not the general winning opening winning effect is executed) ), prize balls (three pieces) are paid out based on the winning of game balls into the general prize winning openings 61-64.

In the present embodiment, each time a bonus win occurs, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball count) given by the bonus win is added to the cumulative number of prize balls. It is not limited, but the number of prize balls based on all the bonus prizes that occurred during the execution of one round game (number of unit prize balls x number of bonus prizes during one round game) At the end of the game, the number of accumulated prize balls may be collectively added to the number of prize balls. The number of bonus prizes won during the special game) may be collectively added to the accumulated number of prize balls and displayed at the end of the final round game or at the end of the special game.

Further, in the present embodiment, a board configuration is adopted in which the general winning opening 64 is arranged on the upstream side of the second start opening 51, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. A board configuration may be adopted in which the board surface is arranged downstream of the starting port 51 . In that case, the general winning opening 64 may be arranged upstream of the big winning opening 54 , or the general winning opening 64 may be arranged downstream of the big winning opening 54 .

Further, as a modification of the present embodiment, the general winning opening 64 may also be used as an operating opening (operating gate 53) that triggers execution of the normal symbol lottery. In other words, when the game ball enters the general winning opening 64, a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not the second starting opening 52 is to be opened is performed, and a predetermined number (for example, one or two) is performed. of prize balls may be paid out.

In addition, as described above, in the general winning mouth winning effect (bonus winning effect, general winning mouth count-up effect), the game ball enters the general winning mouth 64 when the game state currently being executed is the special game state as described above. Therefore, even if the game ball enters the general winning hole 64 when the game state currently being executed is a non-special game state, the general winning hole winning effect (bonus winning effect, general Winning mouth count-up effect) will not be performed. That is, even if the game state currently being executed is a game state (non-electric support state) in which the game is mainly variably displayed with the first special symbol, the game state currently being executed is variably displayed with the second special symbol. Even in the game state (electric sapo state) that is the main part of the game, the entry of the game ball into the general winning hole 64 triggers the general winning hole winning effect (bonus winning effect, general winning hole count-up effect). can't break In addition, if the game state currently being executed is a game state (power support state) in which the game is mainly based on the variable display of the second special symbol, the screen In the accumulated prize ball number display area 733, the accumulated number of prize balls acquired in the special game during the consecutive game (the accumulated number of prize balls at the end of the latest special game) is displayed. However, in this power support state, only the cumulative number of prize balls won in the special game during the continuous game is displayed, and even if the game ball enters the general winning hole 64, the number of prize balls will be the accumulated prize. The number of balls is not added and displayed (the general winning hole count-up effect is not performed), and the value of the accumulated number of prize balls does not change (the accumulated number of prize balls at the end of the latest special game is maintained).

Also, during the execution of the special game that is performed by the occurrence of the first hit (the result of the judgment of the first special symbol in the normal game state is a big hit), even if the game ball enters the general winning hole 64 , may be configured so as not to execute the bonus prize effect. Also, as types of special games, there are high-profit special games (for example, 16R special games) and low-profit special games (for example, 4R special games). A bonus winning performance may be executed by entering a ball, and the bonus winning performance may not be executed even if a game ball enters a general winning hole 64 during execution of a low-profit special game. In addition, as a type of round game, a long opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 29 seconds) that allows game balls of a specified count number (full count) to enter or is easy to enter. and a short opening round game in which the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 54 is set to an opening time (for example, 2 seconds) in which a game ball of a specified count (full count) can enter or is easy to enter. Even if a game ball enters the general prize winning port 64 during execution of the open round game, a bonus prize winning effect is executed, and a game ball enters the general prize winning port 64 during execution of the short open round game. It may be configured so as not to execute the bonus winning effect. Also, during the execution of a special game performed when a specific jackpot (probable variable jackpot) is won, a game ball enters a general prize winning port 64 to execute a bonus prize winning performance, and a normal jackpot (non-probability variable jackpot) is executed. Even if a game ball enters the general winning hole 64 during the execution of the special game that is performed when winning , the bonus winning effect may not be executed.

<Other features of prize-winning performances>
Next, other features of the special winning mouth winning effect and the general winning mouth winning effect of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, since the big winning hole count-up effect and the general winning hole count-up effect are effects for the same display object (the cumulative number of winning balls displayed in the cumulative winning ball number display area 733), below, the big winning hole count will be described. The up effect and the general winning mouth count-up effect may be collectively referred to simply as "count-up effect".

≪Count-up production time≫
In this embodiment, the count-up time for one prize ball (time required for count-up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 second". In other words, the value of the accumulated number of prize balls displayed in the accumulated number of prize balls display area 733 is counted up in increments of "0.03 seconds". Therefore, the execution time of the big winning hole count-up effect is the number of prize balls given by one game ball entering the big winning hole 54 (unit The execution time of the big winning mouth count-up effect is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds". becomes. Similarly, the general winning hole count-up effect is the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number), and the execution time of the general winning mouth count-up effect is "3 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.09 seconds". . Below, for the sake of convenience, the execution time of the big winning mouth count-up effect (the time value from the start to the end of one big winning mouth count-up effect) will be referred to as "count-up effect time A", and the general winning mouth count-up The performance execution time (the time value from the start to the end of one general winning hole count-up effect) is abbreviated as "count-up effect time B". Here, the big winning mouth normal winning effect, the over winning effect, and the bonus winning effect are configured not to be executed during the execution of the jackpot start demonstration and the execution of the jackpot end demonstration even during the execution of the special game. Therefore, the big winning mouth count-up effect and the general winning mouth count-up effect are configured not to be executed during the execution of the jackpot start demonstration and the jackpot end demonstration even during the execution of the special game. ing.

(Relationship 1 of count-up production time A)
The count-up effect time A is set shorter than an interval time (also called an "interval period") set after each round game ends. The interval time is a waiting time set between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demonstration, and is a period during which the big winning port 54 is kept closed from the start of the closing operation. It is a game waiting time (unit game waiting time) or an end demonstration waiting time. In this embodiment, the interval time is set to "2 seconds" in common for all round games. In this embodiment, the count-up effect time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), so that the game ball enters the big winning opening 54 just before the end of a certain round game. Even when the big winning mouth count-up performance is performed based on the entry of the ball, the big winning mouth count-up performance is completed within the interval time after the end of the round game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the big winning mouth count-up effect will be performed over the interval period until the next round game or the jackpot end demo (if you win over, it is possible that the interval period will be exceeded) possible), a break between each round game or a break between the final round game and the jackpot end demo can be defined.

(Relationship 2 of count-up production time A)
The count-up performance time A is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. As described above, the count-up effect time A is set to "0.45 seconds", and the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpot types (during jackpot effects). ing. The execution time of the jackpot end demo is the waiting time from when the interval time after the end of the final round game in the special game has passed until the special game ends. That is, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration does not include the interval time set after the end of the final round game. That is, during the interval time after the end of the final round game, the entry of the game ball into the big winning opening 54 is effectively detected (in other words, it is detected as a winning ball payout target, and it is determined as an illegal entry). is set as the remaining time (delay time) of the round game during which there is a possibility that a game ball may enter the big winning opening 54 during the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. It is set as a preparation time for a game (production mode) after the end of a special game separated from the round game, which has no possibility of being effectively detected. In this embodiment, the count-up effect time A (0.45 seconds) is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demonstration, so that the game ball Enters the big winning hole 54, even if the big winning hole count-up effect is performed, more specifically, even if over winning occurs in the final round game, the final round Even after the closing of the big winning opening 54 after the game (even during the big winning ending demonstration period), if the specifications are such that the big winning opening count-up effect is performed, the big winning opening is counted during the big winning ending demonstration period. Up production will be completed. Therefore, the big winning mouth count-up effect is not performed over the period of the big win end demonstration period and until the variable display after the special game ends, and the special game ends and the variable display of the first rotation starts. Separation can be clarified. As a modification, for at least part of the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration, entry of a game ball into the jackpot 54 may be effectively detected during that time.

(Relationship 3 of count-up production time A)
In the present embodiment, when a specified count number of game balls enter the big winning opening 54 in one round game, the total time (1 The big winning opening count-up effect for the number of prize balls obtainable in one round game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot ending demonstration. Specifically, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A)×10 balls (specified count number)=4.5 seconds". On the other hand, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "20 seconds" in common for all jackpot types (during jackpot effect), as described above. In this embodiment, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up effect time A for the prescribed count number is configured to be shorter than the execution time (20 seconds) of the jackpot end demonstration, so that the final time Even if a plurality of large winning opening count-up performances are continuously performed based on a plurality of game balls continuously entering the large winning opening 54 just before the end of the round game, the final round game is performed. Even after the closing of the big winning opening 54 after the round game (even during the big winning ending demonstration period), if the specification is such that the big winning opening count-up effect is performed, the big winning opening will be opened within the big winning ending demonstration period. The count-up production is completed. Therefore, the big winning mouth count-up effect is not performed over the period of the big win end demonstration period and until the variable display after the special game ends, and the special game ends and the variable display of the first rotation starts. Separation can be clarified.

In addition, even if the game ball enters the big winning hole 54 in one round game exceeding the specified count number (when over winning occurs), the cumulative count number in this one round game ( It is preferable that the total time of the count-up effect time A (regular count number+over winning number) is set shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. That is, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the prescribed count number in one round game and the total time of the count-up effect time A for the number of over winnings is the time after the end of the round game. By setting the execution time to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration, even after closing the jackpot 54 after the final round game (even during the jackpot end demonstration period), the big prize port count-up effect is produced. If the specification is to perform, even if over-winning occurs, the big winning mouth count-up effect is finished within the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration, and the end of the special game and the start of the variable display are separated. should be clarified. The number of over-winning prizes is indeterminate because it depends on the progress of the game (game ball launch situation and game ball flow situation), but even if it is assumed that 10 balls, which is the same number as the prescribed count number, It is desirable to satisfy the above relationship (in that case, the total time of the count-up production time A for the prescribed count number in one round game and the total time of the count-up production time A for the number of over winnings) The time taken is 9 seconds (4.5 seconds + 4.5 seconds), which is shorter than 20 seconds, which is the execution time of the jackpot ending demo).

(Relationship 4 of count-up production time A)
As a modification of the present embodiment, when game balls of a prescribed count number enter the big winning opening 54 in one round game, the total count-up production time A for the prescribed count number in this one round game The time may be configured to be shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. In this modification, the total time of the count-up effect time A for the specified count number is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A)×10 balls (specified count number)=4.5 seconds". On the other hand, the interval time after the end of each round game is longer than the interval time (2 seconds) in the above embodiment, and is set to "6 seconds" in common for all round games. In this modification, the total time (4.5 seconds) of the count-up effect time A for the prescribed count number is shorter than the interval time (6 seconds), so that a certain round game ends. Even when a plurality of game balls continuously enter the big winning prize 54 at the last moment, even when a plurality of big winning mouth count-up performances are continuously performed, within the interval time after the end of the round game. The big prize mouth count-up effect is completed. Therefore, the big winning mouth count-up effect is not performed over the interval period until the next round game or the jackpot end demonstration, and the break between each round game or the final round game and the jackpot end demo is not performed. can clarify the delimitation between

It should be noted that, in one round game, even if only one game ball enters the big winning hole 54 exceeding the specified count number (when only one over winning occurs), this one round game It is preferable that the total time of the count-up effect time A for the cumulative count number (prescribed count number + 1 over winning number) is set shorter than the interval time after the end of the round game. That is, the total time of the count-up production time A for the prescribed count number in one round game and the count-up production time A for one over winning prize (4.5 seconds + 0.45 seconds = 4 .95 seconds) is set shorter than the interval time (6 seconds) after the end of the round game, so that even if over-winning occurs, the big winning mouth count-up effect is finished within the interval period. , It is preferable to clarify the division between round games.

(Relationship 5 of count-up production time A)
As a modification of the present embodiment, when game balls of a prescribed count number (full count) enter the big winning opening 54 in all round games of one special game, the full count number generated during execution of this special game The total time of the count-up performance time A in minutes (regular number of rounds×regular count number) may be configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration. In this modification, when the specified number of rounds for one special game is the maximum number of rounds (16 rounds), the game balls enter the big winning opening only the specified number of counts (10 balls) in all round games. In this case, a total of 160 big winning opening count-up effects are executed. Therefore, the total time of count-up effect time A for all counts is "0.45 seconds (count-up effect time A) x 10 balls (specified count number) x 16 rounds (specified number of rounds) = 72 seconds". be. On the other hand, in this modified example, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration is set to "120 seconds" in common for all the jackpot types (during the jackpot effect). In this modification, the total time (72 seconds) of the count-up production time A for the total number of counts in one special game is configured to be shorter than the execution time (120 seconds) of the jackpot end demonstration. , Even after the closing of the big winning hole 54 after the final round game (even during the big winning end demonstration period), if the specification is such that the big winning hole count-up effect is performed, the big winning hole 54 is opened. Even if the execution of the big winning mouth count-up performance is congested during the round game or during the interval period due to the continuous winning of the game balls, all the big winning mouth count-up performances must be completed at least by the end of the big winning end demonstration. is guaranteed, it is possible to smoothly proceed with the production during the big hit.

≪Priority of the big winning mouth count-up effect before and after≫
FIG. 23 is a time chart for explaining the priority of the big winning mouth count-up effect. As shown in FIG. 23, during execution of a certain round game, when a plurality of game balls (two game balls in the illustrated example) enter the big winning hole 54 in succession, 2 The big winning mouth count-up effect will be executed. Specifically, when the first game ball enters the big winning hole 54 and the condition for executing the big winning hole count-up effect is established, the previous big winning hole count-up effect is executed. Similarly, when the second game ball enters the big winning hole 54 and the condition for executing the big winning hole count-up effect is satisfied, the later big winning hole count-up effect is executed. The condition for executing the big winning mouth count-up effect is a condition for starting the execution of the big winning mouth count-up effect, and the game ball must enter the big winning mouth 54 during the execution of the special game (large winning mouth Triggered by the detection of the entry of the game ball by the opening switch 541, the process is established. At this time, during the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect, if the condition for executing the later big winning mouth count-up effect is met, the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect is interrupted. After the execution of the previous large winning mouth count-up effect is completed, the subsequent large winning mouth count-up performance is started. That is, in the present embodiment, of the two large winning opening count-up effects, the priority of the previous big winning opening count-up effect is set higher than the priority of the later big winning opening count-up effect. Before the execution of the previous big prize mouth count-up effect is completed, the execution of the later big prize mouth count-up performance is not started, and the execution of the previous big prize mouth count-up performance is completed. After that, execution of the later big winning mouth count-up effect is started. In addition, when the execution of the later big winning mouth count-up effect is started after the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect is completed, the previous big winning mouth count-up effect and the later big winning mouth count-up effect It is preferable to continuously (seamlessly) connect the performance with the big winning opening count-up twice. However, as a modification, after a predetermined time (minute time) has passed after the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect is completed, the execution of the later big winning mouth count-up effect is started and the previous big winning mouth count-up effect is started. A clear separation may be provided between the big winning mouth count-up effect and the subsequent big winning mouth count-up effect. Here, the special winning mouth count-up effect has been explained, but the general winning mouth count-up effect may also have the same specifications, and during the execution of the previous general winning mouth count-up effect, the execution conditions for the subsequent general winning mouth count-up effect If the situation is established, the execution of the previous general winning mouth count-up effect will not be interrupted, and after the execution of the previous general winning mouth count-up effect is completed, the subsequent general winning mouth count-up will be performed. It is preferable to configure to start the execution of the production. Also, during the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect, if the conditions for executing the subsequent general winning mouth count-up effect are met, the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect will be interrupted. It is preferable that the execution of the subsequent general winning opening count-up effect is started after the previous execution of the large winning opening count-up effect is completed without being terminated. Also, during the execution of the previous general winning mouth count-up effect, if the conditions for executing the later big winning mouth count-up effect are satisfied, the execution of the previous general winning mouth count-up effect will be interrupted. It is preferable that the execution of the later big winning opening count-up effect is started after the execution of the preceding general winning opening count-up effect is completed without being terminated.

As a modification of the present embodiment, when the conditions for executing the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect, the previous large winning opening count-up effect is executed. It may be configured to interrupt and start execution of the next big winning mouth count-up effect. That is, the priority of the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect is set higher than the priority of the previous large winning opening count-up effect. In that case, when the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect is interrupted, the count value is forced to the final value of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect or the initial value of the subsequent big winning mouth count-up effect. It is preferable to switch to , and start the big winning mouth count-up effect after that point. In this modified example, the special winning mouth count-up effect has been described, but the general winning mouth count-up effect may be of the same specification. When the execution condition is satisfied, the execution of the previous general winning opening count-up effect may be interrupted and the execution of the next general winning opening count-up effect may be started. Also, if the execution conditions for the subsequent general winning mouth count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect, the execution of the previous big winning mouth count-up effect is interrupted, and the next general winning effect is performed. It may be configured to start execution of mouth count-up effect. Also, if the execution conditions for the subsequent big winning mouth count-up effect are satisfied during the execution of the previous general winning mouth count-up effect, the execution of the previous general winning mouth count-up effect is interrupted, and the next big prize winning is performed. It may be configured to start execution of mouth count-up effect.

(Emphasis on the cumulative number of prize balls)
FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram for explaining the emphasizing effect of the present embodiment. (A) in the figure shows the case where the over prize winning performance is executed during the execution of the emphasizing performance, and (B) in the figure shows the case where the bonus prize winning performance is executed during the execution of the emphasizing performance. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning opening 54 or the general winning opening 64 during execution of a special game, the value of the cumulative number of winning balls during consecutive games reaches a predetermined specific value. When it reaches, it is configured to execute an emphasizing effect to notify that the accumulated number of prize balls has reached a specific value. The specific value is a multiple of the predetermined number of prize balls (10000). That is, each time the current value of the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a multiple value (10000, 20000, 30000, etc.) of the predetermined number of prize balls, the emphasis effect is performed. Therefore, the emphasizing effect may be called a specific value attainment effect, and the emphasizing display may be called a specific value corresponding display. In this embodiment, even when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value triggered by an over-winning or a bonus winning, an emphatic effect is executed. The effect or the bonus winning effect is executed in duplicate.

As shown in FIG. 24, the types of highlighting effects include a highlighting effect of enlarging and displaying a specific value ("20000pt" in the illustrated example) that the number of accumulated winning balls has reached in a highlighting area 735 in the center of the screen, and a speaker. From 11, there is an emphasizing sound output effect for outputting a special sound (in the illustrated example, the sound of "great condition").

The highlighting of the specific value continues for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and during that time, the display of the cumulative number of prize balls is updated (addition display ), the highlighted display is not updated (additionally displayed). At this time, the display priority of each layer increases in the order of "accumulated number of winning balls display"<"highlighted display"<"round display". "Layer" means each layer of a hierarchical structure that defines the display priority of each image that constitutes the entire image. Layers with higher display priority are placed on higher layers (front side from the player's perspective), and layers with lower display priority are placed on lower layers (back side from the player's view). be done. In FIG. 24, the highlighted display and the display of the accumulated number of prize balls are shown without being superimposed, but in order to further emphasize the highlighted display, the display area may be enlarged and superimposed. Accordingly, it may be configured such that the highlighting is displayed in front of the display of the number of accumulated prize balls (the highlighting is displayed covering part or all of the display of the number of accumulated prize balls).

Also, as shown in FIG. 24, the winning display area 732 and the highlighted display area 735 are provided as separate and independent display areas. , the emphasized image and the over winning image or the bonus winning image are displayed in parallel. In addition, when the enhanced image and the over-winning image or the bonus winning image are displayed at the same time, even if the priority of displaying the emphasized image is higher than the over-winning image or the bonus winning image, the over-winning image is displayed over the emphasized image. Alternatively, the priority of displaying the bonus winning image may be increased. In FIG. 24, the highlighted display and the over-winning image/bonus winning image are not displayed in a superimposed manner. According to the priority, it may be configured such that the highlighting is displayed in front of the over-winning image/bonus-winning image (the highlighting is displayed covering part or all of the over-winning image/bonus-winning image).

In addition, when over-winning occurs during the output of the special sound, the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound is redundantly output during the output of the special sound. In addition, when the special sound overlaps with the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound, the volume of the over-winning prize sound or the bonus winning sound may be made smaller than the volume of the special sound with the higher priority, and vice versa. Then, the volume of the special sound may be set to be smaller than the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus-winning sound having the higher priority. In this case, the volume of the lower priority (lower volume) may be substantially set to "0".

≪Over-winning performance/bonus winning performance when an error occurs≫
In this embodiment, when various errors occur in the gaming machine, it is configured to control whether or not to execute the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect according to the error type. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram for explaining error types of gaming machines. In this embodiment, the types of errors that occur in the game machine include "door/frame open error", "magnetic sensor error", "radio wave sensor error", "disconnection short circuit power supply error", "excess winning error", and "payout error". ” etc. is set. Note that the error types described above are merely examples, and various error types may be provided according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

When the glass frame 5, the front frame 2, or the back set board 30 is open with respect to the outer frame 1, the door/frame open error is detected by the door open switch that detects the opening of the glass frame 5 and the opening of the front frame 2. This error occurs when the frame open switch that detects the opening of the back set board 30 or the back set open switch that detects the opening of the back set board 30 is broken or broken. This door/frame open error is canceled when the game machine is checked for any abnormality and the glass frame 5, the front frame 2 and the back set board 30 are closed.

A magnetic sensor error and a radio wave sensor error are errors that occur when a magnetic sensor detects magnetism, when a radio wave sensor detects radio waves, or when disconnection, short circuit, or failure of a magnetic sensor or radio wave sensor occurs. Magnetic sensor errors and radio wave sensor errors are canceled when the gaming machine is checked for abnormalities and the power is turned on again.

A disconnection short-circuit power supply error is an error that occurs when a disconnection, short circuit, or failure occurs in the radio wave sensor and various switches provided on the game board surface. The disconnection short-circuit power supply error is canceled when the game machine is checked for abnormalities and the power is turned on again.

The excessive winning error is an error that occurs when an excessive number of game balls enter various winning holes. The excessive winning error is canceled when the gaming machine is checked for any abnormality and the power is turned on again. Here, the excessive winning error includes an excessive winning error of the large winning opening 54 (also referred to as a "large winning opening excessive winning error") and an excessive winning error of the general winning openings 61 to 64 ("general winning opening excessive winning error ”), etc. For example, the large winning opening excess winning error is an error that occurs when a predetermined number (for example, 30 balls) of game balls enter the large winning opening 54 during execution of one round game. A general winning opening excessive winning error occurs when a predetermined number (eg, 30 balls) of game balls enter the general winning openings 61 to 63 per unit time (eg, 30 seconds), or per unit time (eg, 30 seconds) This error occurs when a specific number of game balls (for example, 60 balls) enter the general winning hole 64 . Since the general winning opening 64 is arranged so that it is easier for game balls to enter than the general winning openings 61 to 63, the general winning opening 64 has an error judgment value (error and The value of the number of game balls to be judged) is a numerical value with a margin. In this embodiment, when a large winning hole excessive winning error occurs, or when a ball enters the big winning hole 54 while the big winning hole 54 is not open (during a non-special game), that is, When abnormal winning regarding the big winning opening 54 is detected (when determined as abnormal winning), the external information terminal board 600 outputs an external information signal (security signal) indicating that an error has occurred. On the other hand, when a general winning hole excessive winning error occurs, that is, when abnormal winning relating to the general winning holes 61 to 64 is detected (when determined as abnormal winning), an error is sent from the external information terminal board 600. It does not output an external information signal (security signal) indicating that it has occurred. The external information signal (outer end signal) output by the external information terminal board 600 will be described later.

A payout error is an error that occurs when there is a problem with the payout of prize balls. This payout error includes a full tank error in which the lower ball tray 9 is full of game balls (the full tank switch is turned on), a ball jam/ball jam error in the prize ball payout unit 34, and a game ball replenishment from the game island. This includes errors such as ball missing errors that cannot be done and are insufficient. When a full-tank error occurs, the notification level is divided into two stages. Notification level 1 is a level in a state where the ON state continues for 30 seconds after the full tank switch is turned ON. At notification level 1, only the voice notification of "Please pull out the ball" is executed. At this notification level 1, even if a ball enters the special prize winning opening 54 or the general winning openings 61 to 64, the prize ball payout is not restricted (the prize ball payout is not stopped). When the ON state exceeds 30 seconds, the state shifts to notification level 2, and not only the voice notification of "Please pull out the ball" is displayed, but also the effect display device 70 displays an "image prompting you to remove the ball from the lower ball tray". Further, even if a ball enters the big winning hole 54 or the general winning holes 61 to 64, the prize ball payout is restricted (the prize ball payout is stopped). As a modification, the specification may be such that only image notification is performed at notification level 1, and both image notification and sound notification are performed at notification level 2. FIG. Regarding the ball jam/ball jam error of the prize ball payout unit 34, and the ball missing error in which the game balls cannot be supplied from the game island and are insufficient, even if there is a ball entering the big prize winning opening 54 or the general winning openings 61 to 64, The payout of prize balls is restricted (the payout of prize balls is stopped).

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, various errors are classified into "first error", "second error", and "third error" according to the priority (importance) of the error. The first error is an error type whose priority (importance) is set to a medium level to prohibit or make it difficult to continue playing the game. The first error includes a "door/frame open error". The second error is an error type with a high priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue playing the game. The second error includes "magnetic sensor error", "radio wave sensor error", "disconnection short circuit power supply error", and "excess prize winning error". The third error is an error type with a low priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game. The third error includes a "payout error".

Here, when the above-mentioned error occurs in the game machine, various error notifications such as image effects and sound effects are performed. Specifically, the content of the error is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70 Then, an error notification sound is output from the speaker 11 at the error volume. As a modification of the error notification, the effect lamp LP may be configured to blink with error brightness.

In this embodiment, when the gaming machine encounters the first error (door/frame open error), even if over-winning or bonus winning occurs, part of the over-winning effect or part of the bonus winning effect is performed. It is configured so that it cannot be broken. That is, when the first error occurs in the gaming machine, execution of the over winning image display effect and the bonus winning image display effect among the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect is allowed, but the over winning sound output effect and the bonus winning image display effect are permitted. Execution of the bonus winning sound output effect is restricted. Even if over winning or bonus winning occurs during the first error, part of the over winning effect and bonus winning effect is not performed, so that the game machine is in the first error state so as not to miss it. It has become. In this case, the execution of the count-up effect (large winning mouth count-up effect and general winning mouth count-up effect) is permitted. Specifically, when the first error occurs, an error image indicating the first error is displayed in order to notify that the first error has occurred, but it is not displayed on the entire screen. , is displayed using only a part of the display area. The display priority of the error image is higher than that of the over winning image and the bonus winning image. However, while the error notification sound for reporting the first error is being output, the over-winning sound and the bonus-winning sound are not output (or the volume is low). When the gaming machine enters the first error state and an over-win or a bonus win occurs, prize balls are paid out based on this over-win or bonus win.

In addition, if the gaming machine encounters a second error (magnetic sensor error, radio wave sensor error, disconnection short circuit power supply error, excessive winning error), even if over winning or bonus winning occurs, over winning effect or bonus winning effect are configured to prevent all of That is, when the second error occurs in the gaming machine, execution of both the over-winning image display effect and the over-winning sound output effect as the over-winning effect is restricted, and the bonus-winning image display effect and the over-winning sound output effect as the bonus winning effect. Execution of both bonus winning sound output effects is restricted. Even if over winning or the like occurs during the second error, the fact that the game machine is in the second error state is not overlooked because the over winning performance or the like is not performed at all. In this case, the execution of the count-up effect (large winning mouth count-up effect and general winning mouth count-up effect) is also restricted. Specifically, when the second error occurs, an error image indicating the second error is displayed on the full screen in order to notify that the second error has occurred. Winning images and count-up effects are not displayed. Further, while the error notification sound for notifying the second error is being output, the over-winning sound and the bonus-winning sound are not output. When the game machine enters the second error state and an over-win or a bonus win occurs, prize balls are paid out based on this over-win or bonus win.

In addition, even if the game machine becomes the third error (payout error) and the prize balls cannot be paid out, if an over-win or a bonus win occurs, the over-win effect or bonus It is configured such that a winning effect is executed. In other words, if a payout error occurs in the gaming machine, there is no risk of any particular hindrance occurring even if the game is continued, and there is no risk of the player suffering a disadvantage. This is because limiting the presentation may rather reduce the interest in the game. In this case, a count-up effect (large winning mouth count-up effect and general winning mouth count-up effect) is also executed. However, when the game machine enters the third error state and an over-win or a bonus win occurs, prize balls are not paid out based on this over-win or bonus win.

In the present embodiment, when an over-win or a bonus win occurs when the gaming machine is in a "specific error" as described above, part or all of the over-win effect is performed depending on the type of error that has occurred. In addition to being restricted, part or all of the bonus prize winning effect is configured to be restricted. In other words, when the first error among the specific errors occurs, the execution of one or a part of the over-winning effect (over-winning sound output effect) is restricted, and the second error occurs. When it occurs, execution of a plurality of or all element effects (over-winning sound output effect, over-winning image display effect, etc.) of the over-winning effect is restricted. This is because, in the present embodiment, among the specific errors, the second error has a relatively higher priority (importance) than the first error. It should be noted that a specific error may be an error type for which progress of the game is prohibited. Further, a specific error may be an error type that occurs when an abnormality that is suspected of fraudulent activity is detected. Further, a specific error may be an error type that can be resolved by turning off/on the power again.

In addition, as a modification of the present embodiment, by setting the priority of the error notification effect higher than the over winning effect, for example, the error notification sound is output preferentially over the over winning sound (for example, the over winning sound A higher audio level is set for the error notification sound than for the error notification sound), and the error notification image may be displayed preferentially over the over winning image (for example, the error notification image is given priority over the over winning image can be set higher).

≪Over-winning performance at the end of the jackpot≫
FIG. 26 is a time chart for explaining whether or not an over winning effect is executed at the end of the big win. Each round game is set with a detection effective period (large winning opening effective period) during which detection of game balls by the large winning opening switch 541 is effective. This detection effective period is set in consideration of the time required for the game ball entered just before the big winning opening 54 to close to reach the big winning opening switch 541 . In this embodiment, the round period from the start to the end of each round game (from the opening to the closing of the big winning opening 54) and after the end of the round game (the closing of the big winning opening 54) A detection effective period of the big winning opening switch 541 is set over the entire period from the interval period until the predetermined time elapses. By setting this detection effective period from the round period to the interval period, even if the game ball is detected by the big winning hole switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the round period, the big winning hole 54 Winning of game balls to is treated as valid (subject to payout of prize balls). That is, the "round game execution period (large winning opening open period)" and the above-described "detection grace period (interval period)" are set as continuous detection effective periods. Also, as described above, the interval period and the detection grace period may be different periods.

In this embodiment, the period of the interval period is set as an over winning effect permission period in which the execution of the over winning effect is permitted when the execution timing of the over winning effect arrives. On the other hand, the period outside the interval period is set as an over winning effect prohibition period in which the execution of the over winning effect is prohibited even if the execution timing of the over winning effect has arrived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 26(A), within the interval period after the end of the final round game, game balls that exceed the prescribed count number at the big winning opening switch 541 (11 in the illustrated example) When the second game ball) is detected and the execution timing of the over winning effect comes within this interval period, the execution of the over winning effect within this interval period is permitted. However, if the performance time of the over-winning effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the over-winning effect to the end timing of the interval period, all of the over-winning effect will be executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, based on the end of the interval period, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the over winning effect at the end timing of the interval period. However, if an over-winning image and over-winning sound are provided as an over-winning effect, the over-winning image may be interrupted (hidden or erased from the middle), and the over-winning sound may be output without interruption. good. In addition, like the over-winning effect, the large-winning mouth count-up effect may be executed with the over-winning within the interval period as a trigger. If it is longer than the time until the timing, it is not possible to execute all of the big winning mouth count-up effects by the end of the interval period. It is desirable to forcibly interrupt

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 26(B), within the interval period after the end of the final round game, a game ball that exceeds the specified count number at the big winning opening switch 541 (the 11th game ball in the illustrated example Even when the ball) is detected, when the execution timing of the over winning performance comes within the big winning end demonstration period after the interval period has passed, the over winning performance is executed within this big winning ending demonstration period. is prohibited. However, during the jackpot ending demonstration period, execution of the over-winning effect is only prohibited, and prize balls are paid out based on this over-winning. Further, in the above case, the execution of the big winning mouth count-up effect may be prohibited in the same manner as the over winning effect.

As a modification of the present embodiment, the jackpot end demonstration period is set as an over winning effect permitted period during which execution of the over winning effect is permitted, and the over winning effect is executed during the execution of the big win ending demonstration. may In that case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the jackpot end demonstration period as the over winning effect permitted period. As an example, of the 20 seconds of the jackpot end demonstration period, only the first 5 seconds are set as the over winning effect permitted period, and the subsequent 15 seconds are set as the over winning effect prohibited period. In addition, as a further modification, an over winning effect permitted period and an over winning effect prohibited period may be set within the interval period after the final round. Seconds may be set as the over winning effect permitted period, and the subsequent 0.5 second may be set as the over winning effect prohibiting period, and the subsequent jackpot ending demonstration period may also be set as the over winning effect prohibiting period. In addition, as a further modified example, considering that the timing at which game balls exceeding the specified count number are detected by the big winning opening switch 541 and the execution timing of the over winning effect are synchronized, During the interval period after the end of the round game, when a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the big winning opening switch 541, it is configured to always execute the over winning effect (at the end of the interval period) ), when executing it, as described above, if the time from the start of the execution of the over winning effect to the end of the interval period is longer than the over winning effect effect time, the interval period Based on the end, the over-winning effect is forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the interval period (however, if the over-winning effect includes the over-winning image and the over-winning sound, the over-winning image is interrupted). (It may be hidden or erased from the middle), the over winning sound may be output without interruption), and when a game ball is detected in the big winning opening 54 during the jackpot end demonstration period ( When a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the big winning mouth switch 541), it may be configured so that the over winning effect is not executed. If a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected at the big winning opening switch 541 within the interval period after the end of the round game, it is always executed (except for entering balls at the end of the interval period), At the time of execution, as described above, if the effect time of the large winning mouth count-up effect is longer than the time from the execution start timing of the big winning mouth count-up effect to the end timing of the interval period, at the end of the interval period Based on this, the big winning hole count-up effect is forcibly interrupted at the end timing of the interval period, and when a game ball is detected in the big winning hole 54 during the big winning end demonstration period (big winning hole When a game ball exceeding the specified count number is detected by the switch 541), it may be configured not to be executed.

≪Extra prize-winning performance at the end of the jackpot≫
FIG. 27 is a time chart for explaining whether or not the bonus prize effect is executed at the end of the big win. In the present embodiment, the period of the round period and the period of the interval period are set as the bonus winning effect permissible period in which the execution of the bonus winning effect is permitted when the execution timing of the bonus winning effect arrives. On the other hand, the period of the jackpot end demonstration period is set as a bonus winning effect inhibition period in which the execution of the bonus winning effect is prohibited even if the execution timing of the bonus winning effect has arrived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27(A), within the interval period after the end of the final round game, when the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641, within this interval period When the execution timing of the bonus winning effect arrives at , the execution of the bonus winning effect is permitted within this interval period. However, if the performance time of the bonus prize-winning effect (for example, 0.5 seconds) is longer than the time from the start of execution of the bonus prize-winning effect to the end of the interval period, all of the bonus prize-winning effect will be executed by the end of the interval period. Therefore, based on the end of the interval period, it is desirable to forcibly interrupt the bonus prize effect at the end timing of the interval period. However, if a bonus winning image and a bonus winning sound are provided as a bonus winning effect, the bonus winning image may be interrupted (hidden or erased from the middle), and the bonus winning sound may be output without interruption. good. In addition, as with the bonus prize winning effect, the large winning mouth count-up effect may be executed with the bonus prize winning within the interval period as a trigger. If it is longer than the time until the timing, it is not possible to execute all of the big winning mouth count-up effects by the end of the interval period. It is desirable to forcibly interrupt

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27(B), even if a gaming ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period after the end of the final round game, this interval period When the execution timing of the bonus winning presentation arrives within the jackpot end demonstration period after the elapse, the execution of the bonus winning presentation is prohibited during the jackpot ending demonstration period. However, during the jackpot end demonstration period, the execution of the bonus winning effect is simply prohibited, and the payout of prize balls based on this bonus winning is performed. Further, in the above case, the execution of the big winning mouth count-up effect may be prohibited in the same manner as the bonus winning effect.

As a modification of the present embodiment, the jackpot end demonstration period is set as a bonus prize winning effect allowable period during which execution of the bonus winning effect is permitted, and the bonus winning effect is executed during the execution of the jackpot end demonstration. may In this case, it is desirable to set only the first predetermined time of the jackpot ending demonstration period as the bonus winning presentation permissible period. As an example, of the 20 seconds of the jackpot end demonstration period, only the first 5 seconds are set as the bonus winning effect permitted period, and the subsequent 15 seconds are set as the bonus winning effect prohibited period. As a further modification, the bonus winning effect permitted period and the bonus winning effect prohibited period may be set within the interval period after the final round. Seconds may be set as the bonus winning effect permitted period, and the subsequent 0.5 second may be set as the bonus winning effect prohibiting period, and the subsequent jackpot end demonstration period may also be set as the bonus winning effect prohibiting period. In addition, as a further modified example, considering that the timing at which the game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 and the execution timing of the bonus winning effect are synchronized, after the final round game ends If a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 within the interval period, the bonus winning effect is always executed (except for the ball entering at the end of the interval period). As described above, if the time from the start of execution of the bonus winning effect to the end of the interval period is longer than the effect time of the bonus winning effect, the bonus winning effect will be performed during the interval period based on the end of the interval period. (However, if a bonus winning image and a bonus winning sound are provided as a bonus winning effect, the bonus winning image is interrupted (hidden or deleted from the middle), and the bonus The winning sound may be output without interruption), and when a game ball is detected in the right general winning opening 64 during the jackpot end demonstration period (the game is played with the right general winning opening switch 641 If the ball is detected), the bonus winning effect may be configured not to be executed, and in that case, the right general winning effect may be configured so that the general winning hole count-up effect is performed within the interval period after the end of the final round game. When a game ball is detected by the opening switch 641, it is always executed (excluding the ball entering at the final timing of the interval period). Also, if the time from the start of the general winning mouth count-up effect to the end of the interval period is longer than the time, based on the end of the interval period, the general winning mouth count-up effect will be forced at the end of the interval period. It is configured to be interrupted, and configured not to be executed when a game ball is detected in the right general winning opening 64 during the jackpot end demonstration period (when a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641). You may

On the other hand, during the jackpot start demonstration period, theoretically, the game ball will not enter the big prize opening 54 (because there will be no over-winning), so during the jackpot start demonstration period, the big prize will not be won. No winning effect (over winning effect) is executed. Even during the period of the jackpot start demonstration period, it is possible to enter the ball into the general prize hole 64, but even if the ball enters the general prize hole 64, the general prize hole winning performance ( Bonus winning effect) will not be executed, and if the ball is entered during the jackpot start demonstration period, no matter what timing the ball is entered (especially, even if the ball is entered at the end of the jackpot start demonstration period), the entry The general prize-winning performance (bonus prize-winning performance) corresponding to the ball will not be performed in the first round game after the jackpot start demonstration, and furthermore, the prize balls (number of prize balls) corresponding to the winning balls will It is not a cumulative target in the display of the cumulative number of prize balls.

(Firing handle detection)
A game by the gaming machine PM is executed on the premise that the player rotates the shooting handle 12 to shoot the game ball toward the game area PA. The shooting handle 12 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) for detecting that the player is touching the shooting handle 12 . This touch sensor is composed of a proximity switch or the like that detects a change in capacitance due to the player touching the shooting handle 12 . When the touch sensor detects that the player is touching the firing handle 12, it outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 300 to permit the energization of the firing solenoid. In addition, the main control board 100 monitors the touch state of the firing handle based on the detection signal from the touch sensor, and periodically transmits an effect control command (handle state effect command) to the effect control board 200 . Thereby, the effect control board 200 specifies whether or not the player is touching the firing handle 12 (whether or not the firing handle 12 is being operated).

FIG. 28 is a time chart showing the relationship between the detection state of the touch sensor and the over winning effect and the general winning effect. Even when the touch sensor does not detect that the player is touching the shooting handle 12 (when the shooting of the game ball is stopped), the production control means 220 wins the game ball shot before that. When a game ball (the 11th game ball in the illustrated example) exceeding the prescribed count number is detected by entering the hole 54 (when an over-win occurs), an over-win effect is executed. It's like Similarly, even if it is not detected that the player is touching the shooting handle 12 (when the shooting of the game ball is stopped), the effect control means 220 determines that the game ball shot before that is a general winning prize. When a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641 by entering the hole 64 (when a bonus winning occurs), a bonus winning effect is executed. That is, the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed regardless of the detection result of the touch sensor at the over winning timing and the bonus winning timing. Therefore, even when the shooting of game balls by the player is stopped by closing the big winning port 54 (end of the round game), over winning or bonus winning occurs within the interval period. Sometimes, an over winning effect or a bonus winning effect occurs, and there is a dissatisfaction that no winning effect is performed even though the game ball actually enters the big winning hole 54 or the general winning hole 64. It is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust.

(Game start preparation production)
In the present embodiment, when the game state currently being executed is the normal game state (non-special game state), a standby demonstration effect (customer waiting demo effect) is triggered by the continuation of the game interruption state for a predetermined time or longer. is executed. ``The game is interrupted for a predetermined period of time or longer'' means, for example, that a period in which no special symbol operation reserve ball exists continues for a predetermined period of time or longer, or a period in which no special symbol fluctuation display is performed is a predetermined period of time. It means that a game ball does not enter or pass through a specific winning hole for a predetermined period of time or more, or that a game ball is not shot for a predetermined period of time or more. The end condition of this standby demonstration effect is when the game interruption state is canceled (when the game is started or resumed), for example, the player touches the firing handle 12 (operating the firing handle 12). ) is detected by the touch sensor, or when the ball enters the first starting hole 51 or the second starting hole 52, which is a specific winning hole, and the game ball passes through the operation gate 53. , and entering the general prize winning openings 61 to 64 are not applicable (Even if a game ball passes through the operation gate 53 or enters the general prize winning openings 61 to 64, the standby demonstration effect does not end). Also, during the standby demonstration effect, the volume is zero, that is, the sound is muted, or the volume is lower than in the state where the standby demo effect is not performed (the state during the game), A volume adjustment screen, which will be described later, can be displayed, and the standby demonstration effect is not terminated even if the volume is adjusted. In other words, in the situation where the game is interrupted, there is no need to perform more than necessary, so the sound is muted or the volume is reduced, but even in that state, the standby demonstration effect is maintained (when the game is interrupted). After the standby demonstration effect is completed (while the game is in progress, that is, while the symbols are changing), the sound volume related to the effect can be visualized and adjusted even during the standby demo effect.

FIG. 29 is a time chart showing the relationship between the game state in which the game start preparation effect is executed and the game state in which the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed. During the execution of the standby demonstration effect, the effect control means 220 is triggered by the detection of the contact of the player by the touch sensor (triggered by receiving the steering wheel state effect command from the main control board 100). Execution of the effect is ended, and execution of the game start preparation effect (fire detection effect) is started. The game start preparation effect is, for example, displaying the characters "Welcome" on the screen or outputting the voice "Welcome" from the speaker 11 to give a feeling that the game has started or resumed (a game welcome effect ). This game start preparation effect is an effect performed immediately after the standby demonstration effect is finished, and is executed when the game state is the normal game state (non-special game state) like the standby demonstration effect.

In this embodiment, in a game state (non-special game state) in which a game start preparation effect can be performed, an over winning effect or a bonus winning effect is not executed, and a game in which an over winning effect or a bonus winning effect can be performed. In the state (special game state), no game start preparation effect is performed. That is, the game start preparation effect and the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect are not performed in the same game state, and of course they are not performed redundantly at the same timing.

(Sound notification when power is restored)
In the present embodiment, when a power failure occurs during execution of a special game, a power recovery notification effect for notifying that the power has recovered from the power failure is executed at the time of recovery from the power failure. In this power-off/return notification effect, for example, an image indicating that the power has been restored (power-return notification image) is displayed, and a sound indicating that the power has been restored is output from the speaker 11 (power-return notification sound). is. In this embodiment, the execution time of the power return effect (the output time of the power return notification sound) is longer than the maximum time of one round game (long open round game) of 29 seconds. seconds”. For example, if a power failure occurs in the middle of a predetermined round game and the power is restored in the middle of the predetermined round game (when the predetermined round game is resumed in the middle), at least during the remaining time of the round game Since the power-off recovery sound is output, it is possible for the player to surely recognize that the round game has been restarted. Here, when the power-off recovery sound and the jackpot sound are competing, the power-off recovery sound is prioritized over the jackpot sound (for example, the power-off recovery sound is output at a higher level than the jackpot sound). or stop the output of the effect sound during the big hit). In addition, when the power-off recovery sound is output, even if over-winning occurs in the round game after restarting, the power-off recovery sound is prioritized over the over-winning sound (for example, the power-off recovery sound is given priority over the over-winning sound). Alternatively, the return sound may be output at a high sound level, or the output of the over-winning sound may be stopped. In addition, the display time of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is longer than the output time of the sound indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification sound) so that it can be recognized that the jackpot is in progress. It is desirable to have a short configuration. For example, the display time of the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) is set to 15 seconds, and the output time of the sound indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification sound) is 30 seconds. Seconds are preferred. In addition, when the image indicating that the power has been restored (power return notification image) is displayed, the effect during the jackpot will not be displayed, so the cumulative number of winning balls display, highlight display, over winning image and bonus winning image will not be displayed. It is never displayed. In addition, when the power is restored, the effect information related to the accumulated prize ball value held before the power is erased, so an image indicating that the power has been restored when the power is restored When the display of the notification image) ends and the effect during the big hit is displayed, the display of the accumulated number of prize balls will start again from zero (“0”), and the display condition for highlighting (reaching a specific value Since the condition until the power is turned off) will be reset, the situation where the cumulative number of prize balls displayed before the power is turned off reaches a specific value when the next ball enters the big prize hole 54 (for example, 10000 Even if it is 9999 in front), during the big hit after the power is turned off and the power is restored, the display of the accumulated number of prize balls is zero. Even if there is one incoming ball, it will not be highlighted. In addition, when the display of the image indicating that the power has been restored at the time of power failure restoration (power restoration notification image) ends and the effect during the jackpot is displayed, the image indicating that the power has been restored (power restoration notification image) While is displayed, if a ball enters the big winning hole 54 or the general winning hole 64, the prize ball corresponding to the entering ball will be paid out, but an image indicating that the power has been restored ( During the display of the power return notification image), the display of the over-winning image, the display of the bonus winning image, the display of the accumulated number of winning balls, the count-up effect (large winning mouth count-up effect, general winning mouth count-up effect) etc. are not performed, At that time, (1) even when the display of the image indicating that the power supply has been restored (power supply restoration notification image) is finished and the effect during the big win is resumed, the display of the accumulated number of winning balls may start from zero. (2) When the display of the image indicating that the power supply has been restored (power supply restoration notification image) is completed and the effect during the jackpot is resumed, the display of the accumulated number of prize balls is changed to the image indicating that the power supply has been restored (power supply During the display of the return notification image), the cumulative number of prize balls may be displayed by adding the value of the prize balls paid out corresponding to the balls entering the special prize opening 54 or the general prize winning opening 64. In addition, the count-up effect (large winning mouth count-up effect, general winning mouth count-up effect) is being executed before the power is turned off, and the count-up effect has not ended yet, and the prize ball corresponding to the count-up effect is also in progress and has not yet been completed (for example, in the middle of a count-up effect and payout for 300 prize balls), if the power is cut off, after the power is restored, the power The rest of the count-up effect executed before the occurrence of interruption is not performed, but prize balls that have not yet been paid out are paid out.

(Right shot notification image)
During the execution of the special game, as shown in FIG. 17, a right-handed display area 731 on the screen prompts the player to hit right-handed (shoot a game ball aiming at the right-hand side area PA2). A hitting notification image is displayed. In addition, in the first prize ball acquisition display area 732A of the screen, an over winning image is displayed with the occurrence of over winning as a trigger. The right-handed display area 731 and the first winning display area 732A are provided as different display areas, and the right-handed notification image and the over-winning image are displayed separately in a positional relationship that does not overlap each other. Also, during execution of the special game, a bonus winning image is displayed in the second prize winning display area 732B of the screen, triggered by the occurrence of a bonus winning. The right-handed display area 731 and the second winning display area 732B are provided as different display areas, and the right-handed notification image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a non-overlapping positional relationship. Therefore, when over winning or bonus winning occurs during the execution of the special game, the over winning image or the bonus winning image does not overlap with the right-handed notification image, and one information does not hide the other information. there is

(Volume adjustment screen)
FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram showing the volume adjustment screen of this embodiment. In this embodiment, when the player simultaneously operates the left and right keys of the cross key during execution of a special game, volume adjustment images showing multiple stages of volume levels are displayed side by side in the volume adjustment image display area 736 of the screen. be done. The volume adjustment image indicates the current volume level, and in the illustrated example, the volume level is adjusted to the third level corresponding to the current volume level. By operating the left key or the right key by the player, it is possible to adjust the output level (volume level) of sounds such as BGM and sound effects output from the speaker 11 . Specifically, while the volume adjustment image is being displayed, operating the right key raises the volume level, and operating the left key lowers the volume level.

In the present embodiment, regardless of whether the special game is being executed, more specifically, the over-winning effect is being executed (the over-winning sound is being output) or the bonus winning effect is being executed (bonus The volume of the speaker 11 can be adjusted by the player operating the left and right keys regardless of whether the winning sound is being output. Therefore, the volume is adjusted by the player during execution of the over winning effect (over winning sound is being output) or during the bonus winning effect being executed (over winning sound is being output). In this case, the adjusted volume level changes in real time as the volume level of the over-winning sound or the bonus-winning sound currently being output. In other words, the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound is changed by the volume adjustment operation performed by the player, so that the volume of the over-winning sound or the bonus winning sound does not differ before and after the volume adjustment operation. It becomes possible to Note that the audio image display area 736 and the first prize winning display area 732A are provided as different display areas, respectively, and the audio adjustment image and the over winning image are displayed separately in a non-overlapping positional relationship. Similarly, the audio image display area 736 and the second prize winning display area 732B are provided as different display areas, respectively, and the audio adjustment image and the bonus winning image are displayed separately in a non-overlapping positional relationship. Therefore, when over winning or bonus winning occurs during execution of a special game, the over winning image or bonus winning image does not overlap with the volume adjustment image, and one information does not hide the other information. . When the highlighted display and the volume adjustment screen are displayed at the same time, they are superimposed and displayed, but the display priority of the volume adjustment screen is higher, and when they are superimposed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed in front of the highlighted display. (some or all of the highlighting is hidden in the volume control screen).

≪Conditions for excessive winning error in general winning entrance≫
“Error occurrence condition” is a condition for determining that an error has occurred in the gaming machine. In this embodiment, when the main control board 100 determines that a predetermined error occurrence condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect control command (error effect designation command) is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200, and effect An error notification effect is performed by the control board 200 .

In the following, as one of the multiple types of error occurrence conditions, the excessive winning error occurrence conditions of the general winning openings 61 to 64 will be described. In the present embodiment, among the plurality of general winning openings 61 to 64, the conditions for generating excessive winning errors for the general winning openings 61 to 63 and the conditions for generating excessive winning errors for the general winning opening 64 are set to different conditions.

The condition for occurrence of excessive winning errors in the general winning openings 61 to 63 is the number of game balls entering the general winning openings 61 to 63 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the left general winning opening switch 611). is a condition that is established when reaches the first specified number. The first specified number is set to, for example, "30". In other words, when 30 game balls enter the general winning openings 61-63 in 30 seconds, the condition for occurrence of an excessive winning error in the general winning openings 61-63 is established.

The condition for occurrence of an excessive winning error in the general winning opening 64 is that the number of game balls entering the general winning opening 64 within a unit time (30 seconds) (the number of game balls detected by the right general winning opening switch 641) is the second specified number. It is a condition that is satisfied when reaching The second prescribed number is set to, for example, "60". That is, when 60 game balls enter the general winning hole 64 in 30 seconds, the excessive winning error generation condition of the general winning hole 64 is established.

As a modification of the present embodiment, the conditions for occurrence of excessive winning errors for the general winning ports 61 to 64 may be set according to the type of game state currently being executed. For example, if the game state (normal game state) in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game, the general winning openings 61 to 63 have a relative frequency of entering balls per unit time than the general winning opening 64. Therefore, the threshold for establishing the excess winning error conditions for the general winning openings 61 to 63 is set to be higher than the excessive winning error generating condition for the general winning opening 64.例文帳に追加In that case, even if the game ball enters the general winning openings 61 to 63 under a predetermined condition (predetermined ball entry frequency), the excessive winning error condition is not established, but the game ball enters the general winning opening 64. If a prize is won under a predetermined condition (predetermined ball-entering frequency), an excessive winning error occurs. On the other hand, if the game state (probability variable game state, time-saving game state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main subject, the general winning hole 64 is more likely to enter the ball frequency per unit time than the general winning holes 61 to 63 is set to be relatively high, the threshold for establishing the excess winning error condition for the general winning opening 64 is set to be higher than the excessive winning error generating condition for the general winning openings 61 to 63. ing. In that case, even if the game ball enters the general winning hole 64 under specific conditions (specific ball entry frequency), the excessive winning error does not occur, but the game ball is specified to the general winning holes 61-64. If the ball is entered under the conditions (specific ball entry frequency), an excessive winning error will occur.

In addition, even if the conditions for generating excessive winning errors in the general winning ports 61 to 63 and the conditions for generating excessive winning errors in the general winning ports 64 are set to different conditions, the excessive winning errors in the general winning ports 61 to 63 are canceled. It is preferable to set the condition and the excessive winning error cancellation condition of the right general winning opening 64 to the same condition. The error release condition is, for example, the condition that the error notification effect ends (for example, 30 seconds after the error notification screen is displayed/the error notification sound starts), and the ON output of the outer end signal related to the excessive winning error is The condition for stopping (the condition for outputting off, for example, when 300 seconds have passed since the start of output), the power supply being turned off once and then the power being restored, and the like are applicable.

≪Duplicate execution of over winning effects and bonus winning effects≫
FIG. 31 is a time chart for explaining overlapping execution of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect. In the present embodiment, when the over winning and the bonus winning occur at substantially the same timing, the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed in duplicate. Duplicate execution of the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect means that the execution period (or execution timing) of the over-winning effect overlaps with the execution period (or execution timing) of the bonus winning effect, and the execution period of both effects overlap, and a case where part of the execution period of both effects overlaps. In the illustrated example, the execution period of the over winning effect and the execution period of the bonus winning effect partially overlap. When the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are executed in duplicate, the first winning ball display area 732A displaying the over winning image and the second winning ball winning display area 732B displaying the bonus winning image are displayed. are provided as separate and independent display areas from each other, so that the over-winning image and the bonus-winning image are not superimposed on each other. On the other hand, the over-winning sound and the bonus-winning sound may be output in duplicate, or only one of them may be output. If only one is output, priority may be given to the earlier winning (that is, the earlier winning is the winning to the special winning opening 54, and the later winning is the winning to the general winning opening 64). priority is given to the over-winning sound, and if the previous winning is to the general winning gate 64 and the later winning is to the big winning gate 54, the bonus winning sound is given priority), Priority may be given to the winning (that is, if the previous winning is a winning to the special winning opening 54 and the subsequent winning is a winning to the general winning opening 64, the bonus winning sound is prioritized and the previous winning is is a winning to the general winning opening 64 and the subsequent winning is a winning to the big winning opening 54, priority is given to the over winning sound). If priority is given to the earlier winning, for example, if there is a later winning while the winning sound relating to the earlier winning is being output, the winning sound relating to the earlier winning is output and then the winning sound relating to the later winning is output. The output may be started, or no winning sound related to subsequent winning may be output. If the later winning is given priority, for example, if there is a later winning while the winning sound related to the earlier winning is being output, the winning sound related to the earlier winning is interrupted at the time of the later winning, and then the later winning is played. You may make it start outputting the prize-winning sound concerning prize-winning.

As a modification of the present embodiment, when the over-winning and the bonus winnings occur at substantially the same timing, the over-winning image and the bonus winning image may not be displayed in duplicate. In other words, when over winning and bonus winning occur at substantially the same timing, even if the display period (or display timing) of the over winning image and the display period (or display timing) of the bonus winning image do not overlap. good. In this case, there are cases where the display periods of both images do not entirely overlap, and cases where the display periods of both images do not partially overlap.

If the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not displayed in an overlapping manner, the one of the bonus winning image and the over-winning image that wins earlier in terms of time (the one whose entry of the game ball is detected first) may be configured to preferentially display the winning images. On the contrary, when the over-winning image and the bonus winning image are not overlapped and displayed, the one of the bonus winning image and the over-winning image that won later in time (the game ball won later) It may be configured such that the winning image of the detected player) is preferentially displayed.

(Multiple over winnings)
FIG. 32 is a time chart when over winning and bonus winning occur multiple times within a predetermined period. In this embodiment, when multiple over-wins occur within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), over-wins are produced for the first over-wins (winning of the 11th game ball). However, it is configured so that the over winning effect is not performed for the second and subsequent over winnings (winning of game balls after the 12th game ball). In other words, when multiple over-wins occur within a predetermined period, only the execution of the first over-win effect is allowed, and the execution of the over-win effect after the second time is restricted (regulated). ). However, the payout of prize balls due to over winning is performed twice, and the big winning opening count-up performance due to over winning is also performed twice (performed twice without interrupting the first big winning opening count up performance). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of bonus prizes are won within a predetermined period (interval period in the illustrated example), a bonus prize effect is performed for each bonus prize, and a prize based on the bonus prize is generated. The balls are put out twice, and the general winning opening count-up performance by the bonus prize is also performed twice (performed twice without interrupting the first general winning opening count-up performance). That is, when a plurality of bonus prizes are won within a predetermined period, execution of all the bonus prize effects is allowed. As a modification, when multiple over-wins occur within a predetermined period, an over-win effect is performed for the first over-win (winning of the 11th game ball), and the second and subsequent over-wins are performed. While the configuration is such that an over-winning effect is performed for over-winning (winning of game balls after the 12th game ball), if there is a second over-winning during execution of the first over-winning effect, ( 1) Start execution of the second over-winning effect after the first over-winning effect is completed (completely completed), or (2) Even if the first over-winning effect is in progress It may be configured such that the execution of the second over-winning effect is started after the second over-winning is interrupted. In that case, regardless of (1) or (2), the prize ball payout due to the over winning is performed twice, and the big winning opening count-up effect due to the over winning is performed twice (the first big winning opening count It is preferable that the up effect is performed twice without interruption). Furthermore, if multiple bonus prizes are won within a predetermined period of time, the bonus prize effect will be performed for the first bonus prize, and the bonus prize effect will be performed for the second and subsequent bonus prizes. On the other hand, if there is a second or later bonus prize during the execution of the first bonus prize effect, (3) after the first bonus prize effect is completed (completed), the second or (4) even if the first bonus prize-winning effect is in progress, it is interrupted by the second bonus-winning effect, and then the execution of the second bonus-winning effect is started. may be configured as follows. In that case, regardless of (3) or (4), the prize ball payout due to the bonus winning will be performed twice, and the general winning opening count-up effect due to the bonus winning will also be performed twice (the first general winning opening count It is preferable that the up effect is performed twice without interruption).

≪External information signal≫
In this embodiment, the external information signal (outer end signal) that the external information terminal board 600 outputs as external information to an external device outside the machine includes, for example, a winning ball signal, a jackpot signal, a consecutive game signal, and a pattern confirmation signal. , door frame open signal, security signal, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, abnormality sensor detection (ball passing time abnormality, etc.) signal, etc. are included.

Here, the external devices installed outside the game machine PM include data displays, hall computers, and the like. The data display is a device that is installed above the gaming machine PM and displays data (game information) regarding the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display serves as useful judgment material for the player to select a gaming machine. The hall computer aggregates the operating states of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on external information signals output from each gaming machine installed in the hall of the gaming arcade, and determines the status of each game. It is a device that manages the operating status of the machine. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via the data display or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without the data display.

(Ball signal)
The winning ball signal is an external information signal that is output for a predetermined time each time a predetermined number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls are paid out from the gaming machine. That is, in this embodiment, every time 10 prize balls are paid out, the prize ball signal is continuously output for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms). In this embodiment, a prize ball number counter for counting the number of game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 is provided. Every time it is detected, "1" is added to the winning ball number counter. Then, when the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", the external information terminal board 600 outputs the prize ball signal. When the value of the prize ball number counter reaches the predetermined number "10", the count value returns to the initial value "0" (that is, counting starts from the initial value "0").

FIG. 33 is a time chart of winning ball signals when a game ball enters the general winning hole 64. FIG. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) given based on one game ball entering the general winning hole 64 is "three". Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the right general winning opening switch 641, three game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and "3" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. be. At this time, as shown in (A) in the figure, if the value of the prize ball counter before addition is in the range from "0" to "6" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), The value of the prize ball number counter after addition never reaches a predetermined number, and no prize ball signal is output. On the other hand, as shown in (B) in the figure, if the value of the prize ball counter before addition is in the range from "7" to "9" (corresponding to "7" in the illustrated example), after addition When the value of the winning ball number counter reaches a predetermined number once, the winning ball signal is output once. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when one game ball enters the general winning hole 64 as a trigger (a general winning hole normal winning effect is executed once), the prize ball signal is output even once. There are cases where the prize ball signal is output once, and there are cases where the prize ball signal is output once. In the above description, the general prize winning port 64 out of the plurality of general prize winning ports 61 to 64 has been described as an example, but the same can be said for the general prize winning ports 61 to 63 as well.

FIG. 34 is a time chart of a winning ball signal when a game ball enters the big winning hole 54. FIG. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) provided based on one game ball entering the big winning hole 54 is "15". Therefore, when the entry of game balls is detected by the big winning opening switch 541, 15 game balls are paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34, and "15" is added to the value of the prize ball number counter. . At this time, if the value of the prize ball counter before addition is in the range of "0" to "4" (corresponding to "0" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball counter after addition is predetermined. By reaching the number once, the prize ball signal is output once. On the other hand, if the value of the prize ball counter before addition is in the range of "5" to "9" (equivalent to "5" in the illustrated example), the value of the prize ball counter after addition is a predetermined number. is reached twice, the prize ball signal is output twice. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the entry of one game ball into the large winning opening 54 is the trigger (the large winning opening normal winning effect or the large winning opening over winning effect is executed once). There are a case where the ball signal is output once and a case where the winning ball signal is output twice.

<Relationship with other hit productions>
Next, the relationship between the winning-related effects (large winning opening winning effects, general winning opening winning effects) and other effects during the jackpot will be described. In the following, as other effects during the big hit, (C) holding consecutive suggestion effect, (D) promotion effect, and (E) special effect will be exemplified.

≪C. Suggestion production of holding group≫
The reservation consecutive suggestion effect is an effect suggesting that the reservation is established during execution of the special game (there is a big hit reservation). As mentioned above, "suspended ball" is a special A big win is expected to occur in one or more succeeding operation-reserving balls that exist at a predetermined timing from the permission of judging the suitability of a symbol to the end of a special game executed with the big win as a trigger. It means that the operation retention ball (also referred to as “jackpot retention”) is included. In addition, in the present embodiment, the game state at the time of the occurrence of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game currently being executed is the specific game state (high base state), and the game state after the special game is finished is also the specific game. When the state (high base state) is reached, that is, when the continuous game is continuing, if there is a big hit pending in the pending, the pending continuous suggesting effect is executed in the special game currently being executed. Conversely, if the game state at the time of the occurrence of the big hit that triggers the execution of the special game currently being executed is the normal game state (low base state), even if there is a big hit pending in the pending, The holding consecutive suggestion performance is not executed in the special game being executed. In addition, it is preferable that the special game currently being executed is based on the success/failure determination result related to the second special symbol, and it is preferable that the jackpot suspension in the suspension is also the suspension related to the second special symbol. .

In this embodiment, the execution timing of the holding consecutive suggestion effect is set during the jackpot end demonstration period, as shown in FIGS. 12 and 14 . Whether or not the holding consecutive suggestion performance can be executed is performed when the special game is started, and is determined by lottery when the holding consecutive suggestion performance execution condition is satisfied when the special game is started. As a modified example, in the event that a player wins an execution lottery triggered by the fact that the conditions for execution of a holding consecutive suggestion effect are satisfied immediately before or at the start of the jackpot end demonstration, the holding consecutive suggesting effect may be executed. good.

The condition for execution of the holding series suggestion effect is that the type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the special game currently being executed is a high-profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot), and one or more special symbols are activated within the ball. contains a high-profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot) with a jackpot pending. In other words, even if there is a big hit pending in the operation pending ball of the special pattern, if the big hit type related to the big win pending is not a high-profit big win (4R specific big win or 4R normal big win), the big win is held. Continuous suggestion effect is not executed. Furthermore, in a situation where there are a plurality of jackpots held in the operation reserve ball of the special pattern, the jackpot type related to the previous jackpot reserve is a low-profit jackpot, and the jackpot type related to the later jackpot reserve is a high-profit jackpot. , the holding consecutive suggestion effect is not executed in the special game currently being executed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the holding continuous suggestive effect is executed during execution of the special game, a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot) is displayed within a predetermined number of times (four rotations) after the end of the special game. Not only is it definite that the game will occur, but it is also definite that the special game next to the special game in which the holding consecutive suggestion performance is executed is not a low-profit jackpot (4R specific jackpot or 4R normal jackpot). In addition, in this embodiment, the "special figure 2 priority digestion method" is adopted, which preferentially digests the operation suspension ball of the second special symbol over the operation suspension ball of the first special symbol. The target operation retention ball is limited to the operation retention ball of the second special symbol.

The holding consecutive suggestion effect is a effect that is executed during the jackpot end demonstration period and displays a special image that does not appear in any other scene. Examples of special images include effect images made up of still images, effect images made up of moving images, and effect images made up of both still images and moving images.

In this embodiment, the holding consecutive suggestion effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game). That is, the holding consecutive suggestion effect can be executed only in the longevity jackpot effect as the effect pattern during the big win. On the other hand, the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed whether the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game) or a low profit special game (4R special game). That is, the over-winning performance and the bonus-winning performance can be executed in any of the super long winning performance, the longevity big winning A performance, the longevity big winning A performance, the longevity big winning B performance, the happy big winning A performance, and the happy big winning B performance as the performance pattern during the big winning.

In the present embodiment, the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed during execution of the pending consecutive suggestion effect. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the pending consecutive suggestion effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect do not overlap. In other words, the holding consecutive suggestion effect is executed during the jackpot end demonstration period, whereas the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demonstration period, but are executed during the interval period. It is from. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the holding continuation suggestion performance and the over winning performance are not executed redundantly, and the holding continuation suggestion performance and the bonus winning performance are not redundantly executed. The effect and the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect are executed independently. As a modified example, the holding consecutive suggestion effect may be executed during the round game. The bonus winning effect may be executed in duplicate, and in such a configuration, the display priority is higher for the holding consecutive suggestion effect (displaying the over winning image or the bonus winning image in the back, or not display), and if a special sound effect is generated during the hold-suggestion production, this special sound effect will be output with priority (reduce the volume of the over-winning sound and the bonus winning sound, or output).

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution time of the holding consecutive suggestion effect is set longer than the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect. Retained renso is a reward with a high degree of profit for the player compared to over winning and bonus winning, so the execution time of the retained renso effect is set relatively long to prevent the player from overlooking it. I try not to

In the present embodiment, the pending inner resou production is executed only as a "truthful rendition" that definitely notifies the establishment of the reserving inner resou production. You may include "fake production" that has not been established. In this example, as one of the execution conditions for the performance of the reserve inside Renso production, it is a condition that the preceding operation reserve ball is a high profit jackpot (16R jackpot) jackpot reserve, but it is limited to this. Instead, the preceding actuation pending ball may be a jackpot pending other than a high-profit jackpot (16R jackpot), ie, a jackpot hit corresponding to a low-profit jackpot (4R jackpot).

Further, by changing the display mode of the cumulative number of winning balls display from the normal display mode (for example, white display) to the special display mode (gold display), it may be suggested that the pending game is established. Further, the holding consecutive suggestion effect may be performed at the execution timing of the emphasized effect (highlighted display) performed when the value of the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value. In that case, it is preferable to suggest that the reservation is established by the display mode of the emphasized effect.

≪D. promotion performance≫
Promotion performance means that when a big hit occurs in the variable display of special symbols, the profit mode related to the big win (for convenience, it will be referred to as a "provisional profit mode") before or at the start of the special game is suggested or notified. After that, during execution of the special game, there is an effect suggesting whether or not the actual profit mode related to the big win is higher in profit degree than the provisional profit mode. In other words, by suggesting whether the profit mode of the jackpot suggested before or at the start of the special game is true (correct profit mode) or false (high profit mode), the jackpot is won through the series of processes. This is an effect to show whether or not the profit mode of the is promoted (changed).

The types of promotion effects are roughly divided into round promotion effects and variable promotion effects. The round promotion effect is in a state where the specified number of rounds (provisional specified number of rounds) of the special game suggested or notified when the big hit occurs is uncertain whether it is the true number of rounds or the number of false rounds, and after that provisional number of rounds is also an effect that suggests the possibility that the round game will continue. This round promotion effect includes one that simply suggests a round promotion and one that suggests not only a round promotion but also the true prescribed number of rounds or the number of long open rounds. The variable promotion effect is an uncertain state whether the jackpot type (temporary jackpot type) suggested or notified when the jackpot occurs is a true jackpot type or a false jackpot type (uncertain state whether it is a specific jackpot) ), it is an effect that suggests the possibility of shifting to a variable probability game state after the end of the special game. In this embodiment, when the promotion effect (round promotion effect, variable probability promotion effect) occurs during execution of the special game, it becomes certain that the promotion succeeds.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 16, the probability variation promotion effect is when the first special symbol "4R specific jackpot" is won in the normal game state, or the second special symbol " When the 4R specific jackpot" is won, it is executed when the "joy jackpot B performance" is selected as the jackpot middle performance pattern. The execution timing of this variable probability promotion performance is set during the jackpot end demonstration period. In this variable promotion production, the movable accessory 24 is dropped and moved to overlap with the screen, and then the movable accessory 24 is moved upward again to display the title "Kotobuki big hit" on the exposed screen. By doing so, it is the content of the performance that makes it look as if it has been promoted from the ``joy jackpot performance'' to the ``Kotobuki jackpot performance'' (the jackpot type is promoted from the 4R normal jackpot to the 4R specific jackpot).

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 14, the round promotion effect is, when the second special symbol "16 specific jackpot" is won in the time-saving game state or the variable probability game state, the "Kotobuki jackpot B effect" is performed as the jackpot medium effect pattern. ” is selected. The execution timing of this round promotion effect is set from the fourth round to the interval period of the fourth round. This round promotion effect displays the characters "Final Round" (fake display) on the screen once to make it appear that the round game currently being executed is the final round game, and then this model By displaying a cut-in image of the message `` That's not the case! (the jackpot type is promoted from the 4R specific jackpot to the 16R specific jackpot).

In this embodiment, the round promotion effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is the "16R special game (high profit special game)", but the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are currently being executed. The special game is either a "16R special game (high-profit special game)" or a "4R special game (low-profit special game)" and is configured to be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed while the variable probability promotion effect is being executed. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the variable probability promotion effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect do not overlap. In other words, the probability variable promotion effect is executed during the jackpot end demo period, whereas the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are not executed during the jackpot end demo period, but are executed during the interval period. is. Therefore, during the execution of the special game, the variable probability promotion performance and the over winning performance are not executed redundantly, and the variable probability promotion performance and the bonus winning performance are not redundantly executed, and the variable probability promotion performance and the over winning performance are not executed. The winning effect or the bonus winning effect is executed independently. As a modification, the variable probability promotion effect may be executed during the round game, in which case the variable probability promotion effect and the over winning effect may be executed in duplicate, and the variable probability promotion effect and the bonus winning effect may be executed. And may be executed repeatedly, and if configured in such a way, the display priority is higher for the probability variation promotion effect (display the display of the over-winning image or the bonus winning image on the back, or hide it) , Also, if a special sound effect occurs during the variable promotion production, this special sound effect is preferentially output (reduce the volume of the over-winning sound and bonus winning sound, or do not output) you can

Further, in the present embodiment, during execution of the round promotion effect, the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect can be repeatedly executed. That is, since the round promotion effect is executed from the fourth round to the interval period of the fourth round, if over winning or bonus winning occurs within the interval period, the execution period of the round promotion effect ( Execution timing) and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect can overlap. In addition, the round promotion effect has a higher display priority (the over winning image and the bonus winning image are displayed on the back or hidden), and a special sound effect is generated during the round promotion effect. In this case, the dedicated sound effect may be preferentially output (the volume of the over-winning sound and the bonus-winning sound may be reduced or not output).

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set to "31 seconds" from the start of the fourth round to the end of the interval period, and the execution time of the variable probability promotion effect is set to the start of the jackpot end demonstration. It is set to "20 seconds" from time to end time. On the other hand, the execution times of the over-winning effect and the bonus-winning effect are each set to "0.5 second". Therefore, the execution time of the round promotion effect is set longer than the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect. Also, the execution time of the variable probability promotion effect is set longer than the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect.

«E. Special performance≫
The special effect is a highly rare effect that is executed when a predetermined consecutive villa condition is satisfied. The ``predetermined consecutive conditions'' means that the number of consecutive jackpots reaches a specified number of times (20 times in this embodiment), and at least the specified number of times (20th time in this embodiment) is the highest jackpot type. This is a condition that is met when the profit jackpot (16R specific jackpot) is achieved. This special effect appears during execution of a special game (16R special game) triggered by the occurrence of a specified number of times (20th) big win. However, this special effect ends with the final (16th round) round game, and does not include the subsequent end demonstration period (however, even if it includes the final interval period, the final interval period is may not be included). In addition, this special effect is composed of the effect content (special movie) that sequentially displays the highly rare premium characters of this model one by one.

In addition to the prescribed number of consecutive villas, the predetermined condition for the consecutive villas is, for example, that the accumulated number of 16R specific big wins in the continuous villa state reaches a prescribed number of times (the 16R specific big hit of the second special symbol Continuity), or that the total number of acquired rounds or the cumulative number of winning balls in the continuous state reach a predetermined number, etc. may be added as conditions. Here, as described above, "Renso (continuous state)" refers to the game state in the non-special game state, after the occurrence of the first hit that triggers the transition from the non-specific game state to the specific game state. It refers to a state in which a specific game state continues without returning to a non-specific game state (starting from the time of the first hit, and thereafter, a state in which big wins in the specific game state occur continuously). "Specific game state" is a game state in which the probability of transition to a special game is increased compared to the normal game state, and in a broad sense, the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support A game state in which any one of the functions is activated. In addition, in this embodiment, the specific game state means a game state in which at least the electric chew support function is operating, that is, a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game.

In this embodiment, the special effect can be executed only when the special game currently being executed is a high-profit special game (16R special game). On the other hand, the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect can be executed whether the special game currently being executed is a high profit special game (16R special game) or a low profit special game (4R special game).

In the present embodiment, even if an over-winning effect or a bonus winning effect occurs during execution of the special effect, the over-winning effect or the bonus winning effect is not executed. That is, the execution period (execution timing) of the special effect and the execution period (execution timing) of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect do not overlap. The reason for this is that when a special effect competes with an over winning effect or a bonus winning effect, it is better to give priority to the execution of a rare special effect (premium character display that can only be seen in the special effect). This is because the player will be satisfied with the result.

As a modified example of the present embodiment, when an over-winning effect or a bonus-winning effect occurs during execution of the special effect, the over-winning effect or the bonus-winning effect may be performed in duplicate. When the special effect and the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect are performed in duplicate, the priority of the display of the special effect (layer priority) is higher than the priority of the display of the over winning effect or bonus winning effect priority) is preferably set higher. However, while the special effect is a effect that is displayed in a large size on the entire screen, the over-winning effect and the bonus winning effect are effects that are displayed in a small size toward the edge of the screen, so the priority of the display of the special effect The priority of the display of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect (layer priority) may be set higher than the (layer priority).

In this embodiment, the execution time of the special effect is set to "499 seconds" from the start of the jackpot start demonstration to the end of the final round game (16th round). On the other hand, the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are each set to "0.5 second". Therefore, the execution time of the special effect is set longer than the execution time of the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect.

In addition, if a power failure occurs during the execution of a special game (for example, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off due to a power failure, etc.), if over winning or bonus winning occurs after the power failure is restored , the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect is executed after the power is restored. This is because the decision to execute the over-winning effect or the bonus-winning effect is triggered by the over-winning or the bonus-winning, that is, by the event after the power is turned off and restored. On the other hand, the effect control command for power-off recovery transmitted from the main control board 100 after power-off recovery does not include data for recovery of the holding consecutive suggestion effect, promotion effect and special effect. Since the RAM 203 of the effect control board 200 is not backed up by the power supply, if the power is cut off during execution of the special game, even if the execution condition of each effect is satisfied or the execution opportunity arrives at the time of the power cut, the special game is executed. With regard to the pending continuous suggestion effect, promotion effect, and special effect that determine whether or not to execute at the start of the game, after the power is restored, there will be no data regarding whether or not these effects can be executed. is not executed in

<Processing on the main control board side>
Next, the procedure of operation processing in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 35 to 48. FIG. The processing on the main control board 100 side includes main control side main processing and main control side timer interrupt processing.

《Main processing on the main control side》
35 and 36 are flow charts showing main processing on the main control side of the main control board 100. FIG. In this main control side main process, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, the program starts and the processes after S1 are started.

First, as an initial setting required when power is turned on, the top address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S1), and access to the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Subsequently, a vector table storing the start address of the program to be processed when a timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and an initial value is set in the built-in register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). If the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is zero-cleared in S9, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read to determine whether or not the power-off normal information is saved (S6).

Here, if the power-off normal information is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). The power-on checksum calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off processing described later. Sum becomes "0". In this manner, it is determined at power-on whether or not the information stored in the RAM 103 before power-off is correctly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to restore the state before the power was turned off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, the initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Subsequently, in order to initialize the effect display device 70, initialize the effect lamp LP, etc., a request is made for an effect control command ("effect initial command") to the effect control board 200 (S11).

Next, in the power-off recovery setting process, the power-on normal information setting, the initial setting of various errors, and the communication initial setting with the payout control board 400 are performed in order in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power was turned on correctly, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, and the power-off occurrence information is initialized. Turn off the power off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are set, and data corresponding to the number of transfer bytes are transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of power failure is read, and the power failure recovery process relating to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

Subsequently, a transmission request is made for an effect control command ("power-off return command") when the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are restored from power-off (S15). This power-off recovery command includes information on inspection of the communication line, operating state of special symbols, number of probability fluctuations, number of times of time saving, number of easy-to-enter states, variation pattern selection state, and error state. Command requests that have not been sent before the power is turned off are cleared. Next, in the symbol storage number command request process, the information on the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of power off is read, and the effect control command including the information on the number of operation pending balls is requested ( S16).

Subsequently, a return setting is performed to return the normal electric accessory 522 to the state before the power was turned off (for example, the second start port 52 is opened) (S17). Furthermore, the return setting for returning the special electric accessory 542 to the state before power-off (for example, the state in which the big winning opening 54 is opened) is performed (S18). Subsequently, the value of the probability variation flag is read, and the operation state of the probability variation function of the special symbol at the time of power failure is set (S19). In addition, the probability variation flag is a flag for setting the operation probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game (flag indicating that the probability variation function of the special symbol is in operation). Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Subsequently, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, in preparation for restarting the watchdog timer, clear word 1 ("55H") is set (S22).

Next, in order to determine whether power failure has occurred, the value of the power failure confirmation flag is read to determine whether or not power failure has occurred (S23). If power failure has not occurred, an initial value random number update process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the minimum value is returned to "0".

Next, interrupt permission is set to permit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S25), the above-described interrupt prohibition processing (S21) is returned to, and the loop processing of S21 to S25 is repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt processing is periodically executed at predetermined intervals. Repeat the process up to If there is an interrupt request in the interrupt disabled state, timer interrupt processing is started when the interrupt is enabled in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in S23, that is, if power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 to execute the power-off processing described below.

Next, as power-off processing (S26 to S32), clear word 2 ("AAH") is first set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether or not the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (S27). If it is the power-on normal information (S27: Yes), power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, if it is not power-on normal information (S27: No), power-off abnormal data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, the complement of the checksum data is calculated, and the resultant value of the complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Subsequently, the access prohibition setting for the RAM 103 is performed (S32), and the processing is looped until the power is turned off.

《Main control side timer interrupt processing》
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. As shown in FIG. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110 at regular intervals (for example, 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the main control side main process described above.

First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operating conditions are set (S51).

Next, clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted by sequentially writing clear word 1 and clear word 2 to the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within a preset timeout period. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before timeout. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset will occur.

Next, input processing is executed (S53). In this input process, as various switches connected to the main control board 100, information on switches other than the RAM clear switch is read. That is, the first start switch 511, the second start switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the large winning switch 541, the general winning switches 611 and 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, the magnetic sensor , radio wave sensor, etc., determine their states, and store the detected information.

Next, various random number updating processes are executed (S54). In this random number update process, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the special symbol variation pattern random number, and the special symbol variation additional pattern random number are updated. As for the normal pattern variation pattern random number, 1 is added to the numerical value of the random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value. On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation additional pattern random number, a predetermined value (for example, 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtraction result is less than 0, a predetermined value (eg, 50000) is added to the subtraction result.

Next, an initial value update type random number update process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, the random number per normal symbol, the soft random number per special symbol and the random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the minimum value is returned to "0". Also, when the number of the counter reaches one cycle, the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

Next, an initial value random number update process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number update process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol, and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, the minimum value is returned to "0".

Next, timer subtraction processing is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for game operation control of the pachinko game machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the values of various timers are decremented by each interrupt period (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (fluctuation time, fixed display time) related to the variable display and stop display by the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, and the like. A specified variable time is set in the special symbol game timer at the start of the variable display of the special symbols, and is subtracted as the time elapses. It should be noted that, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when one of the special symbols is fluctuatingly displayed, when the small winning game of the other special symbol is executed, during the execution of the small winning game, one of the The timing of the variable display of special symbols is interrupted.

Next, a second start port effective period setting process is executed (S58). In this second starting opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting opening 51 are determined, and the valid period data or invalid period data of the second starting opening 51 is set as the determination result.

Next, a winning monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning monitoring process, the detection information of the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the big winning opening switch 541, and the general winning opening switches 611, 641 in the input process (S53). Based on this, the game ball is inspected for passing through the switches. As a result, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through each switch, information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch is stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. , and requests transmission of an effect control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed through each switch. The details of the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, a prize ball control process is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control board 400 to indicate the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of prize based on the detection result of the above winning monitoring process, and the payout control board 400 Received data from is monitored to check communication with the payout control board 400 .

Next, a normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 53, a random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as operation reservation ball information. , Updating the number of operation pending balls up to a maximum of 4, and storing random numbers related to normal symbol lottery.

Next, a normal symbol control process is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control process, a series of processes relating to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric accessory 522 are performed, so that depending on the value of the normal symbol game status, normal symbol fluctuation process, normal symbol stop symbol display process , Normal electric accessories in operation processing, normal electric accessories operation end demonstration processing, etc. are executed. In addition, in the process during normal design fluctuation, the display pattern number data of the normal design is created (updated) in order to display the normal design in a variable display or a fixed display.

Next, normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring processing is executed (S63). In this normal symbol variation start monitoring process, the operation state of the normal symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the condition for starting the variation of the normal symbol is satisfied, the number of normal symbol operation reserved balls is digested by one, and the normal symbol is processed. Judgment of suitability, judgment of pattern, judgment of variation pattern, setting of variation time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, a start port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this starting opening monitoring control process, the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 51 and the second starting opening 52 is monitored, and if there is a winning of the game ball, the number of reserved balls is updated, and the special symbol lottery is performed. Random number storage, pre-reading notice effect judgment, command request for the number of symbols stored, etc. are performed in order.

Next, a special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, according to the value of the special symbol game status, a special symbol variation start process (S420), a special symbol variation process (S430), which will be described in detail later. ), special symbol stop symbol display process (S440), and the like are executed.

Next, a special electric accessory control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the lottery result of the special symbol is "big win" or "minor win", as operation processing related to the special electric role product 542, the operation start and end of operation of the special electric role product 542 are set, The opening time and number of openings of the winning opening 54 are updated, the probability variation function is set to start operation, the variation time reduction function is set to start operation, the variation pattern selection state is set, and the like are executed in order.

Next, a special winning opening effective period setting process is executed (S67). In this big winning opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the big winning opening 54 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the big winning opening 54 are set as a result of this determination.

Next, a special symbol variation start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process, when there is a first special symbol or a second special symbol operation reserved ball, the number of reserved balls is digested by one, a command request for the number of symbols to be stored, and a judgment of whether the special symbol is appropriate or not. , determination of special symbols, determination of probability variation function, determination of time reduction function, setting of operation pattern of special electric role, setting of demonstration production time, etc. are performed in order.

Next, an abnormality detection process is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection process, based on the input information in the input process (S53), the magnetic detection signal from the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor, the door/frame opening signal, etc. are inspected in order. , determines whether the gaming machine is in an error state. If it is in an error state, an effect control command ("error effect designation command") including the error information is generated in order to request an error display to the effect control board 200. - 特許庁

Next, an entering ball passing time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball passing time abnormality detection process, when the ON signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or longer, the ball passing time abnormality is set, and a production control command ("error Effect designation command"), and a security signal output request for output to an external terminal.

Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display process, display data such as the number of times the special electric accessory 542 operates continuously (regular number of rounds), the number of operation pending balls of normal symbols and special symbols, etc. is created. In addition, display data for displaying the error state information detected in the abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

Next, LED output processing is executed (S72). In this LED output process, the special symbol control process (S65), in order to display the special symbol and the normal symbol, the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric accessory operates continuously, the error display, etc. The display data created by the abnormality detection process (S69), the game state display process (S71), etc. are displayed on the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, the normal symbol display device 75, the special symbol suspension lamps 73 and 74, and the normal symbol suspension. It outputs to the lamp 76, the status indicator lamp of the main control board 100, etc., and also initializes the display on these various display devices.

Next, a firing control signal output process is executed (S73). In this firing control signal output process, when a communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality is not detected, a firing permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 to allow the shooting of game balls. do. On the other hand, when an abnormality in communication with the payout control board 400 or a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a signal for prohibiting shooting is output to the payout control board 400 to prohibit shooting of game balls.

Next, a solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, in order to operate each electric role product 542, the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric role product control process (S66) are obtained. Based on the control data, an excitation signal is output to each electric accessory solenoid 623, 643.

Next, an effect control command transmission process is executed (S75). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command specified by the pointer is read out of the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage means 180 in the above process, and this effect control command is read out. A control command is transmitted to the effect control board 200 .

Next, external information output processing is executed (S76). In this external information output process, through the external information terminal board 600, game information related to the gaming machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer. The external information signals include, for example, prize ball signal, door frame open signal, magnetic sensor abnormality signal, disconnection short circuit power supply abnormality signal, abnormality sensor detection (ball passing time abnormality, etc.) signal, jackpot signal, consecutive game signal, There is a pattern confirmation signal and the like.

Next, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enabled state (S77). As a result, the main-control-side timer interrupt processing is terminated, the main-control-side main processing is resumed, and the main-control-side main processing is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

If the main control board 100 detects power failure (supply voltage drop based on a predetermined threshold value) during main control side main processing or interrupt processing, it generates a non-maskable interrupt and turns on the power failure confirmation flag. do. Then, after returning to the original process, the aforementioned power-off process (S26 to S32) is executed.

≪Winning monitoring process≫
Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing details of the winning monitoring process (S59).

First, a first start opening switch input process is executed (S101). In the first starter switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the first starter switch 511 has been input. When the detection signal from the first starting hole switch 511 is input, the first starting hole winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, it generates a first starting entry winning command and temporarily stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511, the processing proceeds directly to the next step.

Subsequently, a second starting port switch input process is executed (S102). In the second starting port switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 has been input. When the detection signal from the second starting hole switch 521 is input, the second starting hole winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting hole 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, it generates a second starting entry winning command and temporarily stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521, the process proceeds to the next step.

Next, an operation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the operation gate switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the operation gate switch 531 has been input. When the detection signal from the operating gate switch 531 is input, the operating gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed through the operating gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and the operating gate winning data is stored. A command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the operation gate switch 531, the process proceeds directly to the next step.

Subsequently, a big winning opening switch input process is executed (S104). In the big winning slot switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the big winning slot switch 541 is input. When the detection signal from the big winning slot switch 541 is input, the big winning slot winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the big winning slot 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180. , generates a special prize winning command and temporarily stores it in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the big winning opening switch 541, the process proceeds to the next step.

Subsequently, a left general winning opening switch process is executed (S105). In the left general winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the left general winning opening switch 611 is input. When the detection signal from the left general winning slot switch 611 is input, the left general winning slot winning data indicating that the game ball has entered one of the general winning slots 61 to 63 is stored as the winning data of the main information storage means 180. While temporarily storing in the storage area, a left general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storing area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the left general winning port switch 611, the current winning monitoring process is terminated.

Subsequently, a right general winning opening switch process is executed (S106). In the right general winning opening switch input process, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the right general winning opening switch 641 is input. When the detection signal from the right general winning slot switch 641 is input, the right general winning slot winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning slot 64 is temporarily stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a right general winning opening winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 . On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the right general winning port switch 641, the current winning monitoring process is terminated.

≪Special symbol game processing≫
Next, a series of processes related to the special symbol game in the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. The processing related to the special symbol game includes the above-described start port monitoring control processing (S64), special symbol control processing (S65), special electric accessory control processing (S66), special symbol variation start monitoring control processing (S68), and the like. is applicable.

(Starting gate monitoring control process)
First, the starting port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing the details of the starting port monitoring control process (S64).

First, it is determined whether or not winning of the game to the first starting port 51 is detected (S201). When the winning to the first starting port 51 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S202).

When the number of balls with the operation pending of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), the random number per special symbol, the random number per special symbol, the special symbol as the lottery random number relating to the first special symbol game. A variation pattern random number value is acquired, and each random number value is stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area (reservation n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 in accordance with the order of entry (S203). Then, as an update of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol, 1 is added to the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter (S204), and the winning check of the first start port 51 is finished.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not winning of the game to the second starting port 52 has been detected (S205). When the winning to the second starting port 52 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S206). When the number of balls with the second special symbol activated is less than 4 (S206: YES), the random number per special symbol, the random number per special symbol, the special symbol as the lottery random number relating to the second special symbol game. A variation pattern random number value is acquired, and each random number value is stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area (reservation n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the winning order (S207). Then, as an update of the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol, 1 is added to the value of the second special symbol pending ball number counter (S208), and the winning check of the second starting port 52 is finished.

Subsequently, whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been updated, that is, whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has been added in S204 or S208. (S209). If there is an update of the number of pending balls in operation (S209: YES), a symbol memory number command including information on the number of pending balls in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and stored in the main information storage means. 180 is stored in the command storage area (S210).

Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is the advance determination timing (S211). If it is the pre-determining timing (S211: YES), in order to generate pre-reading determination information based on various random numbers acquired at the time of the start-up winning, a special symbol hit random from the hit random number buffer (holding n storage area or register) Numerical values are read out, and preliminary judgment is performed (S212). Then, the pre-judgment command including the information of the pre-judgment result (pre-judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S213).

Also, a special per-symbol random number value is read out from the per-symbol random number buffer, and symbol pre-determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol pre-determination command including the information of this pre-determination result (symbol pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S215). Further, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer, and the variation pattern pre-determination is performed (S216). Then, a variation pattern pre-determination command including the information of this pre-determination result (variation pattern pre-determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S217).

(Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68).

In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68), the later-described special symbol variation start monitoring process is performed on the special symbol side that satisfies the variation start condition among the first special symbol and the second special symbol. (S310) is executed. In addition, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the fluctuation start condition, as described above, the process on the second special symbol side is preferentially executed.

First, it is determined whether it is during a big hit or a small hit (S301). Subsequently, whether both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are waiting for fluctuation, that is, whether the first special symbol game status and the second special symbol game status are both "00H (waiting for fluctuation)" It is determined whether or not (S302).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the number of pending balls in operation of the second special symbol is "0" (S303), and if the number of pending balls is not "0" (S303: NO), the second special Considering that the symbol fluctuation start condition is satisfied, after setting the address of the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table (the addresses of various tables used in subsequent processing and the address of the RAM storage area) (S304) , the second special symbol side special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310). That is, in the present embodiment, if there is an operation-reserving ball with the second special symbol, the operation-reserving ball with the second special symbol is given priority regardless of the presence or absence of the operation-reserving ball with the first special symbol. ready to be digested. The details of this special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is "0" (S303: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol is "0" (S305). . Here, if the number of pending balls is not "0" (S305: NO), it is considered that the condition for starting the fluctuation of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the address of the first special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table (hereinafter After setting the addresses of various tables and the address of the RAM storage area used in the process (S306), the process proceeds to the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) on the side of the first special symbol.

When the fluctuation start conditions for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not met (S301: YES, S302: NO, S305: YES), the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S310) is skipped. .

(Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309).

In this special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309), the first special symbol variation start monitoring table or the second special symbol variation start monitoring table set in the above S304 or S308 is referred to, and the current variation start is determined. The target special symbol side processing will be executed, but since the method of processing is common between the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for special cases, the first special symbol side It will be explained together without distinguishing whether it is a process or a process on the second special symbol side.

First, 1 is subtracted from the number of operation pending balls on the side of the special symbol that is the object of this fluctuation start (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of activated balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Next, access the special symbol reserved storage area on the side of the special symbol that is the target of this fluctuation start, and the special symbol per random number stored in the first reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area), special symbol per The symbol random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number are read in order, and these random values are used for special symbol validity determination processing (S320), symbol determination processing (S330), and variation pattern selection processing (S423), which will be described later. It is transferred to the special symbol suitability determination area, special symbol symbol determination area, special symbol variation pattern determination area, and special symbol variation addition pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S313). Further, to update the reservation storage area, the reservation ball information stored in the reservation 2 storage area to the reservation 4 storage area is shifted to the lower reservation storage area, and the reservation 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

Subsequently, a special symbol suitability determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol suitability determination process (S320), first, a special symbol suitability lottery table is obtained. At this time, when the game state is a special pattern probability variable state, a high probability win/loss lottery table is acquired, and when the game state is a normal state, a low probability win/fail lottery table is acquired. Next, the random number per special symbol is read out from the special symbol suitability determination area of the main information storage means 180 . Then, with reference to the special symbol success/fail lottery table, the special symbol success/failure determination is executed based on the special symbol per random number value. Also, a value corresponding to the result of winning/failing determination (big win data “55H”, small win data “33H”, loss data “00H”) is stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 .

Subsequently, a symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the design determination process (S330), the stop design of the special design and the character effect number (fluctuation addition design information) are determined according to the result of the success/failure determination. Then, the stop symbol (symbol group) of the special symbols determined this time and the character effect number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage means 180.例文帳に追加In addition, the character production number is the type of the determined stop pattern (design group) and the operating state of the probability variation function of the special design and the normal design (special design probability ON / special design probability OFF / normal design probability / It is determined based on the combination with 4 patterns of probability variation off of normal pattern). Incidentally, if the result of the hit/fail determination is no, the character effect number "0" is determined.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol corresponds to a big hit (S342). If the result of the special symbol suitability determination is a loss (S342: NO), the process proceeds to S351.

If the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is a big win (S342: YES), after the big win game is completed based on the type of symbol group (big win type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the big win. The probability variation frequency is determined as the number of times the special symbol probability variation function operates (S345). Further, based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330 and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of fluctuation time shortening times is calculated as the number of times the special symbol fluctuation time shortening function operates after the jackpot game ends. is determined (S346). Furthermore, based on the type of pattern group (jackpot type) determined in S330 and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the number of times of electric support is determined as the number of times the electric chewing support function operates after the jackpot game ends ( S347). The determination result (probability variation frequency, variation time reduction frequency, power support frequency) is stored in the time saving frequency storage area and the power support frequency storage area of the main information storage means 180 . Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group (jackpot type) determined in S330, the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542 during the jackpot game (round game) is set (S348). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542, the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, the opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the big winning opening 54 in each round, and the like are set.

Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330 and the current game state, a variation pattern selection state after the end of the big win game or after the small win game is set (S349). Subsequently, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330, the demonstration performance time (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) of the special game (big win game or small win game) is set (S350). Next, the special symbol validity determination area and the special symbol determination area of the main information storage means 180 used in the special symbol validity determination process (S320) and the symbol determination process (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status of the special symbol side to be changed this time is changed from "00H (waiting)" to "01H (variation start)" (S352).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing details of the special symbol control process (S65).

First, it is determined whether the special electric role product 542 is not in operation, that is, whether the special electric role product game status is "00H (hit waiting state)" (S401). Subsequently, when the special electric accessory 542 is not in operation (S401: YES), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol game status is "00H (waiting)" (S402).

If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (waiting)" (S402: YES), the second special symbol control table (used in subsequent processes) is used to execute the process related to the second special symbol Addresses of various tables and addresses of RAM storage areas) are set (S403), and the process proceeds to special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410). On the other hand, when the second special symbol game status is "00H (waiting)" (S402: NO), the first special symbol control table (in subsequent processes Addresses of various tables to be used and addresses of RAM storage areas) are set (S404), and the process proceeds to special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410).

In addition, in the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S410) described below, using the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above S403 or S404, special The process on the symbol side is executed, but since the method of processing is common between the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for special cases, is it the process on the first special symbol side? , It will be explained collectively without distinguishing whether it is the processing on the second special symbol side. The details of this special symbol control general-purpose process (S410) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol control general-purpose processing)
Subsequently, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S404, S407). Here, FIG. 43 is a flow chart showing details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407).

In this special symbol control general-purpose process (S404, S407), a branch process (S411 to S414) is executed for shifting to a process corresponding to the value of the special symbol game status ("01H", "02H", "03H"). do. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status of the special symbol side to be subject to this change is not 0 (S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether the special symbol game status is "01H (variation start)" (S412). When the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process proceeds to special symbol variation start processing (S420). The details of this special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the case of NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "02H (fluctuating)" (S413). When the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the process proceeds to special symbol fluctuation process (S430). The details of this special symbol fluctuation process (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the case of NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (stop symbol display)" (S414). When the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to special symbol stop symbol display process (S440). The details of this special symbol stop symbol display process (S440) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol variation start process)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described. FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

First, a special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the results of the lottery and the selection state of variation patterns (S421). Subsequently, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read out from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 (S422). Then, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table, one of the plurality of variation patterns is selected based on the special symbol variation pattern random number value (S423).

Next, the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as a setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbols, the fluctuation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and a variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S426). As the variation start command, a communication inspection command, a variation additional pattern information designation command, a variation pattern designation command, and a design designation command are sequentially generated in order to start the design variation performance in the performance display device 70, and stored in the main information storage means. 180 command storage area.

Subsequently, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180 used for determining the variation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "01H (fluctuation start)" to "02H (fluctuation)" (S428).

(Processing during special symbol fluctuation)
Next, the process during special symbol fluctuation (S430) will be described. FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing the details of the special symbol changing process (S430).

First, in order to perform variable display of special symbols, a special symbol display pattern number switching process is executed (S431). In this display pattern number switching process (S431), the display pattern number data of the special symbol is generated every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to display the special symbols in a variable display or fixed display.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has become "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the special symbol variation time has ended (S432). When the special symbol fluctuation time has ended (S432: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 is set (S433). Subsequently, a variation stop command is generated for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative symbols, and this command is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S434).

Next, "500 (ms)" is stored in the special symbol game timer as the fixed display time (S435). It should be noted that the "determined display time" is the time during which the stop symbol is definitely stopped and displayed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (varying)" to "03H (stop symbol displayed)" (S436).

(Special symbol stop symbol display process)
Next, the processing during special symbol stop symbol display (S440) will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol stop symbol display process (S440).

First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game timer has reached "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the fixed display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). Here, when the fixed display time of the special symbol is over (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (displaying the stopped symbol)" to "00H (waiting)" (S442).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the winning determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage means 180 is the big hit data "55H" (S443). If the success/failure determination data is big hit data (S443: YES), stop the operation of the special symbol probability variation function (S444), stop the operation of the special symbol variation time reduction function (S445), and operate the electric chew support function. stop (S446), and so on. Specifically, the variable probability flag is set to "00H (OFF)", and the probability variation counter, the variation time reduction counter, and the easy-to-ball state counter are set to "00H" and cleared to zero.

Next, as a special game start demonstration setting process, the start demonstration display time is set, and an effect control command (jackpot start demo command) for instructing the start of the start demo effect is generated (S447). Subsequently, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state count counter) is cleared to zero (S448). Also, the special electric role product game status is changed from "00H (hit waiting state)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, "00H" is set to clear the contents of the success/failure determination flag (S450).

On the other hand, when the success/failure determination data is not the big hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451). If the special symbol probability variation function is in operation (S451: YES), 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number counter of the main information storage means 180 as the number of variations of the special symbol this time (step S452). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the probability variation counter is zero (step S453). When the probability variation counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the special symbol probability variation function is stopped (S454). If the probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), skip S454 and proceed to S455.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455). When the special symbol variation time shortening function is in operation (S455: YES), 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number counter of the main information storage means 180 as the number of variations of the special symbol this time (step S456). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time reduction number counter is zero (step S457). When the variable time reduction frequency counter is zero (S457: YES), the operation of the special symbol variable time reduction function is stopped (S458), assuming that the number of times the special symbol time saving state has ended has been reached. If the post-subtraction fluctuation time reduction counter is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

Next, it is determined whether or not the electric chewing support function is in operation (S459). When the electric chewing support function is in operation (S459: YES), 1 is subtracted from the electric support number counter of the main information storage means 180 as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol of this time (step S460). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the electric support number counter is zero (step S461). When the electric support number counter is zero (S461: YES), the operation of the electric chew support function is stopped (S462), assuming that the number of ending times of the easy-ball-entering state has been reached. When the electric support number counter after the subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

Next, 1 is subtracted from the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage means 180 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, referring to the variation pattern selection state count counter of the main information storage means 180, it is determined whether the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached the preset end count, and the end count If it has reached, it switches to the next specified variation pattern selection state. On the other hand, if the end count has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

Then, to generate a production control command (game state designation command) containing the current game state information and the variation pattern selection state information updated in the above-mentioned S451-S464, this command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S465). Incidentally, on the side of the effect control board 200, setting and updating of the effect mode are executed based on the information of the game state designation command.

(Special electric accessories control process)
Next, the special electric accessary product control process (S66) will be described. 47 and 48 are flowcharts showing the details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

First, it is determined whether or not the special electric role product game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). When the special electric role product game status is "01H" (S501: YES), the special game process is executed in subsequent processes. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is in operation (S502). If the special electric role product 542 is not operating (S502: NO), it is determined whether or not it is time to start the operation of the special electric role product 542 (S503). The operation start time of the special electric role product 542 is the timing of starting the operation of the special electric role product 542 in each round game.

When it is time to start the operation of the special electric accessory 542 (S503: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this command is stored in the main information storage means 180. store in the area (S504). On the side of the effect control board 200, based on the information of this round effect designation command (information such as the current number of rounds), a round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game is executed. Then, the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started (S505), and the processing of S506 to S510 is executed as the processing during the operation of the special electric accessory 542.

As a process during the operation of the special electric role product 542, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning hole 54 by a prescribed count number (maximum number of winning prizes) (S506), and the operation time of the special electric role product 542 It is determined whether or not the (opening time) has elapsed (S507). At this time, when the game balls enter the big winning opening 54 by a prescribed count number (maximum winning number) (S506: YES) or when the operation time of the special electric accessory 542 has passed (S507: YES), a special The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S508). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached a predetermined number of rounds (S509). If the number of continuous operations has not reached the specified number of rounds (S509: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 is incremented by one (S510).

On the other hand, when the number of times of continuous operation of the special electric accessory 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S509: YES), the process proceeds to S511, and the end demonstration display time is set as special game hit end demonstration setting processing. At the same time, an effect control command (jackpot end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demonstration effect is generated (S511).

Subsequently, the variation time reduction frequency information set in S346 is stored in the variation time reduction frequency counter (S512). In addition, the information on the number of times of power support set in S347 is stored in the power support number counter (S513).

Subsequently, referring to the content of the probability variation determination flag set in S343, it is determined whether or not the operation of the conditional device is an operation based on a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) (S514). If the condition device is operated by a specific symbol (S514: YES), the probability variation frequency (activation time data) set in S345 is stored in the probability variation frequency counter of the main information storage means 180, and the special symbol is stored. start the operation of the probability variation function (S515). On the other hand, if the condition device is not activated by the specific symbol (S514: NO), the non-activated data "00H" is stored in the probability variation number counter, and S515 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variable time reduction frequency information stored in the time reduction counter is variable time reduction function activation data (data other than "00H") (S516). When it is the variable time shortening function operation data (S516: YES), the operation of the special symbol variable time shortening function is started (S517). On the other hand, if it is not the variable time reduction function actuation data (S516: NO), S517 is skipped.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the electric support number information stored in the electric support number counter is electric chew support function activation data (data other than "00H") (S518). If it is the electric chewing support function activation data (S518: YES), the electric chewing support function is started to operate (S519-S521). That is, the start of operation of the normal symbol probability variation function (S519), the start of operation of the normal symbol variation time reduction function (S520), and the start of operation of the normal electric accessary 522 open extension function (S521) are executed in this order. On the other hand, if it is not electric chewing support function activation data, S519 to S521 are skipped.

Next, it switches to the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S522). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in S512 to S522 described above is generated, and stored in the main information storage means 180. Store in the command storage area (S523). On the side of the effect control board 200, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of this game state specifying command. Then, the special electric role product game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (hit waiting state)" (S524).

<Processing on the production control board side>
Next, the procedure of operation processing in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 49 to 55. FIG. The processing on the production control board 200 side includes reset start processing (including production control side main processing) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset, such as after turning on the power, and production control side timer interrupt that is started at regular intervals. Processing, reception interrupt processing of the production control command started due to the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and the lamp started with the arrival of the predetermined generation time specified in the time schedule of the variable production pattern It includes an effect interrupt process and an image control command transmission interrupt process that is activated at regular intervals.

Each interrupt process (exception process) is set with a priority level indicating the priority when multiple interrupt processes occur. In this example, "reset start processing due to power reset: top priority", "reset start processing due to various abnormalities: top priority" → "effect control command reception interrupt processing: level 7" → "WDT (runaway detection) Priority levels are ranked in the order of reset start processing: level 3”→“image control command transmission interrupt processing: level 2”→“effect control side timer interrupt processing: level 1”. The "reset start process due to various abnormalities" is, for example, when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an illegal command, when the sub-main CPU 201 attempts to access an illegal area or an illegal method, DMA (Direct Memory Access) Starts when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, the multiple types of interrupt processing described above are exemplified, but actually there are other types of interrupt processing.

In the effect control side main process, basically, the process proceeds after setting to either a state of prohibition of all interrupts or prohibition of interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt. On top of that, when the effect control side main process is in an interrupt permitted state, each interrupt process is started in such a manner as to interrupt the main process. In each interrupt process, when there is a request for another interrupt process (multiple interrupts occur) while the interrupt process is being executed, in principle, if the interrupt process has a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed, While the interrupt request is permitted during execution, the interrupt request is prohibited if the interrupt process has a lower priority level than the interrupt process being executed or has the same priority level. That is, each interrupt process proceeds while other interrupts of the same or lower priority level are prohibited. Then, from each interrupt process to the effect control side main process, it returns in a state where all interrupts are permitted. In addition, the priority (priority level) of such an interrupt factor is prescribed|regulated by the register setting of the production|presentation control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<Reset start processing>
First, reset start processing of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing reset start processing of the effect control board 200. FIG. This reset start process is started by any one of reset when power is turned on, reset caused by various abnormalities, and reset caused by WDT (runaway detection), and after security check of the sub-main CPU 201 , the program is started, and the processing after S601 is started.

First, as an initial setting required when power is turned on, the top address is set in the stack pointer as the initial value of the stack area (S601). All interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

Subsequently, as basic hardware settings, an initial value is set in an internal register provided in the sub-main CPU 201, and the I/O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Furthermore, the memory area in RAM203 of production control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, variables with initial values are set to initial values, and variables without initial values are initialized by 0 clearing. Also, the sub-main CPU 201 develops the control program stored in the ROM 202 in the RAM 203 as appropriate.

Subsequently, interruptions other than reception interruption processing of the effect control command are prohibited (S605). Next, a process of setting the type of error that should be valid for the model among the various errors set in advance common to each model is performed (S606). Further, a light-off request is made in order to put all the effect lamps LP (the frame lamp 10 and the board lamp 80) into the light-off state (S607). Then, a watchdog timer is activated to monitor runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

Subsequently, an effect control side main process is executed as a main process of the game effect (S609). Details of this effect control side main process (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. It should be noted that when the transition to the effect control side main processing in S609, it is usually impossible to return from the main processing to the reset start processing, but by any chance due to the occurrence of a program bug, etc., if it returns to this processing , it transitions to a low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which power consumption is reduced compared to normal operation.

《Production control side main processing》
Next, the effect control side main processing (S609) of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing the effect control side main process (S609).

First, an address (head address where the program is developed) for starting a check as to whether or not the control program is correctly developed in the RAM 203 is obtained in the effect control side main processing (S611). Subsequently, all interrupts are permitted (activation of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

Then, the device initialization operation is performed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the power of the pachinko game machine PM is turned on (at the start of resetting). It is executed for the purpose of confirming the location information required for Incidentally, at the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory 24 returns to a preset initial position (reference position).

Subsequently, the watchdog timer is cleared to restart it (S614). At this time, when the sub-main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, a predetermined clear word is written in the WDT clear register of the sub-main CPU 201 within a preset time-out period, thereby starting the watchdog timer. Cleared and restarted. On the other hand, if the watchdog timer times out, a user reset will occur.

Subsequently, input port check processing is executed (S615). In this input port check process, the reading of the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input/output process S912 in the timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is monitored each time an interrupt occurs, and monitoring is performed multiple times (for example, four times). If the input port states are all "1", the signal level is "1 (H level)"; if all are "0", the signal level is "0 (L level)"; otherwise, the signal level is Do not change (this establishes the input signal).

Subsequently, an error effect management process is executed (S616). In this error effect management process, error effects by various devices are started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Furthermore, in the error effect management process, an initial value (error effect time) is set in the error management timer to manage the progress of the error effect. This error management timer is subtracted and updated in a cycle of 16ms in the error management timer update process (S920) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. Then, when the error management timer times out, the error presentation is terminated.

Subsequently, effect button monitoring control processing is executed (S617). In this performance button monitoring control process, when the button announcement performance is incorporated during the fluctuation fluctuation of the pattern, the input state of the performance button 15 is monitored within a predetermined operation valid time, and information on the input state of the performance button 15 is obtained. hold.

Subsequently, a notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this advance notice lottery management process, a notice effect pattern that defines the content of the notice effect that occurs at each stage of the variation process of the decorative symbols is selected in accordance with the scenario of the change effect pattern selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). Determined by lottery. The notice effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 . Also, an image control command for designating this notice effect pattern number to the image control board 300 side is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 . At this time, when the character object announcement effect pattern is selected as the announcement effect pattern, a character object request is generated, and the driving pattern of the movable object 24 is specified in the subsequent device management processing (S619). . In addition, in this example, all of the multiple types of notice effects (prediction effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative pattern are not drawn in one main loop process, but the main loop processing efficiency is improved. In order to do so, it is configured to draw lots across a plurality of main loop processes, divided for each occurrence time of the notice effect (for example, fluctuation start stage, ready-to-win occurrence stage, fluctuation stop stage). At that time, for the notice effect that occurs at the start stage of the decorative pattern fluctuation, it is necessary to synchronize with the start of the decorative pattern fluctuation (immediately transmit the image control command). It is supposed to be done.

Next, device management processing is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) for various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, multiple types of pattern data (lamp pattern, driving pattern) stored in the ROM 203 ), the pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, role announcement effect number) is specified, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, lamp data associated with each frame time (time required to update an image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In this example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for drawing processing of one frame when the effect display device 70 draws at approximately 60 frames per second (=approximately 60 fps). Similarly, in the driving pattern data of the movable accessory 24, driving data associated with each interrupt period (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control side timer interrupt processing described later, and the target device starts operating. On the other hand, in the effect control side timer interrupt processing described later, when the output of a series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is all completed, the effect lamp LP is extinguished, or the operation of the movable accessory 24 is stopped. , to end control of the target device.

Subsequently, command analysis processing (S620) is executed. In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not an effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the effect control command is stored, the command is read, and the read effect control command is read. To execute the effect control processing corresponding to the type of. The details of this command analysis process (S620) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, during the current loop processing, it is determined whether or not command analysis (analysis of the effect control command) has been executed (S621). If the command has just been analyzed (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and proceeds to the next loop process. On the other hand, if command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), that is, if the command buffer is empty, effect lottery random number update processing is executed until a predetermined time elapses (S622). In this embodiment, the predetermined time is set to "16 ms", which is half the minimum unit (32 ms) of the lamp LP switching control. In this effect lottery random number update process, various effect lottery random numbers such as a look-ahead notice lottery random number, a decoration pattern random number, a variable effect pattern random number, and a notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical value of each random number counter, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis processing (S622) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing details of the command analysis process (S622). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command is monitored. Execute control processing.

First, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of transitioning the effect mode is executed based on the game state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S633). Here, the hold-related commands include a pattern storage number command and a pre-determination command. If this hold-related command is stored (S633: YES), the process proceeds to hold information management processing (S634). In this pending information management process (S634), the pattern storage number command or the preliminary determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, and prefetch determination is executed based on the information of the preliminary determination result. A process for updating the display number and display mode (display color, etc.) of the pending images displayed on the display unit 710 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not a symbol variation-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related commands include a variation start command and a variation stop command. When the symbol variation-related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to the variation performance content determination process (S636). In this variation performance content determination process (S636), when the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, a process for starting the variation performance of the decorative symbols is executed, and the received symbol variation related command stops varying. If it is a command, a process for terminating the variable performance of decorative symbols is executed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a command related to the big hit effect is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S637). Here, the big-win effect-related commands include a big-win start demonstration effect command, a round effect designation command, and a big-win end demonstration effect command. When the big hit effect related command is stored (step S637: YES), the procedure goes to the big hit effect content determination process (S638). In this jackpot effect content determination process (S638), a process for executing a start demonstration effect, a round effect, and an end demo effect is performed.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a command related to a small hit effect is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S639). Here, the small-hit performance-related commands include a small-hit start demonstration performance command and a small-hit end demonstration performance command. When the small hit production related command is stored (step S639: YES), the process proceeds to the small hit production content determination process (S640). In this small-hit performance content determination processing (S640), processing for executing a small-hit start demonstration performance and a small-hit end demonstration performance is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not a command related to winning a prize is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S641). Here, the commands related to the winning opening include the first starting opening winning command, the second starting opening winning command, the operating gate winning command, the large winning opening winning command, the left general winning opening winning command, and the right general winning opening winning command. etc. When this winning mouth winning related command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to the winning effect content determination process (S642). The details of this winning effect content determination process (S642) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not an error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S643). If this error effect designation command is stored (S643: YES), the process proceeds to error effect content determination processing (S644). In this error effect content determination process (S644), an error effect designation command is read out from the sub-information storage means 280, and the error state is notified by the image display of the liquid crystal display device 70, lighting of the effect lamp LP, sound of the speaker 11, and the like. determine the error rendering pattern for

In addition, when the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub-information storage means 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO, S643: NO) does nothing and terminates the command parsing process.

(Processing for determining contents of winning effect)
Next, the winning effect content determination process (S642) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing the details of the winning effect content determination process (S642).

First, a first start opening prize effect control process is executed (S701). In this first starting opening winning effect control process (S701), it is determined whether or not the first starting opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the first starting opening winning command is determined. If it is stored, a first start opening winning performance for notifying that the game ball has entered the first start opening 51 is executed on condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied.

Subsequently, a second start opening winning effect control process is executed (S702). In this second starting opening winning effect control process (S702), it is determined whether or not the second starting opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the second starting opening winning command is determined. If it is stored, a second start opening winning performance for notifying that the game ball has entered the second start opening 52 is executed on condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied.

Subsequently, an operation gate winning effect control process is executed (S703). In this operating gate winning effect control process (S703), it is determined whether or not an operating gate winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. If the operating gate winning command is stored, Under the condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied, an operating gate winning performance for notifying that the game ball has passed through the operating gate 53 is executed.

Subsequently, a big winning opening winning effect control process is executed (S704). In this big winning mouth winning effect control process (S704), it is determined whether or not a big winning mouth winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and if the big winning mouth winning command is stored. If so, on the condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied, a big winning opening winning performance for notifying that the game ball has entered the big winning opening 54 is executed.

Subsequently, left general winning opening winning effect control processing is executed (S705). In this left general winning opening winning effect control processing (S705), it is determined whether or not a left general winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the left general winning opening winning command is determined. If it is stored, on the condition that a predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied, a left general winning hole winning performance for informing that a game ball has entered one of the general winning holes 61 to 63 is executed. .

Subsequently, right general winning opening winning effect control processing is executed (S706). In this right general winning opening winning effect control processing (S706), it is determined whether or not a right general winning opening winning command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260, and the right general winning opening winning command is determined. If it is stored, the right general prize winning performance for notifying that the game ball has entered the general winning port 64 is executed on the condition that the predetermined performance execution condition is satisfied.

<<Interrupt processing for receiving production control commands>>
Next, reception interruption processing of the production control command will be described. FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing reception interrupt processing of the effect control command. In this effect control command reception interrupt process, as described above, an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It's like The effect control command is configured to include 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and is transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in the order of MODE data and EVENT data. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the MODE data will also be referred to as the "first command", and the EVENT data will also be referred to as the "second command".

First, when an interrupt occurs based on the strobe signal from the main control board 100, it is determined whether or not the input value of the effect control command has been determined (S901). Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and the input value is determined when the same value is read twice in succession. This is because the reading of the performance control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not determined until the same value is read twice in succession.

Subsequently, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether it is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). If the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is obtained from the effect lottery random number generating means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S904). In addition, the timing of obtaining the effect lottery random number is set at the time of receiving the effect control command, because the effect control command is sent at physically irregular timing such as when the game ball starts winning a prize or when the special symbol starts to fluctuate. Therefore, by using this as a trigger, it is possible to prevent periodicity from appearing in the acquisition timing. By making the acquisition timing of the effect lottery random numbers irregular in this way, inconveniences such as unnaturally repeated selection of the same effect are less likely to occur even in various kinds of effect lotteries.

On the other hand, if the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether or not the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the effect control commands are received in the order of the first command (MODE) and the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether or not there is a contradiction in the combination of the effect control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is obtained (S906). Subsequently, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage means 260 according to the address indicated by the write pointer (S907). The stored command data is read in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of the effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the production control command reception interrupt processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the original processing before the interruption.

《Production control side timer interrupt processing》
Next, the effect control side timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing effect control side timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse at regular time intervals, and is executed in the form of interrupting the above-described effect control side main process.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processes after S911 are sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher, such as effect control command reception interrupts from the main control board 100 and watchdog timer interrupts, are permitted (S911).

Subsequently, port input/output processing is executed (S912). In this port input/output processing, input processing and output processing of port data in the I/O port circuit 204 are performed. In the input process, various signals input to the I/O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage means 260 are read out and output from the I/O port circuit 204 (output port).

Subsequently, device control data output processing is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined period of time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. FIG. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I/O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output process, the drive data is switched at each interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

Next, a production timer update process is executed (S914). In this production timer update process, the values of various production timers used for production operation control are subtracted and updated by an interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). The production timer includes a timer for managing the fluctuation time of the decorative pattern, a timer for managing the generation timing of the advance notice production, and the like. This performance timer manages the time schedule in the variable performance pattern, and time management such as the driving timing of the movable accessory 24 and the lighting timing of the performance lamp LP is performed on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S917) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

Subsequently, button control timer update processing is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the operation effective time of the production button 15 is subtracted and updated by each interrupt period (1 ms in this embodiment). It should be noted that the valid operation time is the time during which the operation input of the production button 15 is valid.

Subsequently, task control counter update processing is executed (S916). In this task control counter update process, the task counter value (“0” to “15”) is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the value of the task counter becomes "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can have a cycle period of 16 ms. Various tasks (task processing) are assigned according to the value of the task counter updated this time. Each process such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring process in S9189) and an error management task (error management timer update process in S919) is executed. In this example, one of the task counter values (“0” to “15”) is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values separated by 8 ms from each other) are used for runaway monitoring. task, and another value is assigned to the error management task (description of the other tasks is omitted). As described above, the reason why the cycle cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms is to match the minimum unit (16 ms) of switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, realizing synchronization between the image effect and the lamp effect.

Subsequently, lamp data update processing is executed (S917). In this lamp data update process, lamp data for a predetermined time is read out from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621) or the like and set. The lamp data set in this process is data indicating lighting control for 16 ms, which is the minimum unit of switching control of the effect lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. This lamp data output processing is configured as serial communication interrupt processing, and is realized by sequentially writing the lamp data to the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data in the transmission buffer in 1-byte units, and outputs the data to the lamp connection board 91 bit by bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, whereby all lamp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in this lamp data update process, the lamp data is switched every one frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and this lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer.

Subsequently, image CPU runaway monitoring processing is executed (S918). In this image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and if the toggle signal does not change continuously for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 is running out of control, and a reset signal is transmitted from the performance control board 200 to the image control board 300. - 特許庁As a result, the image control board 300 executes a predetermined reset process when the sub-sub CPU 301 is reset. Note that the toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level/L level are alternately repeated every frame time.

Next, error management timer processing is executed (S919). In this error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S616) is subtracted and updated. Then, after setting all interrupts to a permitted state and restoring the contents of the saved register, the effect control side timer interrupt processing is terminated, and the original processing before the occurrence of the interrupt is performed.

<<Transmission interrupt processing for image control commands>>
Next, the image control command transmission interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing image control command transmission interrupt processing. This image control command transmission interrupt process occurs at predetermined intervals (500 μs).

In this image control command transmission interrupt processing, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260 is checked (S931). Subsequently, a read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether or not an image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer, and if the read pointer and the write pointer match, it means that the image control command is not stored. If the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area indicated by the read pointer (S934). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted to the image control board 300 from the serial port. Next, the command data (the command data transmitted at S935) is cleared (S936). Subsequently, the read pointer is incremented by 1 and updated (S937). Then, the image control command transmission interruption process is ended, and the original process before the interruption is resumed.

As described above, the main effects achieved in this embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 54 in excess of the specified count number during execution of a special game, an over winning effect is executed, and an over winning is achieved. By clearly notifying the player of what has happened, the player's sense of satisfaction and exhilaration in being able to enjoy a special benefit that cannot be obtained under normal circumstances can be heightened, and as a result, the interest in the game can be enhanced. It is possible to improve the performance.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 54 during the execution of a special game, a big winning hole winning effect (over winning effect) is performed, and a game ball enters the general winning hole 64. By performing a general prize winning performance (bonus winning performance) with the entry of a ball as an opportunity, there is a tension between the big winning mouth winning performance and the general winning mouth winning performance performed during the execution of the special game. Thus, the monotony of the performance during the big win can be eliminated, and as a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning hole 64 during execution of a special game, the general winning hole winning effect (bonus winning effect) is performed, so that the big winning hole 54 is opened. It is possible to prevent the player from being only interested in advancing the game aiming at it, so that the player can enjoy the fun of aiming at the general prize winning opening 64, and the player can actively play the game. It can be expected to increase the chances of hitting the ball into the general prize-winning hole 64, heighten the gambling spirit of the player, and make the game more interesting, resulting in the amusement of the game. can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, by appropriately setting the execution time of the big winning mouth count-up effect in relation to the jackpot end demonstration period and the interval period, the timing of performing the big winning mouth count-up effect and the large winning mouth count-up effect can be adjusted. Regardless of the number of consecutive times of the winning mouth count-up effect, etc., this big winning mouth count-up effect can be completed appropriately without delaying it more than necessary, so that it is possible to separate the round games before and after, and the special game. It is possible to prevent players from misunderstanding the current game situation by clearly demarcating it from the variable display after the end of the special game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes. In particular, by configuring the total execution time of the big winning mouth count-up effect for the prescribed count number to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration, a plurality of Even if the large winning opening count-up effect is continuously performed a plurality of times based on the game balls entering the big winning opening continuously, the big winning opening count-up effect will not be performed during the jackpot end demonstration period. will be completed. Therefore, the big winning mouth count-up effect is not performed over the period of the big win end demonstration period and until the variable display after the special game ends, and the special game is ended and the variable display of the first rotation is started. It is possible to clarify the separation.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the conditions for executing the subsequent large winning opening count-up effect are met during the execution of the previous large winning opening count-up effect, the previous large winning opening count-up effect is executed. By starting the execution of the big winning mouth count-up performance after the end, it is possible to prevent the processing of the count performance from becoming complicated, and the separation of the big winning mouth count-up performance of the next and subsequent two times is made. By making it clear, the count-up display of the accumulated number of prize balls does not become difficult for the player to see, and the player feels satisfied with the state that the number of accumulated prize balls increases one after another at a good tempo on the screen. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the cumulative number of winning balls reaches a specific value due to the occurrence of an over-winning, and an emphatic effect is performed, or when an over-winning occurs in a situation where an emphatic effect is being performed. By executing this emphasized effect and the over-winning effect redundantly, there is an irregular timing in which the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific number, and an irregular timing in which an over-winning occurs. Since it is possible to clearly notify the player by the appearance of both effects that it is a rare special situation where It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when an over winning or a bonus winning occurs in a situation where a specific error with a relatively high priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game occurs By limiting the execution of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect, the occurrence of a serious error in the game machine is not overlooked. On the other hand, if an over-win or a bonus win occurs in a situation where an unspecified error with a relatively low priority (importance) that prohibits or makes it difficult to continue the game occurs, an over-win effect And even if the execution of the bonus winning effect is permitted, no particular harm will occur, and if the over winning effect is hindered by the error notification effect, the player's willingness to play may be reduced. I am planning to run In this way, by appropriately notifying the occurrence of the error and the occurrence of the over-winning according to the type of the error that has occurred in the gaming machine, the player's desire to play the game is prevented without excessively hindering the occurrence of the over-winning effect. can be maintained, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when the continuous game continues, the cumulative number of prize balls is displayed not only during the execution of the special game but also in the electric power support state after the special game is finished. To improve the operating rate of a game machine by expecting a player to proceed with a game while expecting to further extend the accumulated number of winning balls in a game, further increasing the player's desire for the occurrence of a big win. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the special game, when the game ball enters the general winning hole 64 arranged in the right side area PA2, the bonus winning effect is executed, while the left side area PA1 is executed. By configuring so that the bonus prize winning effect is not executed even if the game ball enters the general prize winning ports 61 to 63 arranged in the above, the bonus prize winning effect occurs recklessly, and the bonus prize winning effect is rather monotonous. To further enhance the joy of winning a prize in a general prize winning port 64 incidentally generated as a result of hitting a game ball aiming at winning a prize in a special prize winning port 54.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when over winning and bonus winning occur substantially simultaneously during the execution of the special game, the over winning effect and the bonus winning effect are performed in duplicate, so that the player can enter the big winning port 54. Since the player can be clearly notified of both the over winning and the bonus winning that occur incidentally as a result of playing the game aiming at the entry of the game ball, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the special game. It is possible to prevent the performance during the big win from becoming monotonous, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, while limiting the execution of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect during the jackpot end demonstration period, the execution of the over winning effect or the bonus winning effect during the interval period immediately after the final round game. By permitting , one of the prize winning effects (over winning effect or bonus winning effect) occurs in an interruptive manner despite the notification that the special game will end during the execution of the jackpot ending demonstration. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game performance from being lacking a sense of unity as a whole, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of bonus prizes are won within a predetermined period of time during the special game, execution of the bonus prize effect is permitted a plurality of times, while a predetermined number of bonus prizes during the special game are allowed. If multiple over-wins occur within the period, only the over-wins effect corresponding to the first over-wins among the multiple over-wins is executed.
It is possible to prevent the excessive prize winning performance from occurring recklessly and rather to prevent the over winning performance from becoming monotonous (getting into a rut), and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the winning ball signal can be output once when one game ball enters the general winning hole 64, but one game ball enters the big winning hole 54. By configuring so that the prize ball signal can be output twice, the operating status of the gaming machine can be properly managed by the hall computer, and the true operating status of the gaming machine can be displayed by the data display. The information can be notified to the player and used as information for judging the selection of the game machine or as reference information for the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the cumulative number of prize balls is notified by numerical information (for example, "1000pt"). It may be configured to notify by

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the count-up effects for the cumulative number of winning balls in the consecutive game (large winning opening count-up effects, general winning opening count-up effects) have been exemplified and explained, but the configuration is not limited to this. Instead, even if the above characteristic configuration is applied to the count-up effect (large winning hole count-up effect, general winning hole count-up effect) for the cumulative number of prize balls (the number of prize balls during the jackpot) during execution of one big win game. Similar effects can be obtained.

[Second embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted, and mainly the different parts will be described. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment will be described in order. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment adopts a small hit RUSH in which a "small hit" frequently occurs as a result of the success/failure determination of the special symbol when the game state is the latent probability variable game state. The playability of this small hit RUSH will be described later.

The propriety determination of the special symbol in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram schematically showing the special symbol success/failure lottery table of the second embodiment. In the figure, (A) is referred to in the gaming state (low probability state) where the special symbol probability variation function is not operating, (B) is the special symbol probability variation function operating (high probability state ). In this special symbol success/failure lottery table, the random number range of the special symbol per random value and the result of success/failure determination (big win, small win, loss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 56, when the special symbol probability variation function is not operating in the special symbol propriety determination (low probability state), the random number per special symbol is in the range of "0 to 204". If it corresponds to the above, it will be a big hit, and if the game state (high probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is operating, the special symbol random number value will be a big hit if it falls within the range of "0 to 818". becomes. That is, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the winning probability of the big win varies from the low probability "1/320" to the high probability "1/80". In this way, the winning probability of the big win changes according to the game state, but the winning probability of the big win is designed to be equal between the winning judgment of the first special symbol and the winning judgment of the second special symbol. Here, even if the result of the hit/fail judgment does not correspond to the big hit, the hit/fail judgment of the second special symbol wins the small hit with a relatively high probability of "1/1.1". The winning probability of the small hit is designed to be the same winning probability regardless of the game state (low probability state, high probability state). In this second embodiment, a small hit is set only for the success/failure determination of the second special symbol. It may also be configured so that the winning judgment of the second special symbol wins a small hit with a higher probability.

In the second embodiment, one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined to be a big hit, and while the special symbol is being variably displayed (during the variability display of the big win), the other When the success/failure determination of the special symbol is executed, it is prohibited to derive a big hit as a result of the success/failure determination of the other special symbol, and only a small hit or a loss is derived. When the result of the judgment of whether or not the other special symbol corresponds to a big hit, the result of the judgment of whether or not it is a big hit is forcibly replaced with a deviation from the big hit. In other words, in the above special symbol success/fail lottery table, when the game state (low probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is not operating, the random number value per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 204". In the case, the result of the applicable or not determination is forced to lose (replaced from the big hit), and when the game state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is operating, the special symbol hit disorder When the numerical value falls within the range of "0 to 818", the result of the applicable/non-applicability determination is forcibly lost (the jackpot is replaced with the lost). As a modification thereof, in addition to the above-mentioned special symbol success/failure lottery table, a table for big hit non-lottery that does not include a big hit determination value (random number range) as a result of the special symbol success/failure determination is prepared. During the variable display of the special symbol jackpot, a table dedicated to the non-jackpot lottery process is referred to instead of the above-mentioned special symbol win/loss lottery table, and a small win lottery is performed in which the result of the win/loss determination is only a small win or a loss. method may be adopted. In addition, in this modified example, as long as it is a specification in which a small hit is not set as a result of the success/failure determination, a method of immediately determining a loss may be adopted without performing the success/failure determination.

Subsequently, the jackpot type (jackpot breakdown) of the second embodiment will be described. In this second embodiment, when the result of the judgment of whether the special symbol is a "big hit", the special symbol big hit symbol table shown in FIG.

FIG. 57(A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, a symbol group, a jackpot type, a specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and an opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning port 54 in each round are provided for the symbol random number per special symbol. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for the sake of convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, four types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is distributed to a 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), a 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), a 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and a 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D). In the 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. The 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D) have a prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game of 4 rounds, and a big win in one round game. The opening time (maximum opening time) of the mouth 54 is 28 seconds.

FIG. 57(B) is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, there are a symbol group, a jackpot type, a specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and an opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning port 54 in each round for the special symbol per symbol random number. They are associated with each other (in this example, the description of the stop symbol is omitted for the sake of convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, five types of jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E), 6R specific jackpot (symbol group F), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H), and 2R normal jackpot (symbol group I). In the 10R specific jackpot (symbol group E), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. In the 6R specific jackpot (symbol group F), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G) and 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H) have four rounds as the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the big winning port 54 in one round game ) is 28 seconds. In the 2R normal jackpot (symbol group I), the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 2 rounds, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the jackpot 54 in one round game is 2 seconds.

Of the various types of jackpots, each jackpot except for the 2R normal jackpot is a trigger for executing a long-open round game in which the jackpot 54 is opened for a long time (28 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. On the other hand, the 2R normal jackpot is a jackpot that triggers execution of a short opening round game in which the jackpot 54 is opened for a short time (2 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the long opening round game is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening 54 is set so that a specified number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls can be entered into the big winning opening 54 or can be easily entered. It is a game. A short-open round game is a round game in which the opening time of the big winning hole 54 is set such that a prescribed number (full count: 15 balls) of game balls cannot be entered into the big winning hole 54 or difficult to enter.

It should be noted that, although not shown in the drawings, if the result of the determination of the suitability of the second special symbol is a small hit, one small winning pattern (symbol group) is selected from a plurality of types of small winning patterns (symbol group), and the second special pattern is selected. At the end of the variable display of the 2 special symbols, the selected small winning symbols (symbol group) are stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the opening and closing pattern (opening time, number of times of opening) of the big winning opening 54 in the small winning game may differ according to the type of the small winning symbol.

Next, the game state of the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 58 is a transition diagram of game states and effect modes in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, as the game state of a plurality of types, "normal game state", "time-saving game state", "probability game state", and "variable probability game state" are set. As the types of the game state, (1) the game state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function operate is called "probability variation state" or "probability variation game state", 2) The gaming state in which the probability variation function of special symbols and the variation time reduction function of special symbols are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated is called "latent probability gaming state (latency probability variable gaming state)" or "latency probability variable state". (3) The game state in which the special symbol probability variation function does not operate and the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function operate is called a “time saving state” or “time saving game state”, (4 ) The state in which all functions are not activated is called a "normal state" or "normal game state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variable gaming state", the "latent certainty gaming state" and the "shortening gaming state" are all advantageous gaming states for the player compared to the "normal gaming state". In addition, each game state is a combination of the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state). ) The variable probability game state is “high probability high base state”, (2) the latent probability game state is “high probability low base state”, (3) the time saving game state is “low probability high base state”, (4) normal game state can also be expressed as a "low-probability low-base state". Here, with respect to the special symbol variation time shortening function, at least the variation time of the special symbol which is the subject of the game in the game state should be shortened, out of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, it can be said that the special symbol variation time reduction function is operating because the variation time of the first special symbol is shortened in the game state (normal game state) in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game. , In the game state (time reduction game state, latent certainty game state, probability variation game state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game, the variation time of the second special symbol should be shortened.

FIG. 59 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table in the second embodiment. In the game state setting table, a game state to be shifted to after the end of the big win game is set for each big win type (type of symbol group). In the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is a big hit, the game state after the end of the big win game is (A) the big win type (type of symbol group) and (B) the game at the time of winning the big win. It is set according to the state. In addition, the number of continuations of each game state (the number of times of fluctuation display of special symbols) is the number of probability fluctuations that the probability fluctuation function of special symbols operates (the number of times of probability fluctuations) and the fluctuation time that the fluctuation time reduction function of special symbols operates. It is set based on the number of times of shortening (number of times of time saving operation) and the number of times of electric support that the electric chewing support function operates (number of times of electric support operation). In addition, "ST" is a period (abbreviation of special time) in which the probability of a big hit is set to a high probability up to the specified number of variable display times. In other words, the probability variable state (probability variable gaming state) is maintained until the specified number of variable display times, but if the jackpot does not occur within the specified number of variable display times, the number of times division probability variable machine that shifts to the normal state (normal game state) It is called "ST machine". In this sense, the specified variable display count is hereinafter also referred to as "specified ST count" or "ST count".

In the case of winning "10R specific jackpot (symbol group A)" or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B)" in the first special pattern, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, after the jackpot game is completed. A potential game state is set as the game state. When shifting to the hidden game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of electric support times "0 times" are set. This latent definite game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST number of times (100 times). When the latent sure game state ends when the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches the specified ST number of times (100 times), the state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of special symbols.

When ``4R specific big win 2 (symbol group C)'' is won in the first special pattern, the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the big win game is finished regardless of the game state when the big win is won. When shifting to the variable probability game state after the end of the big hit game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of electric support times "100 times" are set. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST number of times (100 times). When the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the specified ST number of times (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

When the ``4R normal jackpot (pattern group D)'' is won in the first special pattern, the time-saving game state is set as the game state after the jackpot game is finished regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, probability fluctuation frequency "0 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "70 times", and power supply frequency "70 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches a specified number of times (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified number of times (70 times). When the time-saving game state is terminated by the number of variable display times of special symbols reaching a specific number of times (70 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of special symbols.

When "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot (symbol group F)", or "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)" is won in the second special pattern, the game state at the time of jackpot winning. Depending on, the game state set after the end of the big hit game is different. Specifically, when the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal game state, the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game, and the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the time-saving game state, the probability variable game. In the case of the state or the latent sure game state, the latent sure game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. When shifting to the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of times of electric support "100 times" are set, and the probability game is set after the end of the big hit game. In the case of shifting to the state, the number of probability fluctuations "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of times of electric support "0 times" are set. Therefore, the variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this prescribed ST number of times (100 times). When the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols. Similarly, the latent sure game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST number of times (100 times). When the latent sure game state ends when the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches the specified ST number of times (100 times), the state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of special symbols.

When ``4R specific jackpot 2 (pattern group H)'' is won in the second special pattern, a probability variable game state is set as a game state after the jackpot game is finished regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. When shifting to the variable probability game state after the end of the big hit game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "100 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "100 times", and the number of electric support times "100 times" are set. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST number of times (100 times). When the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the specified ST number of times (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

When a ``2R normal jackpot (pattern group I)'' is won in the second special pattern, a time-saving game state is set as a game state after the jackpot game is finished regardless of the game state when the jackpot is won. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "0 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "70 times", and the number of electric support times "70 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches a specified number of times (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified number of times (70 times). When the time-saving game state is terminated by the number of variable display times of special symbols reaching a specific number of times (70 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of special symbols.

As described above, the occurrence of a big hit can trigger the transition to the game state, but the occurrence of a small hit does not trigger the transition to the game state. That is, if the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a small hit, the final fluctuation display that is the end condition of the game state (for example, the 100th rotation fluctuation display of the probability variation game state and the latent probability game state, time saving game The game state at the time of winning the small win is continued as it is, except for the 70th rotation change display of the state, and the transition control of the game state is not performed with the winning of the small win as a trigger. That is, if the game state before the occurrence of the small win is the normal game state, the game state during the small win game and after the small win game is also the normal game state, and if the game state before the occurrence of the small win is the time-saving game state, The game state during and after the small winning game also becomes the time saving game state, and if the game state before the occurrence of the small winning is the probability variable gaming state, the game state during the small winning game and after the small winning game also becomes the probability variable gaming state. , If the game state before the occurrence of the small hit is the hidden game state, the game state during the small hit game and after the small hit game is also the hidden game state.

Next, the effect mode of the second embodiment will be explained. In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, as a plurality of production modes, a normal mode, a time saving mode, a latent probability mode, and a probability variable mode are set, and depending on the game state (or variation pattern selection state) etc. Then, one of a plurality of production modes is set alternatively, and a variable production is executed according to the set production mode.

Basically, when the game state is the normal game state, the "normal mode" is set, when the game state is the time-saving game state, the "time-saving mode" is set, and the game state is the latent game state. When the "probability mode" is set, and when the game state is the probability variation game state, the "probability variation mode" is set. However, when moving to the normal state based on the end of the non-normal game state (time-saving game state, latent certain game state, probability variable game state), a predetermined number of fluctuation display immediately after the game state shifts to the normal game state , the special effect mode is set, and the normal effect mode is set when the variable display of the predetermined number of times is finished. The predetermined number of times is "four times" as the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. This means that the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "4 times". In other words, when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the predetermined number of times, it means that the total number of times of the variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbols has reached "4 times". In addition, as a modification thereof, only the number of fluctuation display times of the first special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (4 times), or only the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (4 times). As a trigger, the special mode may be ended (or the normal mode may be entered). Then, when one of the production modes is set, as a production (variable production) that suggests that you are staying in the production mode, a background image dedicated to the production mode (a decorative pattern is displayed on the back of the screen) A background image) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11 . Since the background image and the BGM are set differently for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode the player is currently staying in from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

Subsequently, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbols of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a comparison table of special symbol variation times in the second embodiment. In addition, in the second embodiment, illustration of the special symbol variation pattern table is omitted, but in reality, as in the first embodiment, the special symbol variation time (variation pattern) Selection is made with reference to the fluctuation pattern table.

In (A) in the figure, the variation time of the special symbol is written when the game state is the normal game state. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "3 seconds to 60 seconds" if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a loss, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "1000 seconds" when the result of the hit/fail judgment is a small hit or a loss, and is set to "30 to 90 seconds" when the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit. ing. That is, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to a very long variation time (1000 seconds) compared to other variation times, except when the result of the winning/failure determination is a big hit.

In (B) in the figure, the variation time of the special symbol when the game state is the time-saving game state, the probability variable game state, or the latent probability game state is shown. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 to 60 seconds" if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a loss, and is set to "30 to 60 seconds" if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit. ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "1 second to 3 seconds" if the result of the success/failure determination is a loss, and is set to "0.5 seconds" if the result of the success/failure determination is a small hit. , and if the result of the hit/fail judgment is a big hit, it is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds".

Subsequently, the normal symbol lottery in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram for explaining the normal symbol lottery in the second embodiment. In the figure, (A) shows a normal symbol success/failure lottery table, (B) shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) shows a normal electric accessory release pattern table.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), the hit probability of normal symbols is set to "1/1.02" when the electric chew support function (ordinary symbol probability variation function) is not operating, and the electric chew support It is set to "1/1.01" when the function (probability variation function of normal symbols) is operating. Therefore, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state, it is a specification that the hit is derived with an extremely high probability in the determination of whether the normal symbol is right or wrong.

As shown in FIG. 61(B), the variation time of normal symbols is set to "0.5 seconds" when the electric chew support function (normal symbol variation time shortening function) is not operating, and the electric chew support It is set to "0.2 seconds" when the function (variation time shortening function of normal symbols) is in operation. In other words, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is set to be extremely short. It should be noted that the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbols is set to "0.1 second" regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected. The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time during which the normal symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained).

As shown in FIG. 61(C), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is "open for 1 second→close for 2 seconds→close for 1 second" when the electric chew support function (open extension function) is not in operation. It is set to "Open → Closed for 2 seconds → Open for 1 second", and if the electric chew support function (open extension function) is operating, it is set to "Open for 5.9 seconds". That is, as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 522, the total opening time is "3 seconds" because the opening operation of 1 second is performed three times in the low base state, and the total opening time is 5.9 seconds in the high base state. Since the opening operation is performed only once, the total opening time is "5.9 seconds".

Subsequently, simultaneous variation processing (variation interruption processing, variation forced stop processing) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described. FIG. 62 is a schematic diagram for explaining simultaneous variation processing (variation interruption processing, variation forced stop processing) in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the determination of the variation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the variation start condition of the second special symbol are performed separately and independently, so that the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display by the second special symbol display device 72 are executed in parallel (specs called so-called parallel machines). In other words, by independently digesting the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol and the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol, the winning lottery and the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively etc. in parallel. Therefore, even if the variable display of one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed for a long time, the variable display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the variable display of the one special symbol. is carried out, during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol will not be delayed. In the following, regarding the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variation display of the big hit is called "big hit variation display", and the variation display of the small hit is called "small hit variation display". is referred to as "off-variation display".

(Variation interruption processing)
Here, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of one of the special symbols is the big hit variation display, the small hit variation display or the losing variation display, and the variation display of the other special symbol is the small hit variation display. , in a situation in which the variable display of one special symbol and the small hit variable display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, before the variable display of one special symbol ends, the other When the small hit variation display of the special symbol ends, the variation display of one special symbol is interrupted from the time when the small hit variation display of the other special symbol ends until the small win game ends ( The measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is interrupted). It should be noted that the suspension of variable display is used to mean temporary suspension of variable display (meaning that it is scheduled to be resumed later). Then, when the small winning game of the other special symbol ends, the measurement of the variation time relating to the variation display of the one special symbol is restarted, and the measurement time of the variation time before the restart and the measurement time of the variation time after the restart. When the summed time reaches a predetermined fluctuation time (fluctuation time according to the design value), the fluctuation display of one special symbol ends.

(fluctuation forced stop processing)
On the other hand, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the variation display of one special symbol is a big hit variation display and the variation display of the other special symbol is a small hit variation display or a losing variation display, one In a situation where the big hit variation display of the special symbol and the small hit variation display or loss variation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, the small hit variation display or loss variation display of the other special symbol ends. Before, when the big hit fluctuation display of one special symbol is completed, the prescribed fluctuation time (fluctuation time according to the design value) in which the measurement time of the small hit fluctuation display or the loss fluctuation display of the other special symbol is preset Even before reaching , at the end of the big win variation display of one special pattern, the small win variation display or the losing variation display of the other special pattern is forcibly terminated in conjunction with or synchronizing with it. In addition, when forcibly ending the small hit fluctuation display of the other special pattern, the pattern (confirmed display pattern) that is stopped and displayed at the end of the small hit fluctuation display shall be replaced with a design that is out of the small hit pattern. . That is, the small-hit fluctuation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the loss fluctuation display (resulting in the cancellation of the small-hit game). Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a special game (big hit game) in one special pattern and a special game (small hit game) in the other special pattern compete with each other. In addition, when the variation display of one of the special symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts as a big hit variation display, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts to fluctuate after that is other than the big hit variation display. Change display (that is, lose change display or small hit change display, and if the hit/fail random number corresponding to the big hit in the win/fail judgment process is forced to replace the hit/fail judgment result with a loss, and make a loss change display) is desirable. In addition, when the variation display of one special symbol starts as a big hit variation display, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts to vary after that is not displayed. If it is a random number, the result of the judgment may be forcibly replaced with a loss, and the result may be displayed as a change of loss).

≪Playability of small hit RUSH≫
Next, the playability of small hit RUSH (probability mode) will be described. In the small hit RUSH (latency mode), when the game ball is entered into the second start port 52, the small hit is frequently generated in the judgment of whether the second special symbol is successful, and until the big hit is won, the small hit is performed. It is a game property aiming at generating a winning game continuously and intensively.

When the game state is the latent game state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1/1.02) in the determination of whether the normal symbol is correct. In this hidden game state (low base state), when winning the winning judgment of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 522 performs the opening operation for 1 second three times. Therefore, if the right-hand shot is aimed at the second starting port 52, it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. be. In addition, in this hidden game state, the probability of winning a small win in the determination of whether the second special symbol is successful is set to be extremely high (approximately 1/1.1), and furthermore, the probability of winning a small win is set at a very high probability (about 1/1.1). Since the fluctuation time of the 2 special symbols is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a high possibility that small hits will frequently occur based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 .

At this time, while the normal electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 1 second three times, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit, the second special symbol is finished in a very short time, and the small winning game is immediately started. Here, the normal electric accessory 522 performs a two-second closing operation immediately after performing a one-second opening operation (excluding the third opening operation). Therefore, after the small winning game is started, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 is closed while the normal electric accessory 522 is performing the closing operation for 2 seconds. It is easy to reach the big winning opening 54 by passing through the upper surface of the member 524). Therefore, during the execution of the small winning game, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 524 without entering the normal electric accessory 522, and is placed obliquely below the big winning prize. By flowing down toward the opening 54, the ball can be entered into the big winning opening 54. - 特許庁Therefore, when the game state is the latent probability variable game state, the game ball is entered into the second starting port 52 and the second special symbol is displayed with high frequency, until the next big hit occurs. It becomes a game characteristic of executing a small winning game at a high frequency. As a result, about 2 to 3 game balls are entered into the big winning hole 54 each time a small winning game is executed, and about 20 to 30 prize balls are continuously obtained each time. It is possible to proceed with the game while increasing the number of balls held.

On the other hand, even when the game state is the time-saving game state or the probability variable game state, the winning probability of the small hit is extremely high in the determination of whether the second special symbol is successful, and the fluctuation time of the small hit is set to be extremely short. Small winning games tend to occur frequently. However, the game property of the small hit RUSH is limited only to the hidden game state, and for game states other than the hidden game state, the following measures are taken to suppress the increase in possession balls due to the small hit game. It is

Specifically, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, the hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1/1.01) in the judgment of the success or failure of the normal symbol. be. In this game state (high base state), when winning the winning judgment of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 522 performs one opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if a right-hand shot is aimed at the second starting port 52, it is extremely easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. . In addition, even in this time-saving game state or variable probability game state, the probability of winning a small hit in the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (approximately 1/1.1), and a small win is won. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a possibility that a small hit will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52. expensive.

Here, while the normal electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 5.9 seconds, if the game ball enters the second start port 52 and wins a small hit, the second special symbol The variable display ends in a very short time, and the small winning game is immediately started. At this time, while the normal electric accessory 522 continues the opening operation (while the second start port 52 is in the open state), when the small hit game is executed, it flows down the right area PA2. A game ball to be played is very likely to enter the open normal electric accessory 522, and the possibility of reaching the big winning hole 54 is remarkably reduced. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed after the normal electric accessory 522 is closed (after the second start port 52 is closed), the subsequent game ball passes through the operation gate 53 Since the time from when the normal electric accessory 522 opens is set to a very short time (variation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 second), this immediately opened normal electric accessory It is easy for a game ball to enter 522 . That is, during execution of the small winning game, the normal electric role 522 (second starting port 52) is in a state of being almost open, and the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 is the normal electric role in the open state. It is very easy to hit the object 522 (the second start hole 52), and it is extremely difficult to hit the big prize hole 54 arranged downstream thereof. Therefore, when the game state is the time-saving game state or probability variable game state (high base state), the game ball reaches the big winning opening 54 even if small hits occur frequently in the success/failure determination of the second special symbol. The possibility is remarkably low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the number of payouts through a small winning game.

Further, even when the game state is the normal game state, the winning probability of the small hit is set to an extremely high probability (approximately 1/1.1) in the determination of whether the second special symbol is successful or not, but the second special symbol is set to an extremely long period of time (10 minutes or more), even if the player enters the game ball into the second starting hole 52 and plays a game aiming for a small hit, the second special The efficiency of digestion of symbols is very low, and it is not possible to frequently generate small winning games. In addition, in the predetermined number of fluctuation display immediately after shifting to the normal game state, the limited frequency selection state is set as the fluctuation pattern selection state, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is set relatively high (second special The pattern fluctuation time is not extremely long). In other words, the variable display for a predetermined number of times immediately after shifting to the normal game state (variable display within 4 rotations) is faster than the variable display after the variable display for the predetermined number of times (variable display for the fifth and subsequent rotations). The variation time (average value of variation time) of the second special symbol is shortened, and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be high.

Here, in the second embodiment, during the execution of the small hit RUSH (probability mode), the accumulated number of prize balls is displayed in the accumulated number of prize balls display area 733 on the screen, and the player can be notified of the number of accumulated prize balls. is configured to During the execution of this small hit RUSH (latency mode), when a game ball enters the general winning opening 64, the bonus winning effect is not performed, but the cumulative number of winning balls is displayed (general winning opening count Up effect) is configured to be performed. Also, during the execution of this small winning RUSH (latency mode), when the game ball enters the big winning hole 54 in the small winning game performed by the result of the judgment result of the second special symbol becoming a small winning. , it is preferable that an addition display of the accumulated number of winning balls (large winning opening count-up effect) is performed. As a modification, even if a game ball enters the general winning hole 64 during execution of a small hit RUSH (latency mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is added and displayed (general winning hole A count-up effect) may also be configured not to be performed.

Also in the second embodiment, by applying the characteristic configuration of the above-described first embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as in the above-described first embodiment. can be improved.

As a modified example of the second embodiment, the second starting port 52 may be configured as a prize winning port that is always open. That is, in this modification, the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 are configured as non-variable starting ports (always open starting ports), and no ordinary electric accessory is mounted. FIG. 63 is a front view of a pachinko game machine according to a modification of the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 63, a second start opening 52 is arranged in the right area (right area PA2) of the center decoration 21, and a big winning opening 54 is arranged diagonally to the left thereof. The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and has a second starting port switch 521 for detecting the entry of the game ball. The second starting port 52 is a normally open prize-winning port that opens upward, and mainly allows game balls (right-handed game balls) flowing down the right side area PA2 to enter. That is, the second starting port 52 also serves as a general prize winning port 64 in which game balls flowing down the right side area PA2 can always enter, and even in the special game state or in the non-special game state, It is always configured to be able to enter the ball. In this modification, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 52 (general winning hole 64) during the execution of a special game, a bonus winning effect and an addition display of the accumulated number of winning balls (general winning hole count Up production) is performed. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 52 (general winning hole 64) during the execution of the special game, only the addition display of the accumulated number of winning balls (general winning hole count-up effect) is performed, and a bonus is displayed. It may be configured so that the prize-winning effect is not performed. Also, even if a game ball enters the second starting hole 52 (general winning hole 64) during the execution of the small winning RUSH (probable probability mode), the bonus winning effect is not performed, and the cumulative number of winning balls is added and displayed. (General winning mouth count-up effect) may also be configured not to be performed.

[Third embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the third embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted, and mainly the different parts will be described. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the first embodiment.

Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment will be described in order. In the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, when the result of the special symbol win/fail judgment is a big hit, a specific area ( It is configured as a V probability variation gaming machine (ball certainty gaming machine) that determines the presence or absence of probability variation transition depending on whether it passes through (details described later).

<Board composition>
In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1 (similar to the first embodiment described above), the game balls flowing down the left side area PA1 are mainly the first starting port 51 arranged below the center decoration 21. , general winning openings 61-63. On the other hand, game balls flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter any one of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the big winning opening 54, which are mainly arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. is. In addition, the big winning hole 54 of the third embodiment is configured as a so-called V attacker (details will be described later) having a specific area (probability variable operation area) where the entry of the game ball triggers the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol. It is On the other hand, the lower end of the game area PA is provided with an out port 29 through which the game balls that have flowed down without entering the winning ports are discharged to the back side of the game board 20 . Among the game areas PA having various winning holes, the method of shooting the game ball so as to flow down to the left side area PA1 is called "left hitting", and the game ball flows down to the right side area PA2. The hitting method of shooting a game ball so as to cause it to move is called "right hitting".

<Number of prize balls>
In the third embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) to be paid out when one game ball enters each winning hole is "4" for the first start hole 51, and "4" for the second start hole 52. The number is set to "1", the number of general winning openings 61 to 64 is set to "3", and the number of large winning openings 54 is set to "15". In addition, the number of prize balls per unit is not limited to that illustrated in the third embodiment, and other number of prize balls per unit may be applied.

<Grand Prize Entrance>
FIG. 64 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the big winning opening 54 of the third embodiment. A sorting device 544 is provided inside the big winning slot 54, located downstream of the big winning slot switch 541, for determining the game state after the special game (jackpot game) is finished. . The sorting device 544 is formed with a specified area 548 and a non-specified area 549 to which game balls entered into the big winning opening 54 are sorted. In addition, the distribution device 544 is provided with a movable member 545 for selectively distributing game balls that have entered the big winning opening 54 to a specific area 548 or a non-specific area 549, and for driving the movable member 545 to open and close. A specific area solenoid 546 is provided. When the movable member 545 is in the closed position, the specified area 548 is closed by the movable member 545 and game balls are distributed to the non-specified area 549 . On the other hand, when the movable member 545 is in the open position, the specific area 548 is opened and game balls are distributed to the specific area 548 . A specific area switch 547 for detecting passage of a game ball to the specific area 548 is provided in the specific area 548 . This specific area switch 547 functions as a probability variation function activation switch for setting the game state after the end of the special game to a high probability state (state in which the probability variation function of special symbols is activated).

<Big hit lottery>
Next, the propriety determination of the special symbol in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol success/fail lottery table. FIG. 65(A) is referred to in the game state (low probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is not operating, and FIG. 65(B) is the game state in which the special symbol probability variation function is operating (high probability state). In the special symbol success/failure lottery table, the random number range of the special symbol per random value and the result of the special symbol success/failure determination (big hit, miss) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 65, in the determination of whether the special symbols are valid, in the game state (low probability state) where the probability variation function of the special symbols is not activated, the random number value per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 297". In the game state (high-probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is activated, a big win occurs when the special symbol per random number falls within the range of "0 to 698". In other words, when the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the winning probability of the big win varies from low probability "1/219.92" to high probability "1/93.76". In this way, the winning probability of the big win changes according to the game state, but the winning probability of the big win is set equally between the winning judgment of the first special symbol and the winning judgment of the second special symbol. In addition, in the present embodiment, "small hit" is not set as the result of the judgment of the special symbol, but "small hit" may be set as the result of the judgment of the special symbol. The winning probability of the small hit is set to the same winning probability regardless of the game state (low-probability state, high-probability state).

<Jack type>
Subsequently, the jackpot type (jackpot breakdown) of the special symbols of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the third embodiment, when the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is "big hit", the special symbol big hit symbol table is referenced to determine the big hit type (big hit symbol, symbol group). In addition, as described above, the "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probability variable jackpot) that triggers the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game ends, and the "normal jackpot" means a special after the jackpot game ends. It means a big hit (non-probable variable big hit) that does not trigger the operation of the probability variation function of the symbol.

The jackpot types of the third embodiment are roughly classified into "conditional specific jackpot" and "conditional normal jackpot". “Conditional specific jackpot” is a jackpot that is set so that the game ball can easily enter (pass through) the specific area 548. Basically, the game ball enters the specific area 548. As a condition, it is decided to move to a high-probability state. The reason for "conditional" is that even if the game ball enters the specific area 548 easily, even if the game ball does not actually enter the specific area 548, the result is a normal jackpot. This is because it becomes a (non-probable variable jackpot). "Conditional normal jackpot" is a jackpot set to make it difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter (pass through) the specific area 548, and basically the game ball does not enter the specific area 548. on the condition that it does not transition to the high-probability state (transition to the low-probability state). The reason for "conditional" is that even if it is a big hit that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area 548, when the game ball actually enters the specific area 548, it will result in a specific big hit (probability variable This is because it will be a big hit.

FIG. 66(A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, a special symbol hit symbol random value is associated with a symbol group and a jackpot type (in this example, description of stop symbols is omitted for the sake of convenience). A special big win with 4R condition (symbol group A) and a normal big win with 4R condition (symbol group B) are set as two kinds of big win types (symbol group) in the first special symbol big win pattern table. Specifically, the 4R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group A) is distributed with a selection rate of 1%, and the 4R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group B) with a selection rate of 99%.

FIG. 66(B) is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, a special symbol hit symbol random value is associated with a symbol group and a jackpot type (in this example, description of stop symbols is omitted for the sake of convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot symbol table, five kinds of jackpot types (symbol groups) are provided, including 10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C), 10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D), and 10R conditional jackpot. A special jackpot 3 (symbol group E), a special jackpot with a 7R condition (symbol group F), and a special jackpot with a 3R condition (symbol group G) are set. Specifically, the 10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C) has a selection rate of 32%, the 10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D) has a selection rate of 10%, and the 10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group E) is distributed with a selection rate of 8%, a 7R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group F) with a selection rate of 25%, and a 3R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group G) with a selection rate of 25%.

Here, as shown in FIG. 66(A), in the lottery for the first special symbol, the selection rate of the conditional specific jackpot is set to "1%", and the selection rate of the conditional normal jackpot is set to "99%". is set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 66(B), in the second special symbol lottery, the conditional specific jackpot selection rate is set to "100%". In other words, when the result of the winning/failure determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, it is definite that the conditional specific big win is always won as the big win type. Therefore, the possibility of winning the conditional specific jackpot (corresponding to the probability variable jackpot) is higher when the jackpot with the second special pattern occurs than when the jackpot with the first special pattern occurs, and the jackpot game ends. Afterwards, it becomes easier for the player to shift to an advantageous game state (high-probability state). In the following, among the jackpot types of the first special symbol, the 4R conditional specific jackpot, which is the jackpot type with the highest degree of profit, is also referred to as "special figure 1 highest profit jackpot", and the jackpot type of the second special symbol. Among them, the 10R conditional specific jackpots 1 to 3, which are the jackpot types with the highest profit, are also referred to as "special figure 2 highest profit jackpot".

Next, the operation pattern of the big winning opening of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram showing a big winning opening operation pattern table of the third embodiment. In the big winning opening operation pattern table, the opening mode (opening pattern) of the big winning opening 54 and the specific area 548 in each round is defined for each jackpot type. The opening mode of the big winning opening 54 and the specific area 548 is, depending on the length of the opening time, a long opening (long opening) in which the opening time is set to a relatively long time, and a long opening in which the opening time is relatively long. It is distinguished from a short open (short open) that is set for a short time. In the figure, "L" means long opening and "S" means short opening as the mode of opening the big winning opening 54 and the specific area 548 in each round. The long opening time of the big winning opening 54 is an opening time (for example, 28 seconds) that is set to enable or easily enter a game ball of a specified count (full count) into the big winning opening 54 . In the third embodiment, as the opening mode of the big winning opening 54, short opening is not set in any round, and long opening is set in all rounds. However, even if the number of rounds of the big winning game is the same, a short opening is provided to shorten the opening time of the big winning opening 54 to, for example, 2 seconds in a predetermined round or all rounds during the same big winning game. Alternatively, a configuration having jackpots with different numbers of rounds (jackpots with different numbers of actual rounds) in which the number of actual balls can be obtained may be adopted. On the other hand, the long opening time of the specific area 548 is an opening time (for example, 28 seconds) set so that the game ball entering the big winning hole 54 can or easily pass through the specific area 548 . Also, the short opening time of the specific area 548 is the opening time (for example, 0.05 seconds) set so that the game ball entering the big winning hole 54 cannot pass through the specific area 548 or is difficult to pass through. The opening of the specific area 548 is synchronized with the opening of the big winning opening 54 (start of the first round) in either long opening or short opening. That is, the specific area 548 opens at the same timing as the opening start timing of the big winning opening 54 in the first round, or at the timing after one second has passed from the opening starting timing of the big winning opening 54 in the first round. . Also, not limited to this, the specific area 548 may be opened with the detection of the ball entering the big winning opening 54, and the count number (for example, the specified If the count number is 10 counts, the specific area 548 may be opened by detecting the first count). In the case of such a configuration, in the case of a conditional specific jackpot, the specific area 548 is long-opened by detecting the first count of the big winning opening 54 in the first round, and in the case of a conditional normal jackpot, in the first round. It is preferable to short open the specific area 548 by detecting the first count of the big winning opening 54 .

In the third embodiment, even if it corresponds to any jackpot type, in the specific round of the special game, based on whether the game ball enters the specific area 548, the game state after the end of the special game Whether or not to shift to a high probability state (probability variation gaming state) is sorted. The specific round means that the movable member 545 in the big winning opening 54 opens and closes, and the specific area switch 547 becomes effective (detection of the game ball entering the specific area 548 becomes effective, that is, the game ball is determined by entering the specific area 548) round. This specific round is set to the first round (initial round) in common for all jackpot types. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the entry of a game ball into the specific area 548 during execution of a specific round is also referred to as "V winning". In addition, as a modification, when adopting a spec (so-called normal probability variable gaming machine) that does not have a specific area 548 in the big winning opening 54, as the jackpot type of this embodiment, "conditional specific jackpot" is "specific jackpot" Alternatively, it corresponds to the "probability variable big hit", and the "conditional normal jackpot" corresponds to the "normal big hit" or the "non-probability variable big hit".

As shown in FIG. 67, when the jackpot type is "4R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group A)" or "4R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group B)", the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 4 rounds. , the opening mode of the big winning opening 54 is long opening in all the rounds. In the case of "4R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group A)", since the specific area 548 is long open in the specific round (first round), the game ball enters the specific area 548 in the round. is possible or easy. On the other hand, in the case of "4R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group B)", since the specific area 548 is short-opened in the specific round (first round), the game ball enters the specific area 548 in the round. is practically impossible or difficult.

Also, if the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C)", "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D)" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group E)" , the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10 rounds, and the opening mode of the big winning opening 54 is long opening in all the rounds. In any of the jackpot types of "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C)", "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D)", and "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group E)", Since the specific area 548 is long-opened in the specific round (first round), it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 in the round.

When the jackpot type is "7R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group F)", the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 7 rounds, and the opening mode of the big prize opening 54 is long opening in all rounds. In the case of the "7R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group F)", the specific area 548 is long-opened in the specific round (first round), so the game ball enters the specific area 548 in the round. is possible or easy.

When the jackpot type is "3R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group G)", the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 3 rounds, and the opening mode of the big prize opening 54 is long opening in all the rounds. In the case of "3R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group G)", since the specific area 548 is long open in the specific round (first round), the game ball enters the specific area 548 in the round. is possible or easy.

<Game status>
Next, the game state of the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 68 is a transition diagram of the game state and effect mode of the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, "normal game state", "time-saving game state", and "probability variable game state" are set as a plurality of types of game states. As the types of the game state, (1) the game state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function operate is called "probability variation state" or "probability variation game state", 2) The game state in which the special symbol probability variation function does not operate and the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function operate is called a “time saving state” or “time saving game state”, (3) All The state in which the function is not activated is called "normal state" or "normal game state". Here, it can be said that both the "probability variable gaming state" and the "time saving gaming state" are advantageous gaming states for the player compared to the "normal gaming state". In addition, each game state is a combination of the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state). ) The probability variable gaming state can be expressed as “high probability high base state”, (2) time saving gaming state as “low probability high base state”, and (3) normal gaming state as “low probability low base state”. Here, the special symbol variation time shortening function means a function of shortening the variation time of at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which is the subject of the game in the game state. . In other words, it can be said that the special symbol variation time reduction function is operating only when the game state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game (in the case of the third embodiment, the "low probability low base state" ), the variation time of the first special symbol is shortened, and the variation display of the second special symbol is the main game state (in the case of the third embodiment, the “low probability high base state” and “high probability high base state"), the variation time of the second special symbol should be shortened.

FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table of the third embodiment. In the game state setting table, a game state to be shifted to after the end of the big win game is set for each big win type (type of symbol group). In the third embodiment, when the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is a big hit, the game state after the end of the big win game is (A) the big win type (type of symbol group) and (B) when the big win is won. and (C) the presence or absence of the game ball entering the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game (whether or not there is a V prize). In addition, the number of continuations of each game state (the number of times of fluctuation display of special symbols) is the number of probability fluctuations that the probability fluctuation function of special symbols operates (the number of times of probability fluctuations) and the fluctuation time that the fluctuation time reduction function of special symbols operates. It is set based on the number of times of shortening (number of times of time saving operation) and the number of times of electric support that the electric chewing support function operates (number of times of electric support operation). In addition, "ST" means a period (abbreviation of special time) in which the probability of a big hit is set to a high probability up to the specified number of variable display times. In other words, while maintaining the probability variable gaming state (high probability high base state) until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the specified number of variable display times, if a big hit does not occur within the specified number of variable display times A game state (low probability low base state) is referred to as a "ST machine". In this sense, the specified variable display count is hereinafter also referred to as "specified ST count" or "ST count".

When the first special symbol "4R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group A)" is won, it becomes possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game. Basically, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big win, on the condition that the game ball is entered into the specific area 548, the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the big win game. . When shifting to the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "135 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "135 times", and the number of electric support times "135 times" are set. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (135 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST number of times (135 times). When the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the specified ST number of times (135 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols. In addition, in spite of the fact that it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548, if the game ball cannot actually enter the specific area 548, the jackpot is won. A time-saving game state is set as a game state after the end of the big win game without depending on the game state of time. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, probability fluctuation frequency "0 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "100 times", and power supply frequency "100 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the specified number of times of time-saving (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of times of time-savings (100 times). When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches the specified number of times of time-saving (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of special symbols.

When the first special symbol "4R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group B)" is won, it is substantially impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game. Basically, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big win, on the condition that the game ball could not enter the specific area 548, the game after the end of the big win game Time saving game state is set as the state. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, probability fluctuation frequency "0 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "100 times", and power supply frequency "100 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the specified number of times of time-saving (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of times of time-savings (100 times). When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches the specified number of times of time-saving (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of special symbols. In addition, in spite of the fact that it was substantially impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area 548, if the game ball could actually enter the specific area 548 A variable probability game state is set as a game state after the end of the big win game without depending on the game state at the time of winning the big win. When shifting to the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "135 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "135 times", and the number of electric support times "135 times" are set. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (135 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST number of times (135 times). When the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the specified ST number of times (135 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols.

Second special symbols "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C)", "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D)", "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group E)", "7R condition In the case of winning a specific jackpot (symbol group F) or a specific jackpot with 3R conditions (symbol group G), it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, basically, without depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, on the condition that the game ball is entered into the specific area 548, the game state after the jackpot game is finished. State is set. When shifting to the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "135 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "135 times", and the number of electric support times "135 times" are set. This variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches the prescribed ST number of times (135 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the prescribed ST number of times (135 times). When the variable probability game state ends when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the specified ST number of times (135 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of the special symbols. In addition, in spite of the fact that it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548, if the game ball cannot actually enter the specific area 548, the jackpot is won. A time-saving game state is set as a game state after the end of the big win game without depending on the game state of time. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, probability fluctuation frequency "0 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "100 times", and power supply frequency "100 times" are set. This time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches the specified number of times of time-saving (100 times) or until the next big hit occurs within the specified number of times of time-savings (100 times). When the time-saving game state ends when the number of times of variable display of special symbols reaches the specified number of times of time-saving (100 times), the game state shifts to the normal game state from the next variable display of special symbols.

Next, the variation pattern selection state of the third embodiment will be described. The variation pattern selection state is, as described above, one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation pattern table) of the special symbol. In this embodiment, "selection state 1", "selection state 2", and "selection state 3" are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states. Selection state 1 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state). Moreover, this selection state 1 is set corresponding to the variable display when the presentation mode is the "normal mode". Selection state 2 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the game state is a time-saving game state (low-probability high-base state). Moreover, this selection state 2 is set corresponding to the variable display when the presentation mode is the "chance mode". Selection state 3 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the gaming state is a probability variable gaming state (high probability high base state). Further, this selection state 3 is set corresponding to the variable display when the production mode is the "rush mode". In this embodiment, one of a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states is alternatively set according to the game state and the number of times of variation display of special symbols, and according to the set variation pattern selection state A variation pattern table is selected.

<Production mode>
Next, the production mode of the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, as a plurality of production modes, "normal mode", "chance mode", and "rush mode" are set, and the game state (or variation pattern selection state), One of a plurality of production modes is alternatively set according to the number of variable display times of special symbols, and a variable production corresponding to the set production mode is executed.

Basically, when the game state is a normal game state, "normal mode" is set, when the game state is a time-saving game state, "chance mode" is set, and when the game state is a probability variable game state is set to "rush mode". When one of the production modes is set, as a production (variable production) that suggests that you are staying in the production mode, a background image dedicated to the production mode (a background image that is displayed on the back of the decorative pattern) is displayed on the screen. ) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11 . Since the background image and the BGM are set differently for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode the player is currently staying in from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing. Specifically, "Normal Mode" has four stages: "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-Ahead Stage". , transition from "Stage A" to "Stage B", transition from "Stage B" to "Stage C", transition from "Stage C" to "Stage A", If you win the execution (transition), move from the stage you are currently staying to the "read-ahead stage" (when you move to the "read-ahead stage", the execution of the SP reach is confirmed, and if you hit the "read-ahead stage" , the second row is displayed, and if it is off, the second row is displayed in the "look-ahead stage", and the next change returns to the stage before the "look-ahead stage" transition). The BGM (stage BGM) is different for each of "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-Ahead Stage" (both the stage BGM of "Chance Mode" and the stage BGM of "Rush Mode"). , In "Stage A", the stage BGM is interrupted (finished) triggered by the non-reach fluctuation stop (determined stop), and the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the start of the next fluctuation, "Stage B", " In stage C" and "look-ahead stage", the stage BGM is not interrupted (does not end) even if the non-reach fluctuation stops (determined stop), and the stage BGM is output continuously to the next fluctuation. (“Chance mode” and “Rush mode” are similarly configured to continuously output). Here, the pseudo continuous effect can be executed in any of the "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "prefetch stage". (When a predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, a symbol of the characters "NEXT") is variably displayed as a middle symbol near a predetermined temporary stop position and then temporarily stopped, the stage BGM is not output. (Interruption), the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the re-variation display as a trigger, or switches to a specific BGM different from before the re-variation display. After that, when developing into SP reach in "Stage A", "Stage B", "Stage C", and "Look-ahead stage", the background image of each stage (the stage where you stayed) will be changed to the background image of SP reach production. Switching (and switching to BGM dedicated to SP reach), stage BGM is not output during SP reach, and an effect indicating failure is displayed in SP reach, so within the variable display where SP reach is executed will switch to the background image of each stage again (the background image of the stage that was displayed before the development of SP Reach), but in that situation, the background image of the stage will be displayed until the next variable display starts. Also, the stage BGM is not output, nor is the SP reach-only BGM output (it is silent, or a specific BGM that is different from the stage BGM and the SP reach-only BGM is output). Therefore, the stage BGM is not interrupted (does not end) even if the non-reach fluctuation stops (determined stop), and the stage BGM is output continuously to the next fluctuation "Stage B", "Stage C”, even if it is a “look-ahead stage” (even if it is not “stage A”), if it is lost via SP reach, stage BGM before fluctuation stop (fixed stop) is interrupted, and the stage BGM is started from the beginning with the start of the next fluctuation. In addition, in the "chance mode" and the "rush mode", the pseudo continuous effect is not executed. Here, a special effect suggesting that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed (for example, it is a continuation line notice, and the execution of the subsequent pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed. It is suggested that a pseudo-continuous effect (re-fluctuation display) will be performed thereafter, but this special effect is performed in "Stage A" and " It is displayed only in "Stage C", and is not displayed in "Stage B" and "Look-Ahead Stage". In other words, by preparing both stages in which the possibility of pseudo-continuous effects being executed can be detected in advance and stages in which the possibility cannot be detected, and by repeating stage transitions between these stages, effects that keep the player from getting bored are realized. doing. In "stage A", a special effect with character A as a motif is executed, but in "stage C", a special effect with character B as a motif is executed. In addition, it is an effect different from the special effect, and a pseudo-continuous confirmation effect that confirms that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed after just occurring (for example, when the character C appears, the line "Continue confirmed!" Furthermore, it is a different effect from the special effect and the pseudo-continuous fixed effect, and the development fixed effect ( For example, an effect is also provided in which the line "development is confirmed!" is displayed whenever the character D appears. This pseudo continuous fixed effect and development fixed effect can be executed in any of "stage A", "stage B", "stage C", and "prefetching stage". In this way, when the pseudo-continuous effect is performed and when the pseudo-continuous effect is not performed, one or more of the special effect, the pseudo-continuous fixed effect, and the development fixed effect are displayed in combination, so that the execution expectation of the pseudo-continuous effect, It is possible to diversify the development expectations for SP reach. It should be noted that during one variable display, all of the special effect, the pseudo continuous fixed effect, and the development fixed effect may be executed. A variable display) may include a pattern in which a special effect is executed, a pattern in which a pseudo continuous fixed effect is executed, and a pattern in which a development fixed effect is executed. In the pattern in which the special effect is executed in the pseudo 2-fluctuation display or the pseudo 3-fluctuation display), after the special effect is executed during the re-fluctuation display, the pseudo-continuous confirmation effect is further executed during the re-fluctuation display. may

<Variation pattern>
Next, the variation pattern of the special symbol of the third embodiment will be described. 70 to 72 are schematic diagrams showing the special symbol variation pattern table of the third embodiment. In the special symbol variation pattern table, as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, columns to be referred to are different for the first special symbol and for the second special symbol, and the same special symbol variation pattern random number value is obtained. Even so, different variation patterns can be selected. The number of operation pending balls ("0 pending", "1 to 2 pending", "3 pending") described in each figure is the first special if the variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol It means the number of operation pending balls of the symbol (the number of operation pending balls after holding digestion), and if it is a variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol (operation holding balls after holding digestion number). The number of balls with pending operation is the number of balls with pending operation that exist at the time of the fluctuation pattern lottery (at the start of the relevant fluctuation display/after digestion of the holding) (does not include balls with pending operation that have been digested by the relevant fluctuation display). . In addition, as a modification thereof, the total value of the number of operation pending balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used. In addition, during a predetermined limited frequency period (a state in which a special variation pattern table is referred to, and in particular a period in which the variation pattern of the final variation display in the high-probability high-base state or the low-probability high-base state is selected), A common variation pattern table may be used regardless of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Desirable, that is, when selecting a losing variation pattern, it is desirable that the selection tendency of the variation pattern is common between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when selecting the big hit variation pattern, the first Since the type of special game that can be executed may differ depending on the special symbol and the second special symbol, it is desirable not to use a common variation pattern table in order to select a variation pattern corresponding to the type of special game. When selecting a big hit variation pattern, it is desirable that the selection tendency of the variation pattern is different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. During a predetermined limited frequency period (a state in which a special variation pattern table is referred to, and in particular a period in which the final variation display variation pattern is selected in a high-probability high-base state or a low-probability high-base state). In this case, in the fluctuation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, no matter what the number of balls with the first special symbol activated (the number of balls with the activated ball after the retention is digested), and in the fluctuation pattern lottery of the second special symbol It is desirable to use a common variation pattern table regardless of the number of operation retention balls (the number of operation retention balls after retention digestion) of the second special symbol, that is, when selecting a deviation variation pattern It is desirable that the selection tendency of the variation pattern is common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol regardless of the number of reservations, and when selecting the variation pattern of the big hit, the selection tendency of the variation pattern is the first special symbol Unlike the second special symbol, a common variation pattern table is not used, but the selection tendency of the variation pattern of the first special symbol is common regardless of the number of balls to be activated in the first special symbol, and the second special symbol It is desirable that the selection tendency of the variation pattern be common regardless of the number of balls with the second special symbol in operation. Also, "using a common variation pattern table" referred to here may mean that one variation pattern table is used for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or the first special symbol. Although the variation pattern table is divided between and the second special symbol, it may mean that the contents of the variation pattern table (variation pattern candidates to be selected, their selection rate, etc.) are the same.

The variation effect of the decorative design performed in conjunction with the variation display of the special design is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special design. 70 to 72 also show, for reference, the contents of the variation effects set corresponding to each variation pattern (variation time). In the figure, "super shortened variation", "shortened variation", and "normal variation" are effects in which the decorative patterns in the three rows fluctuate, and without going through the reach state even once, they become "off" with so-called loose eyes. is. In the following, ultra-shortening variation, shortening variation and normal variation are also collectively referred to as "non-reach deviation". In this non-reach deviation, the variation modes are different from each other in that the variation display stops in a shorter time in the shortened variation than in the normal variation and in the ultra-shortened variation than in the shortened variation.

"N reach (normal reach)" is a state in which the same decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in two of the three rows of decorative patterns (generally left and right rows) (reach state), and the remaining one row (generally If a different decorative pattern is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped in the middle row), it will be "missed", and if the same decorative pattern is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped in the remaining one row (generally, the middle row) It is a reach production that will be a big hit.

“SP Reach (Super Reach)” is a reach production with relatively higher expectations for big hits than the above N Reach, and has evolved from N Reach, for example, still images and videos such as animation and live action are displayed. It is a reach performance. In this third embodiment, "SP reach A", "SP reach B", and "SP reach C" are prepared as a plurality of types of SP reach. SP reach A is SP reach that can be executed when the production mode currently being executed is the normal mode. On the other hand, SP reach B and SP reach C are SP reach which can be executed even when the production mode currently being executed is any production mode. In the third embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher in the order of "SP reach A"<"SP reach B"<"SP reach C". That is, the degree of expectation for a big hit increases as the game develops in the order of "SP reach A"→"SP reach B"→"SP reach C". Here, when the production mode is the normal mode, basically, SP reach A is the first stage SP reach that develops from normal reach, and SP reach B is the second stage SP reach that develops from SP reach A. Yes, SP reach C is the third stage SP reach developed from SP reach B. On the other hand, when the production mode is the chance mode or the rush mode, basically, the SP reach B is the SP reach that develops from the normal reach, and the SP reach C is the SP reach that develops from the N reach or from the SP reach B. . In addition, SP reach C is a reach production in which a specific character (specific element) called "END" appears, and in the following description, this SP reach C may be referred to as "END reach" after its name. be. This specific element (specific character) is a production element with a high expectation of a big hit that may appear in other productions such as advance notice production and prefetch production performed in the game machine.

In the "pseudo-continuous", the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop, temporary stop) and again variably displayed during one variative display of the decorative symbols, so that the quasi-variation display is performed multiple times. It is an effect (pseudo-continuous effect, pseudo-variation effect, pseudo-continuous change effect) that looks like this. The pseudo-continuous effect is a predetermined effect (predetermined effect) in which a pseudo-variation of temporary stop or fixed stop after all the decorative symbols in three rows start to change or re-variate is executed a plurality of times. Hereinafter, the number of pseudo fluctuations is also referred to as "pseudo continuation number". In the variation display in which the number of pseudo consecutive times is 2, the first pseudo variation (referred to as "pseudo 1 variation") is the period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the temporary stop, and the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is The second pseudo fluctuation (referred to as “pseudo second fluctuation”) is from the start of re-fluctuation to the final stop. In the variation display in which the number of pseudo consecutive times is 3, the first pseudo variation (referred to as "pseudo 1 variation") is from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the temporary stop, and the temporarily stopped decorative pattern is From the start of re-fluctuation to the temporary stop is the second pseudo-fluctuation (referred to as "pseudo 2 fluctuation"), and from the start of the re-fluctuation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern to the final stop. This is the third pseudo fluctuation (referred to as "pseudo 3 fluctuation"). In addition, even in a variation display that does not develop into a pseudo run, for convenience of explanation, the period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the final stop may be referred to as the first pseudo variation, and may be referred to as "pseudo 1 variation". . It indicates that the higher the number of pseudo-runs, the higher the possibility of developing into an SP reach with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. Further, among the three rows of decorative patterns, the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop in the ready state (tenpai), the left and right decorative patterns temporarily stop in the non-reach state. Expectations for big hits are higher than in the case. Further, when the decorative symbols on the left row and the right row are temporarily stopped in the non-reach state or the ready-to-win state, the degree of expectation for a big hit increases according to the type of the left row decorative symbols. As an example, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher for decorative patterns "1" and "5" than for decorative patterns "2", "4" and "6". Also, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher for the decorative pattern of "3", and the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher for the decorative pattern of "7" than that of the decorative pattern of "3". The increase in the number of pseudo-runs from the first time to the second time and from the second time to the third time is also called "pseudo-run continues".

"Pseudo 1 swaying" is an effect to sway whether or not the next psuedo variation (second psuedo variation) progresses during the execution of psuedo 1 variation (first psuedo variation). "Pseudo 2 swaying" is an effect to sway whether or not the next psuedo fluctuation (third psuedo fluctuation) progresses during execution of the psuedo 2 fluctuation (second psuedo fluctuation). Hereinafter, the “pseudo 1 swaying” and the “pseudo 2 swaying” may be collectively referred to as “pseudo swaying swaying (pseudo swaying performance)”. In the pseudo-continuous fanning effect, a predetermined pseudo-continuous pattern (for example, a pattern of the characters "NEXT") is displayed as a middle pattern (final pattern) while the left and right patterns of the three rows of decorative patterns are temporarily stopped and displayed. is variably displayed in the vicinity of a predetermined temporary stop position, and the effect is to prompt whether or not the temporary stop display is to be performed. It should be noted that this predetermined pseudo-continuous symbol is not displayed at the time of final stop, but is displayed only at the time of temporary stop. If the next pseudo-variation is performed (if the pseudo-continuous effect is successful), the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed at the predetermined temporary stop position, and if the next pseudo-variation is not performed (the pseudo-continuous effect is If it fails), the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped and displayed at the predetermined temporary stop position and other decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, or the pseudo consecutive symbols are not temporarily stopped and displayed at the predetermined temporary stop position. Only the pattern continues to change display (for example, if it is in a tenpai state, it develops into SP reach).

The "full rotation reach" is an effect of variably displaying in a state in which all three rows of decorative symbols are arranged (decorative symbol combination mode for informing a big hit). In this embodiment, three rows of decorative patterns are "1.1.1" → "3.3.3" → "7.7.7" → "1.1.1" → "3.3.3". -> "7.7.7" -> . This is an effect that prompts whether the stop display (temporary stop or fixed stop) is to be performed in combination. It should be noted that this all-rotation ready-to-win is a big-hit performance that is executed only when the result of the special symbol win/fail judgment is a big hit. The variable display in all rotations is made to be displayed variable after the decorative pattern is made transparent, and when it comes to the stop display (temporary stop or fixed stop) timing of the decorative pattern combination that is finally stopped and displayed (temporary stop or fixed stop), it is non-transparent It is preferable to display in the state of In addition, as a modification, the three rows of decorative patterns are "1.1.1" → "2.2.2" → "3.3.3" → "4.4.4" → "5.5. 5"→"6.6.6"→"7.7.7"→"1.1.1"→... It may be configured to display a stop (provisional stop or fixed stop).

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 70 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 1. FIG. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table that is set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 1. The variation pattern table 1 has different table contents according to the result of the special symbol win/loss determination (big win, loss).

14 types of variation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-14 are set in the variation pattern table 1 for loss. When the result of the suitability determination of the first special symbol is "miss", one of 14 variations patterns PH1-1 to PH1-14 is selected according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value. In this embodiment, if the result of the determination of the suitability of the first special symbol is "missing", the reference destination according to the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the first special symbol are set so that the table contents are different, and even if the special symbol variation pattern random number is the same, different types of variation patterns can be selected according to the number of activated balls with the first special symbol. ing. Specifically, the larger the number of balls with the first special symbol activated, the easier it is to select a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively short, and the number of the balls with the first special symbol activated is more likely to be selected. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of the validity of the second special symbol is "missing", the number of activated balls of the second special symbol (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number Only the fixed variation pattern PH1-1 (shortened variation) is selected without dependence. It should be noted that, as a modification, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", it does not depend on the number of operation suspensions of the second special symbol, and from among the variation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-14, shortening A configuration in which the variation pattern PH1-1 of variation is most likely to be selected (it is preferable that the selection ratio is the same regardless of the number of balls that are activated and held in the second special symbol).

In the variation pattern table 1 for big hits, 10 types of variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-10 are set. When the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol is "jackpot", if the jackpot type is "4R conditional specific jackpot", 10 types of variation patterns PA1-1 according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value. ~PA1-10 is selected, and if the jackpot type is "4R conditional normal jackpot", 9 types of variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-9 according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value one of them is selected. That is, among the plurality of variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-10, the variation pattern PA1-10 (full rotation reach) can be selected only when the jackpot type is "4R conditional specific jackpot". On the other hand, if the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is "jackpot", the jackpot type ("10R conditional specific jackpot 1 to 3", "7R conditional specific jackpot", "3R conditional specific jackpot") Or, only the fixed variation pattern PA1-1 (SP reach A) is selected without depending on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. It should be noted that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol does not depend on the operation reservation number, that is, the selection tendency of the variation pattern for the big win is the same regardless of the operation reservation number. In addition, even if the content of the performance is the same, in the case of a big win, the variation is longer by a predetermined time than in the case of a loss in order to execute a performance for notifying the big win or a performance for congratulating the big win. It may be time (for example, when the SP reach A hits the jackpot, the variation time may be 80 seconds, which is 10 seconds longer than the 70 seconds when the SP reach A fails).

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 71 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 2. FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 2. The variation pattern table 2 has different table contents according to the result of the special symbol win/loss determination (big win, loss).

Six types of variation patterns PH2-1 to PH2-6 are set in the variation pattern table 2 for loss. If the result of the judgment of the validity of the first special symbol is "miss", it depends on the number of activated balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the first special symbol and the random number of special symbol fluctuation patterns. Only the fixed fluctuation pattern PH2-3 (normal fluctuation) is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the suitability determination of the second special symbol is "missing", one of the six types of variation patterns PH2-1 to PH2-6 is selected according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value. be. In addition, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the contents of the table to be referred to according to the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the second special symbol are set differently, and even if the special symbol variation pattern random number value is the same, different kinds of variation patterns can be selected according to the number of balls with the second special symbol in operation. Specifically, when the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is one or more, the variation pattern PH2-1 (super shortened variation) in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively short, PH2- 2 (shortened variation) is likely to be selected, and when the number of balls with the second special symbol is 0, the variation pattern PH2-3 (normal variation) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set relatively long are likely to be selected.

Four types of variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-4 are set in the variation pattern table 2 for big hits. If the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol is "jackpot", the special symbol variation pattern random number is used without depending on the jackpot type ("4R conditional specific jackpot", "4R conditional normal jackpot"). Accordingly, one of the three variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3 is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is "jackpot", the jackpot types are "10R conditional specific jackpot 1", "10R conditional specific jackpot 3", "7R conditional specific jackpot", " 3R conditional specific jackpot", according to the special symbol variation pattern random number, one of the three variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3 is selected, and the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot. 2”, one of the four variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-4 is selected according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value. That is, among the plurality of variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-4, the variation pattern PA2-4 (full rotation reach) can be selected only when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 2". It should be noted that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol does not depend on the operation reservation number, that is, the selection tendency of the variation pattern for the big win is the same regardless of the operation reservation number. In addition, even if the content of the performance is the same, in the case of a big win, the variation is longer by a predetermined time than in the case of a loss in order to execute a performance for notifying the big win or a performance for congratulating the big win. It may be time (for example, when the SP reach B results in a big hit, the variation time may be 80 seconds, which is 10 seconds longer than 70 seconds when the SP reach B results in a deviation).

(Variation pattern table 3)
72 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 3. FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 3 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 3. The variation pattern table 3 has different table contents according to the result of the special symbol win/loss determination (big win, loss).

Four types of variation patterns PH3-1 to PH3-4 are set in the variation pattern table 3 for loss. If the result of the judgment of the validity of the first special symbol is "miss", it depends on the number of activated balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the first special symbol and the random number of special symbol fluctuation patterns. Only the fixed fluctuation pattern PH3-2 (normal fluctuation) is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the suitability determination of the second special symbol is "missing", one of the four variation patterns PH3-1 to PH3-4 is selected according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value. be. In addition, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the contents of the table to be referred to according to the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the second special symbol are set differently, and even if the special symbol variation pattern random number value is the same, different kinds of variation patterns can be selected according to the number of balls with the second special symbol in operation. Specifically, when the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is 1 or more, the variation pattern PH3-1 (super shortened variation) in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively short is selected. Easy, and if the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is 0, the variation pattern PH3-2 (normal variation) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set relatively long is likely to be selected.

Three types of variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 are set in the variation pattern table 3 for big hits. If the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol is "jackpot", the special symbol variation pattern random number is used without depending on the jackpot type ("4R conditional specific jackpot", "4R conditional normal jackpot"). Accordingly, one of two types of variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-2 is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the second special symbol success/failure determination is "jackpot", the jackpot types are "10R conditional specific jackpot 1", "10R conditional specific jackpot 3", "7R conditional specific jackpot", " 3R conditional specific jackpot", one of two types of fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-2 is selected according to the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value, and the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot. 2”, one of the three variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3 is selected according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value. That is, among the plurality of variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-3, the variation pattern PA3-3 (full rotation reach) can be selected only when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 2". It should be noted that neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol does not depend on the operation reservation number, that is, the selection tendency of the variation pattern for the big win is the same regardless of the operation reservation number. In addition, even if the content of the performance is the same, in the case of a big win, the variation is longer by a predetermined time than in the case of a loss in order to execute a performance for notifying the big win or a performance for congratulating the big win. It may be time (for example, when the SP reach B results in a big hit, the variation time may be 80 seconds, which is 10 seconds longer than 70 seconds when the SP reach B results in a deviation).

<Decorative pattern>
Next, the decorative pattern of the third embodiment will be explained. 73 and 74 are schematic diagrams showing the decorative symbol jackpot appearance table of the third embodiment. The decorative pattern of this embodiment is composed of a combination of identification elements consisting of numbers and colors (display colors) given to the identification elements. Seven types of numerals from "1" to "7" are set as identification elements of decorative patterns (that is, there are seven types of decorative patterns in total). Each decorative pattern is arranged in the order of "1" to "7" according to the arrangement of the pattern row, and each display in the order of "1" to "7" (or the order of "7" to "1") on the screen. Cycle display or scroll display is performed in the areas Z1, Z2 and Z3, and after "7" it returns to "1" (or returns to "7" again after "1"). Hereinafter, the combination of the three decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped or confirmed stop) on the screen of the effect display device 70 will also be referred to as a "rolling number" or a "stopping number". It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, simply describing "stop display" indicates at least either temporary stop or fixed stop.

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in the decorative symbol jackpot appearance table, each jackpot type is associated with a combination of fixed stop symbols (jackpot jackpot) of the decorative symbols at the time of the jackpot. A jackpot is composed of a combination of stop modes "*.*.*" in which three decorative symbols of the same number (identification element) are aligned (*: decorative symbols of arbitrary numbers). In other words, a big hit means a combination in which all the symbol rows are composed of decorative symbols (coordinates) of the same number. In this embodiment, among the jackpot numbers, the double number of "7" is also called a "special jackpot number", and the number of double numbers other than "7" (that is, "1", "2", "3", Doubles of "4", "5" and "6") are also referred to as "non-special big hits". 73 and 74 is a combination of the decorative symbols at the time of the big win and the fixed stop symbols displayed at the end of the variable display in the case where the later-described big win type determination effect is not performed, or the big win. A combination of fixed stop symbols displayed in the jackpot type determination effect when the type determination effect is performed (displayed by changing from the combination of the fixed stop symbols displayed at the end of the variable display due to the jackpot type determination effect, Alternatively, it is a combination of fixed stop symbols that are displayed without change, and represents a true jackpot outcome (to be described later). Here, when the jackpot type determination effect is performed, at the end of the variable display, a combination of decorative symbols that is different from the combination of fixed stop symbols (true jackpot) (a temporary jackpot that will be described later) ) is displayed for confirmation stop.

FIG. 73 is a decorative symbol jackpot number table 1 referred to when the game state is the normal game state (non-electric support state). First, when the game state is the normal game state, if the first special symbol "4R conditional specific jackpot" is won, only the double number of "7" is selected as the jackpot outcome. In addition, when the first special symbol "4R conditional normal jackpot" is won, the jackpot numbers are "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", and "7". " is selected. Therefore, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is drawn in the normal game state, even if the jackpot roll is "7" (special jackpot roll), the special figure 1 highest profit jackpot (4R It is uncertain whether or not you have won the conditional specific jackpot. On the other hand, when the second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 1" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 2" is won, only doubles of "7" are selected as jackpot numbers. Also, if you win the second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" or "7R conditional specific jackpot", "1", "2", "3", "4", " 5" or "6" corolles are selected. Also, if you win the second special symbol "3R conditional specific jackpot", you can select any of "1", "2", "4", "5", and "6" as the jackpot. is selected. Therefore, it is rare to draw the second special symbol big hit in the normal game state, but when the big hit number is "7" (special big hit number), the special figure 2 maximum profit Winning the jackpot (10R conditional specific jackpot) is definite. As a modification, if the second special symbol jackpot is drawn when the game state is the normal game state (non-electric support state), the jackpot will be "7" regardless of the type of jackpot. It may be doubled (special big hit).

Here, FIG. 75 shows a case where a special big hit (double number of "7") is stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the subject of the game in the normal game state. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the production of. In this embodiment, when the jackpot with the first special symbol is drawn in the normal game state, as shown in (A) in the drawing, the special jackpot is stopped and displayed via the full rotation reach in the variable display. Alternatively, as shown in (B) in the figure, there are cases in which the special big hit is stopped and displayed via the SP reach in the variable display. Here, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern table 1 for the normal game state (see FIG. 70), when the 4R conditional specific jackpot of the first special symbol is won, the variation pattern of the first special symbol While there is a possibility that PA1-10 (full rotation reach) is selected, if the first special symbol 4R conditional normal jackpot is won, the first special symbol variation pattern PA1-10 (full rotation reach ) is not likely to be selected. Therefore, as shown in (A) in the figure, when the special jackpot is stopped and displayed after the full rotation reach is performed in the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. , It is determined that you have won the 4R conditional specific jackpot (special figure 1 highest profit jackpot). On the other hand, as shown in the special symbol variation pattern table 1 for the normal game state (see FIG. 70), even if the first special symbol "4R conditional specific jackpot" is won, the first special symbol "4R Even if the conditional normal jackpot" is won, there is a possibility that one of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-9 (SP reach) of the first special symbol will be selected. Therefore, as shown in (B) in the figure, after the SP reach is performed in the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, when the special jackpot number is stopped and displayed, It is uncertain whether a special jackpot with 4R conditions (special figure 1 highest profit jackpot) or a normal jackpot with 4R conditions is won. As a modification, after the SP reach is performed in the variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, if the special jackpot number is stopped and displayed, the 4R conditional specific jackpot ( It may be a specification that the winning of the special figure 1 highest profit jackpot) is denied, that is, that the winning of the normal jackpot with 4R conditions is determined. Further, as a further modification, when the first special symbol "4R conditional specific jackpot" is won, via SP reach, "1", "2", "3", "4", " 5" and "6" may be configured to be stopped and displayed (that is, a non-special jackpot outcome is selected). Via special jackpot rolls ("7" double rolls) or non-special jackpot rolls ("1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6" double rolls) When is displayed stopped, it is not notified that it is a ``4R conditional specific jackpot'' at the start of the special game (jackpot start demo) to be executed after that, but during the execution of the special game (round game or jackpot end demo). , it may be configured to notify that it is a "4R conditional specific jackpot" (if the special jackpot is stopped and displayed via the full rotation reach in the variation display, it will be executed after that From the start of the special game (jackpot start demo), it is notified that it is a "special jackpot with 4R conditions").

FIG. 74 is a decorative symbol jackpot output table 2 that is referred to when the game state is the time-saving game state or the probability variable game state (electrical sapo state). First, when the game state is a time-saving game state or a variable probability game state, if the first special symbol "4R conditional specific jackpot" is won, the jackpot is "3" or "5". is selected. In addition, when the first special pattern "4R conditional normal jackpot" is won, one of the double numbers "1", "2", "4" and "6" is selected as the jackpot. be. Therefore, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is drawn in the time-saving game state or the variable probability game state, the special jackpot roll ("7" double roll) is not selected as the jackpot roll. On the other hand, when the second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 1" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 2" is won, only doubles of "7" are selected as jackpot numbers. In addition, when the second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" or "7R conditional specific jackpot" is won, double numbers of "3" or "5" are selected as jackpot numbers. In addition, when the second special pattern "3R conditional specific jackpot" is won, one of the doublets of "1", "2", "4" and "6" is selected as the jackpot. be. Therefore, if the second special symbol jackpot is drawn in the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state, and the jackpot is the special jackpot (Zoro of "7"), the special figure 2 highest profit jackpot (10R Winning the conditional specific jackpot) becomes definitive. The second special symbol big hit shown here is a true big hit shown below, that is, a combination of fixed stop symbols displayed in the big hit type determination effect when the big hit type determination effect is performed ( It is a true jackpot number), which is different from the combination of fixed stop symbols (temporary jackpot number to be described later) displayed at the end of the variable display when the big hit type determination effect is performed.

It should be noted that, among the three rows of decorative patterns, if the left and right decorative patterns stop at the reach eye, depending on the type of the reach eye (the type of left and right row decorative patterns), a big hit different expectations. As an example, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher for "1" and "5" than for "2", "4" and "6". Also, the expectation of a big hit is higher with the reach number of ``3'', and the expectation of a big hit is higher with the reach number of ``7'' (referred to as ``7 tenpai'') than the reach number of ``3''. . In other words, if two out of the three rows of decorative patterns are aligned and one more is matched, the reach (7 tenpai), which becomes a special jackpot (Zoro of “7”), is achieved by matching two of the three rows of decorative patterns. The degree of expectation for a big hit is set relatively higher than that of a reach eye that becomes a non-special big hit (double eyes other than "7") if one is aligned. In addition, as a modification, a specific condition (if the game state is a time-saving game state or a variable game state (electric sapo state), if it is a specific variable display, if it passes through a specific effect, etc.) is satisfied Depending on the situation, when the 7 tenpai is established during the execution of the variable display, it may be a specification that the jackpot is confirmed (then the game is always shifted to the special game). Furthermore, if the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a variable probability gaming state (electric sapo state), a predetermined effect (for example, a special zone effect or parts charge MAX described later) is executed before reaching the reach state, After that, when the decorative pattern in the left row temporarily stops at "7", even if the decorative patterns in the right and middle rows are changing (not temporarily stopped and the tenpai is not established) (Even if there is), it may be a specification that a big hit is confirmed (after that, it always shifts to a special game).

<Production during the big hit>
Next, the effect during the big hit of the third embodiment will be described. As described above, the performance during the jackpot is performed during the jackpot start demonstration (during the opening game), the round performance during the round game, and the jackpot start demonstration (during the ending game). Including jackpot end demonstration performance.

≪Round production≫
First, the round production pattern will be explained. FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing a round effect pattern table. The round effect pattern table shows the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type (type of pattern group) and the round effect pattern. In this embodiment, referring to the round effect pattern table, one round effect pattern corresponding to the jackpot type (symbol group type) selected in the special symbol lottery process is selected from among a plurality of types of round effect patterns. It is determined.

In the round production pattern table, there are 6 types of round production patterns, "Exciting Bonus", "Happy Bonus", "Super Longevity Bonus", "Longevity Bonus (10R)", "Longevity Bonus (7R)", "Celebration Bonus". ” is set. When the jackpot type is the "4R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group A)", the round effect pattern "great bonus" is selected. When the jackpot type is "normal jackpot with 4R condition (symbol group B)", "joy bonus" is selected as the round effect pattern. When the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C)" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D)", "longevity bonus" is selected as the round effect pattern. When the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group E)", "Kotobuki bonus (10R)" is selected as the round effect pattern. When the jackpot type is "7R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group F)", "Kotobuki bonus (7R)" is selected as the round effect pattern. The longevity bonus (10R) is a longevity bonus corresponding to the 10R special game, and the longevity bonus (7R) is a longevity bonus corresponding to the 7R special game. Each Kotobuki bonus is configured as a round effect with the same effect tendency, but the effect result of the round promotion effect performed in a predetermined round (for example, the 7th round) is different (details will be described later). When the jackpot type is "3R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group G)", "celebration bonus" is selected as the round effect pattern. Each round effect pattern has effect contents corresponding to the contents stored in the above-described large prize winning opening operation pattern (regular number of rounds, large winning prize opening and opening mode of the specific area 548, etc.).

≪Big hit start demonstration production≫
Next, the jackpot start demonstration effect pattern will be described. FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot start demonstration effect pattern table. In the jackpot start demonstration effect pattern table, correspondence relationships between jackpot types (symbol group types) and jackpot start demonstration effect patterns are set. In this embodiment, one jackpot start demonstration effect pattern corresponding to the jackpot type (symbol group type) is determined from a plurality of types of jackpot start demonstration effect patterns by referring to the jackpot start demonstration effect pattern table. .

In the jackpot start demo effect pattern table, there are 5 types of jackpot start demo effect patterns, "Great joy bonus start", "Joy bonus start", "Super longevity bonus start", "Kotobuki bonus start", and "Celebration bonus start". is set. In the big-win start demonstration effect pattern table, the execution time of the big-win start demonstration effect corresponding to each big-win start demonstration effect pattern is stored.

When the jackpot type is "4R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group A)", "joy bonus start" is selected as the jackpot start demonstration effect pattern. This "excitement bonus start" is a jackpot start demonstration effect pattern suggesting the start of a round game based on the "excitement bonus", and the execution time is set to "15 seconds".

When the jackpot type is "normal jackpot with 4R condition (symbol group B)", "joy bonus start" is selected as the jackpot start demonstration effect pattern. This "joy bonus start" is a jackpot start demonstration effect pattern suggesting the start of a round game based on the "joy bonus", and "12 seconds" is set as the execution time.

When the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C)" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D)", "longevity bonus" is selected as the jackpot start demonstration effect pattern. "Super longevity bonus start" is a jackpot start demonstration effect pattern suggesting the start of a round game based on the "super longevity bonus", and "64.5 seconds" is set as the execution time.

When the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group E)" or "7R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group F)", "Kotobuki bonus start" is selected as the jackpot start demonstration effect pattern. "Kotobuki bonus start" is a jackpot start demonstration effect pattern suggesting the start of a round game based on the "Kotobuki bonus", and "52.5 seconds" is set as the execution time.

When the jackpot type is "3R conditional specific jackpot (symbol group G)", "celebration bonus" is selected as the jackpot start demonstration effect pattern. "Celebration bonus start" is a jackpot start demonstration effect pattern suggesting the start of a round game based on the "celebration bonus", and "40 seconds" is set as the execution time.

Next, the flow of each jackpot start demonstration effect will be described. FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of each jackpot start demonstration effect. "Accessory Appearance" in the drawing is an effect in which a predetermined movable accessory appears at the same time as the occurrence of a big hit. "Bonus display" is an effect for displaying the name of the round effect pattern to be started (bonus name) to notify that a round game based on the round effect pattern will be performed. The "bonus type determination effect", which will be described in detail later, is a effect of drawing lots again for the jackpot type in the jackpot start demonstration. The “V winning instruction” is an effect for instructing the game ball to enter the specific area 548 . "Right shot instruction" is an effect of displaying a right shot image instructing the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area PA2. The “song selection effect” is an effect of selecting a player's favorite song from a plurality of songs (songs played in a round game) by operating a button. "Round start" means that the first round of the jackpot game is started.

At the start of the great joy bonus, the production progresses in the order of the appearance of the character, the display of the great joy bonus, the V winning instruction, and the start of the round. For the start of the joy bonus, the production progresses in the order of display of the joy bonus→instruction to hit to the right→start of the round. The start of the super longevity bonus progresses in the order of jackpot type determination effect -> super longevity bonus display -> music selection display -> V winning instruction -> round start. The start of the longevity bonus progresses in the order of jackpot type determination performance -> longevity bonus display -> V winning instruction -> round start. The start of the congratulatory bonus progresses in the order of jackpot type determination effect->celebration bonus display->V winning instruction->round start.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the second special pattern jackpot start demonstration production, a jackpot type re-lottery production (jackpot type determination production) is performed, but in the first special pattern jackpot start demonstration production, a jackpot type re-lottery is performed. Production (jackpot type determination production) is not performed. That is, only when the second special symbol jackpot is drawn, a jackpot type determination effect (details will be described later) for re-drawing the jackpot type is performed. As a modification, even if the jackpot of the second special pattern is drawn, if the jackpot is drawn via a specific production (for example, full rotation reach), the jackpot type determination production is not performed, and the super longevity bonus is displayed. The production may be progressed in the order of music selection display → V winning instruction → round start, especially when the game state is a time-saving game state (when it is a “chance mode”) or the game state is a variable probability game state. It is preferable to make such a configuration when the jackpot of the second special symbol is drawn at times (when in the "rush mode").

≪Demonstration at the end of the jackpot≫
Next, the jackpot end demonstration effect pattern will be described. FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot end demonstration effect pattern table. The jackpot end demonstration effect pattern table includes the jackpot type (type of pattern group), the game state when the jackpot is won, and whether or not the game ball enters the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game (whether or not V wins). ) and the jackpot end demonstration effect pattern are set. In this embodiment, a jackpot end demonstration effect pattern table is referenced, and a jackpot type (symbol group type), a game state when a jackpot is won, and execution of a jackpot game are selected from a plurality of types of jackpot start demonstration effect patterns. One jackpot end demonstration effect pattern corresponding to presence/absence of entry of a game ball into the specific area 548 in the center is determined.

In the jackpot end demonstration effect pattern table, ``chance rush A'', ``chance rush B'', ``rush rush A'', ``rush rush B'', and ``rush continuation'' are set as five types of jackpot end demonstration effect patterns. ing. In addition, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration effect corresponding to each big win end demonstration effect pattern is stored in the big win end demonstration effect pattern table. The execution time of the jackpot end demonstration effect (jackpot end demo time) is the time set from the end of execution of the final round game to the end of execution of the special game. Here, the end of execution of the final round game means the time after the final round game is completed (after the action of closing the big winning opening 54 is started) and after the final round game. This is when the set interval time (end demonstration waiting time) has passed. That is, the execution time of the jackpot end demonstration effect (jackpot end demonstration time) is the execution time measured from the time when the interval time after the end of the final round game has passed. As described above, the interval time is the waiting time (big winning opening closing time) set between each round game or between the final round game and the jackpot end demo. In this embodiment, for example, 2 seconds is set as the interval time (round game waiting time, jackpot end demo waiting time). In addition, the interval time (round game waiting time) set between each round game and the interval time (jackpot end demo waiting time) set between the final round game and the jackpot end demo are different times. can be set to

(When winning V)
First, when the game ball can enter the specific area 548 during the jackpot game, the jackpot ends according to the game state when the jackpot is won, regardless of the jackpot type (type of pattern group). A demonstration production pattern is set. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the big win is the normal game state, "Rush rush A" is set, and if the game state at the time of winning the big win is the time-saving game state, "Rush rush B" is set and the big win is won. If the game state at the time of winning is the probability variable game state, "rush continuation" is set. "Rush entry A" is an effect suggesting entry into the rush mode after the end of the jackpot game triggered by the jackpot in the normal mode (normal game state), and the execution time is set to "8 seconds". ``Rush entry B'' is an effect suggesting entry into the rush mode after the completion of the jackpot game triggered by the jackpot in the chance mode (time-saving game state), and the execution time is set to ``9 seconds''. "Rush continuation" is an effect suggesting that a rush mode (probability variable game state) jackpot win is used as a trigger to shift to the rush mode again after the jackpot game ends, and "10 seconds" is set as the execution time. It should be noted that "rush rush A" and "rush rush B" are common in that a rush rush screen that suggests entering rush mode is displayed, but "rush rush A" is for forgetting to take a prepaid card. The difference is that a prepaid card warning display for calling attention to prevent theft is superimposed on the rush mode entry screen. Therefore, the execution time of "rush rush A" is set to be relatively longer than the execution time of "rush rush B". Note that the prepaid card warning display is not displayed even in "Continue Rush". As a modification, the prepaid card warning display may be displayed not only in "rush rush A" but also "rush rush B", but even in that case, the prepaid card warning display may not be displayed in "rush continuation". It is preferred to configure

(When non-V winning)
On the other hand, when the game ball cannot enter the specific area 548 during the big win game, the big win is made according to the game state at the time of winning the big win without depending on the big win type (type of pattern group). An end demonstration effect pattern is set. Specifically, if the game state at the time of winning the jackpot is the normal game state, "chance rush A" is set, and if the game state at the time of the jackpot win is the time-saving game state or the variable game state, "chance rush B" is set. set. "Chance Inrush A" is a jackpot end demonstration effect pattern suggesting that the jackpot in the normal mode (normal game state) will be used as a trigger to shift to the chance mode after the jackpot game ends, and the execution time is set to "11 seconds". It is "Chance entry B" is a jackpot end demonstration effect pattern that suggests shifting to the chance mode after the jackpot game ends with a chance mode (time-saving game state) or rush mode (variable probability game state) as a trigger, and is executed. "12 seconds" is set as the time.

[Various productions]
In the pachinko game machine PM of the third embodiment having such a configuration, as described above, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game. is configured to In the following, among various game effects, "jackpot type determination effect", "first reward acquisition effect", "second reward acquisition effect", and "special button effect" will be described.

<Jackpot type decision production>
First, the big hit type determination effect will be described. FIG. 80 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the big hit type determination effect. The jackpot type determination effect is once notified by the stop number (jackpot number) of the decorative pattern when the variable display is stopped when the result of the judgment of the second special pattern is a big hit in the time-saving game state or the probability variable game state. The result (big win type) is re-lotted in the big win start demonstration, and the result of the re-lottery is notified.

The jackpot types of the second special symbols that are subject to re-lottery in the jackpot type determination production are 10R jackpot (10R conditional specific jackpot 1 to 3), 7R jackpot (7R conditional specific jackpot), and 3R jackpot (3R It is roughly divided into conditional specific jackpot). This jackpot type corresponds to the above-mentioned round production pattern, and the 10R jackpot (10R conditional specific jackpots 1 and 2) corresponds to the super longevity bonus, 10R jackpot (10R conditional specific jackpot 3) and 7R jackpot. (7R conditional specific jackpot) corresponds to Kotobuki bonus, and 3R jackpot (3R conditional specific jackpot) corresponds to celebration bonus. Therefore, in the jackpot type determination effect, as a result of the jackpot type re-lottery, the name of the bonus indicating the jackpot type of the second special symbol (super longevity bonus, Kotobuki bonus, celebration bonus) is displayed. , ``10R jackpot or 7R jackpot'' and ``3R jackpot'' is suggested or reported. However, even if the jackpot type is re-lottered, in fact, since the jackpot type is determined in advance in the lottery process of the second special symbol, the production development (result of re-lottery) accordingly.

As shown in FIG. 80, the jackpot type determination effect includes a re-lottery effect, a button effect, a character object effect, and a bonus display effect.

In the re-lottery effect, the names of the round effect patterns (super longevity bonus, longevity bonus, celebration bonus) are displayed in order on the screen, and one of "10R big win", "10R big win or 7R big win", and "3R big win" is displayed. It is a production that arouses which jackpot type has been won. The types of re-lottery effects include a premium re-lottery effect and a normal re-lottery effect. The normal re-lottery performance is a re-lottery performance in which one of "10R big win", "10R big win or 7R big win", and "3R big win" is derived as a result of the re-lottery. On the other hand, the premium re-lottery effect is a fixed effect in which only the "10R jackpot" is uniquely derived as a result of the re-lottery. That is, when the premium re-lottery effect is performed, it is confirmed that the "10R jackpot" is won at that time. In addition, in this third embodiment, when the jackpot type of the second special symbol is "10R conditional specific jackpot 2", proceed to the production route (production route 1 described later) in which the premium re-lottery production is performed, When the jackpot type of the second special symbol is any one of "10R conditional specific jackpot 1", "10R conditional specific jackpot 3", "7R conditional specific jackpot", and "3R conditional specific jackpot" , proceed through the production route (production routes 2 to 4 described later) in which a normal re-lottery production is performed.

The button effect is configured as an operation request effect in which a predetermined effect progresses by operating the effect button 15 by the player. In this embodiment, when the player operates the production button 15 in accordance with the instructions on the screen, the result of the re-lottery is notified by the bonus display production immediately after the performance of the character product. The button effects include a single button effect (first button effect) performed in response to the premium re-lottery effect, and a repeated button effect (second button effect) performed in response to the normal re-lottery effect. .

The role production is a production in which one of a plurality of movable accessories provided on the board operates at the timing when the production button 15 is operated. In this embodiment, the plurality of movable accessories include a character role that imitates the main character and a logo role that imitates the logo indicating the model name of the gaming machine. Here, when the above-mentioned premium re-lottery effect (button hit effect) is performed, the character role product effect is always executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned normal re-lottery effect (button repeated effect) is performed, depending on the result of the re-lottery (mode of bonus display effect), the character role effect is executed and the logo role is performed. It is sorted into a case where the performance is executed and a case where no character performance is executed.

The bonus display effect is an effect for notifying which jackpot type has been won as a result of the re-lottery effect by the name of the round effect pattern (bonus) to be performed from now on.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of performance routes 1 to 4 are set as the performance route of the jackpot type determination performance, and the result of the re-lottery is derived via different performance processes for each of the performance routes. become. First, when "10R conditional specific jackpot 2" is won, the presentation progresses in the order of premium re-lottery presentation → button hit presentation → character role presentation → super longevity bonus display (drawing route 1). In the super longevity bonus display, the bonus name "super longevity bonus" is displayed on the screen to notify that the 10R jackpot has been won. When "10R conditional specific jackpot 1" is won, the production progresses in the order of normal re-lottery production → button repeated production → character role production → super longevity bonus display (production route 2). In this way, "10R conditional specific jackpot 1" and "10R conditional specific jackpot 2" display the same bonus name "super longevity bonus", but the types of re-lottery effects are different. The kind of re-lottery performance is made different according to the kind of "10R conditional specific big win". Also, if you win the "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" or "7R conditional specific jackpot", the production progresses in the order of normal re-lottery production → button repeated production → logo role production → Kotobuki bonus display (production route 3). In this way, the "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" has the same type of re-lottery effect as the "10R conditional specific jackpot 1", which is the same "10R conditional specific jackpot", but the type of bonus name. are different, and both the type of re-lottery effect and the type of bonus name are different from the same "10R conditional specific jackpot 2", which is the same "10R conditional specific jackpot 2". In addition, in the Kotobuki bonus display, the bonus name "Kotobuki bonus" is displayed on the screen to notify that the 10R big win or the 7R big win has been won. When the "3R conditional specific jackpot" is won, the production progresses in the order of normal re-lottery production → repeated button hitting production → congratulatory bonus display (production route 4). In the celebration bonus display, a bonus name "celebration bonus" is displayed on the screen to notify that the 3R jackpot has been won.

Here, a description will be given of how the performance routes are distributed for each big hit. In this embodiment, after the temporary jackpot is fixed and stopped at the end of the variable display of the decorative symbols, it is changed to the true jackpot and displayed (fixed stop display) after the re-lottery effect (re-lottery Since the production is a production performed in the jackpot start demonstration, that is, the production is in a situation where the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the true jackpot number displayed in this re-lottery production is also displayed as a fixed stop display. ). It should be noted that the big winning numbers shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 correspond to true big winning numbers. First, if the provisional jackpot is "7" Zoro, when moving to the production route 1 (super longevity bonus) (however, the variation pattern PA3-3 (full rotation reach) can be selected In the case of "10R conditional specific jackpot 2") and when transitioning to production route 2 (super longevity bonus) (however, "10R conditional specific jackpot 1" in which the variation pattern PA3-3 (full rotation reach) is not selected ) and On the other hand, if any of the temporary jackpot numbers "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6" match, the production route 2 ( Super longevity bonus), production route 3 (longevity bonus), production route 4 (celebration bonus). Here, when the true jackpot outcome after the re-lottery is equal to "7", it is determined that the performance route 1 (super longevity bonus) or the performance route 2 (super longevity bonus). In addition, when the true jackpot after the re-lottery is equal to "3" or "5", it is determined that the performance route 3 (Kotobuki bonus) is selected. In addition, if the true jackpot after the re-lottery matches with any of "1", "2", "4", and "6", it is a production route 4 (celebration bonus). Something is certain. In this embodiment, the true big-hit number does not fall below the temporary big-hit number, and the temporary big-hit number does not change and is fixed and stopped as the true big-hit number. It is limited to the case where the fixed stop display is made in the form of a change in the number of the big win and the number of the true big win. Therefore, in the production route 1, if the provisional jackpot number is "7", and the production route 2 is the provisional jackpot number "1", "2", "3", "4", In the case of any one of "5", "6" and "7", the effect route 3 is a temporary jackpot roll of "1", "2", "3", "4" and "5". , "6", and in production route 4, the provisional jackpot outcome is either "1", "2", "4", or "6". It is a directing route that can be shifted to. In other words, in the production route 1, double numbers of "7" are fixed and stopped to be displayed as temporary jackpot numbers, and after the re-lottery, double numbers of "7" are fixed and stopped to be displayed as true jackpot numbers. becomes (the jackpot does not change). In addition, in the production route 2, double numbers of "7" are fixed and stopped as a provisional big win, and after the re-lottery, double numbers of "7" are fixed and stopped as a true big win (big hit). (the number does not change), and one of the temporary jackpot numbers "1" to "6" is fixed and stopped, and after the re-lottery, the true jackpot number is "7". There is a case where the number is determined and stopped (the number of big hits changes). In addition, in the production route 3, double numbers of ``3'' or ``5'' are fixed and stopped as temporary jackpot numbers, and after the re-lottery, double numbers of ``3'' or ``5'' are displayed as true jackpot numbers. is fixed and stopped (the jackpot number does not change), and one of the temporary jackpot numbers "1", "2", "4", and "6" is fixed and stopped, After the re-lottery, there is a case where double numbers of "3" or "5" are displayed fixedly and stopped as true jackpot numbers (jackpot numbers change). In addition, in the production route 4, any one of ``1'', ``2'', ``4'' and ``6'' is fixed and stopped as a provisional jackpot, and after the re-lottery, the true jackpot is displayed. As a result, any one of "1", "2", "4", and "6" is fixed and stopped (no change in the jackpot number). Therefore, in this embodiment, if the tentative big hit number is "7", the 10R jackpot is confirmed, if the double number is "3" or "5", the 7R jackpot or more is confirmed, "1", A 3R jackpot or higher is confirmed if the numbers are doubles of "2", "4", and "6". In this way, even if one of the double numbers of "1" to "7" is fixed and stopped as a temporary jackpot, it is possible to select one of the production routes 1 to 4 in the re-lottery by the jackpot type determination production. It is distributed to one of the routes, and whether the current big win is a super longevity bonus (10R big win), a longevity bonus (10R big win or 7R big win), or a congratulatory bonus (3R big win) is reported. Here, when moving to the production route 1 (super longevity bonus), a predetermined high-expectation production (for example, a premium production in which a big hit is confirmed, or a production related to the above-mentioned “END”) ”, even if it passes through other effects, it may be shifted very rarely (with a low probability compared to the case where the predetermined high-expectation-level effect is not passed). In other words, if the number of "7" is doubled without going through a predetermined high-expectation production, the transition to the production route 2 (super longevity bonus), or when going through a predetermined high-expectation production Shift to production route 2 (super longevity bonus) with a high probability compared to . In this embodiment, the second special symbol jackpot types are 10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group C), 10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group D), 10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group E), 7R. In the case of a conditional specific jackpot (symbol group F), as shown in FIGS. 70 to 72, according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value, the variation display time (variation time) can take the same time value. is configured as As a modification, it is possible to select a fixed variation pattern (variation time) regardless of the jackpot type, or to select the same variation time with a different variation pattern. In addition, as a further modification, a premium re-lottery (production route 1) is executed when the jackpot numbers are "1", "2", "3", "4", "5" and "6". You may

When the round game is started after the bonus type determination performance (big hit start demo) is completed, the round game corresponding to the round performance pattern (bonus name) notified in the bonus type determination performance is executed. It should be noted that, as a result of the re-lottery by the jackpot type determination effect, if the "Kotobuki bonus" is derived (when the Kotobuki bonus is displayed), the promotion effect (round promotion effect) is performed during the round game, The true jackpot type (10R jackpot or 7R jackpot) is notified in the promotion performance. That is, when "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" is won in the special pattern lottery, the promotion production succeeds and the "10R jackpot" is confirmed, and the special pattern lottery is "7R conditional specific jackpot". , it is determined that the promotion effect fails and the "7R jackpot" is won. As a modified example, when a ``special jackpot with a 7R condition'' is won in a special symbol lottery, the promotion performance may be configured not to be executed in the first place, and in such a configuration, the promotion performance is executed. It is desirable to confirm that it is a "10R jackpot" at this time (in other words, promotion effect is executed only when "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" is won).

<First reward acquisition effect>
Next, the first reward acquisition effect will be described. FIG. 81 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the first reward acquisition effect. The first reward acquisition effect presents to the player in advance that there is a possibility that a specific high-expectation effect will occur as a reward given to the player during execution of the variable display, The effect is whether or not the presented reward (specific high-expectation effect) can be acquired by the player's button operation. This first reward acquisition effect can be executed in the variable display when the game state is the normal game state (low-probability low-base state). In the following, the specific high-expectation-level effect to be rewarded in the first reward-acquisition effect is also referred to as "specific high-expectation-level effect".

FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect and the type of reward (specific high-expectation effect). In FIG. 82, the horizontal column indicates the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect, and the vertical column indicates the type of reward (specific high-expectation effect).

The execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect includes the execution of the first half of the pseudo 1 fluctuation, the second half of the pseudo 1 fluctuation, the first half of the pseudo 2 fluctuation, the second half of the pseudo 2 fluctuation, and the first half of the pseudo 3 fluctuation. , during execution of the second half of pseudo 3 fluctuation, and during execution of SP reach A. Each pseudo-fluctuation is divided into the first half of the pseudo-fluctuation and the latter half of the pseudo-fluctuation. Pseudo 1 fluctuation, Pseudo 2 fluctuation, Pseudo 3 fluctuation) are called Pseudo fluctuation first half (Pseudo 1 fluctuation first half, Pseudo 2 fluctuation first half, Pseudo 3 fluctuation first half), and at the end of each pseudo fluctuation The nearer latter halves are referred to as pseudo fluctuation latter half (pseudo 1 fluctuation latter half, pseudo 2 fluctuation latter half, pseudo 3 fluctuation latter half).

Here, the variable effect pattern (sub-variable pattern) defines execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect, and the first reward acquisition effect can be executed at one or a plurality of execution timings during the variable display. ing. At this time, as shown in FIG. 82, the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is divided into an execution interval A, an execution interval B, and an execution interval C in chronological order. The execution interval A is an interval including the first half of the pseudo 1 fluctuation, the latter half of the pseudo 1 fluctuation, the first half of the pseudo 2 fluctuation, and the latter half of the pseudo 2 fluctuation. Execution interval B is an interval including the first half of pseudo 3 fluctuations and the latter half of pseudo 3 fluctuations. Execution section C is a section including character reach (SP reach A). In this embodiment, the first reward acquisition effect is not executed multiple times within one execution section A, B, or C (because there is only one type of selection candidate reward in the effect section C, it is executed multiple times). is impossible), and if the execution intervals A, B, and C are different, it is possible to execute the first reward acquisition effect once in each of the execution intervals A, B, and C (the variation It is possible to execute the first reward acquisition effect multiple times during display). In other words, the first reward acquisition effect is not executed in a compound manner within one execution section A, B, or C, but if the execution sections A, B, and C are different, it is compounded during one variation display. may be executed automatically. However, if the first reward acquisition effect is performed once each in the effect sections A and C, the "special zone effect" is not rewarded in the effect section A (the "special zone effect" is not provided in the effect section C). This is to prevent the same reward from appearing redundantly in a plurality of performance sections A and C).

The types of specific high-expectation-level effects include red reserve change effects, gold reserve change effects, special zone effects, 7 tenpai effects, parts charge MAX, END reach (SP reach C), and next notice effects. Each specific high-expectation-level effect is basically a high-expectation-level effect scheduled to be performed during execution of the variable display. That is, one or a plurality of high-expectation effects specified in the scenario of the variable effect pattern (sub-variable pattern) are candidates for the reward. In other words, by presenting in advance the high-expectation performance specified in the scenario of the variable production pattern as a reward, there will be a discrepancy between the performance result of the first reward acquisition effect and the actual game result (high expectation obtained as a reward). Adjustments are made so that the contradiction that the performance was not actually performed does not occur. However, when presenting a specific high-expectation production as false information (when performing a failure notification production described later), a high-expectation production that is not specified in the scenario of the fluctuation production pattern (sub-variation pattern) as a reward It may be presented (there is no discrepancy between the game result and the production result).

Here, the contents of the specific high-expectation performance that is the target of the reward will be described in order. The red pending change effect is a effect in which the display mode of the changing image (the changing image displayed in the changing image display area 720) changes to red. The gold reserve change effect is a effect in which the display mode of the changing image changes to gold. It should be noted that the display mode of the image during fluctuation is set so that the gold display mode has a relatively higher expectation of a big win (big hit expectation) in the variation display than the red display mode. The special zone effect is a effect of shifting the current stay stage to a special stage (special zone) having a different background image or the like. The 7 tenpai production is a production in which the decorative pattern becomes a reach with a specific pattern (“7” pattern). Parts Charge MAX confirms that by collecting all the predetermined number (7) of parts that make up a character that imitates a robot, the robot will be completed and will develop into a highly anticipated reach where the robot will appear. It is a performance. END reach is a reach effect in which a character called END (a specific element to be described later) appears. The next announcement effect is an effect in which a next announcement message is displayed on the screen, and then an SP reach is developed.

As shown in FIG. 82, each execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is associated with one or a plurality of specific high-expectation-level effects as reward candidates. Here, in the third embodiment, the types (the number of types) of specific high-expectation-level effects that are candidates for rewards can differ depending on the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effects. Specifically, the first half of the pseudo 1 fluctuation and the first half of the pseudo 2 fluctuation are associated with red reserve change effect, gold reserve change effect, parts charge MAX, and END reach as reward candidates. The latter half of the pseudo 1 fluctuation and the latter half of the pseudo 2 fluctuation are associated with the red reserve change effect, the gold reserve change effect, the special zone effect, the parts charge MAX, and the END reach as reward candidates. The pseudo 3 fluctuation first half is associated with 7 tenpai effects as reward candidates. The second half of the pseudo 3 fluctuation is associated with the next notice effect as a reward candidate. SP reach A is associated with a special zone effect as a reward candidate. Then, at each execution timing, one or a plurality of high-expectation-level performances that are candidates for the reward are selected by lottery, and presented to the player as a specific high-expectation-level performance to be notified in advance. be done. In other words, one reward (specific high-expectation effect) is always presented at one execution timing.

Here, as a characteristic point of this embodiment, the tendency of the type of specific high-expectation effect presented as a reward when the execution timing is during execution of the pseudo-variation display, and the execution timing is during execution of SP reach A In this case, the tendency of the type of specific high-expectation performance presented as a reward is different. In addition, the number of types (5 types) of specific high-expectation effects that are candidates for rewards when the execution timing is during execution of the pseudo-variation display, and candidates for rewards when the execution timing is during execution of SP reach A The number of types (one type) of the specific high expectation level production is different. In other words, there are more reward variations during execution of pseudo-variation display than during execution of SP reach A. The reason for this is that, in order to produce a rising performance as the pseudo-variation display develops into SP reach, it is necessary to raise the reward rank (jackpot expectation) as the variation display progresses, but a high rank This is because if the remuneration for is unnecessarily increased, the balance of the presentation may be lost and the value of the remuneration may decrease.

Furthermore, when the first reward acquisition effect is performed during the execution of the pseudo-variation display, the first reward is obtained during the execution of the pseudo-3-variation display rather than during the execution of the pseudo-1-variation display or the pseudo-2-variation display. It has become easier to perform production. At this time, when the execution timing is during the execution of the pseudo 1-variation display or the pseudo 2-variation display, the tendency of the type of the specific high-expectation effect presented as a reward, and the execution timing is during the execution of the pseudo 3-variation display. The tendency of the type of specific high-expectation performance presented as a reward in the case is different. In addition, the number of types (5 types) of specific high-expectation effects that are candidates for rewards when the execution timing is during execution of the pseudo 1-variation display or the pseudo 2-variation display, and the execution timing is during execution of the pseudo 3-variation display In this case, the number of types (two types) of specific high-expectation-level presentations that are candidates for rewards is different. In other words, there are more reward variations during the execution of the pseudo 1-variation display or the pseudo 2-variation display than during the execution of the pseudo 3-variation display. The reason for this is that, in order to create an upstart effect as the number of pseudo-variation displays increases, it is necessary to raise the reward rank (jackpot expectation) as the number of pseudo-variation displays increases. This is because if the remuneration is excessively increased, the balance of the production will be lost and the value of the remuneration may be lowered.

Furthermore, in the case where the first reward acquisition effect is performed during the execution of the variable display, the It is configured such that other high-expectation-level performances with higher big-hit expectations than the pre-presented reward (specific high-expectation-level performance) are not executed. The reason for this is that, before the execution of the first reward acquisition effect, if another high-expectation effect with a higher jackpot expectation than the reward (specific high-expectation effect) occurs, it is presented to the player. This is because there is a risk that the reward (specific high-expectation-level performance) will be a performance of a downturn, betraying the player's expectations. In particular, when the first reward acquisition effect is performed during the execution of the variable display, the first reward acquisition effect is performed during the period from the start of the variable display until the first reward acquisition effect is performed. It is desirable that other high-expectation-level performances having the same performance tendency (performance type) with higher big-hit expectations than the previously presented reward (specific high-expectation-level performance) are not executed. For example, when the reward presented in advance in the first reward acquisition effect is the red pending change effect, it is desirable that the money pending change effect is not executed until the first reward acquisition effect is performed.

In addition, depending on the scenario of the selected sub-variation pattern (variation production pattern), the first reward acquisition effect may occur as a production that overturns the previous weak development to a strong development, or the strong development until then. It may occur as a production that develops into a stronger development. For example, consider a case where there are a plurality of types of sub-variation patterns P1 and P2 as sub-variation patterns (fluctuation effect patterns) in which the first reward acquisition effect is executed during the pseudo 2-variation display. At this time, for both of the sub-variation patterns P1 and P2, the first reward acquisition effect is performed during execution of the pseudo 2-variation display, and as the reward, the same specific high-expectation effect (for example, money holding change effect) is obtained. It shall be possible. For example, in the sub-variation pattern P1, the early stage of the variable display is a weak development that seems to have a low expectation for a big hit (for example, it is one of the productions with the same production tendency (production type) as the specific high expectation production, but Low expectations among comment notice effects, which are productions with different production trends (production types) than specific high-expectation productions, and developments in which blue-hold change productions with lower expectations than red-holding change productions and gold-holding change productions are performed. However, by executing the first reward acquisition effect and acquiring a specific high expectation effect (for example, gold reserve change effect) with high expectations for a big hit, you can expect a big hit at once. It becomes a scenario that reverses to a strong development, which is a development that seems to be high degree. On the other hand, in the sub-variation pattern P2, a strong development from the beginning of the variable display (for example, one of the productions with the same production tendency (production type) as the specific high A development in which a pending change effect is performed, and a comment notice effect that has a different direction (production type) than the specific high expectation effect is performed. By executing the acquisition performance and acquiring a specific high expectation performance (for example, money holding change performance) with a high expectation of a big hit, it becomes a scenario that develops into a stronger development. Here, the first reward acquisition effect is originally designed with the intention of becoming a surprise effect that overturns the previous weak development to a strong development. On the other hand, if you stick to the classic production too much, you will not be able to perform the first reward acquisition production with a strong development, or if you perform the first reward acquisition production with a strong development, you will have to make it a fake production. This poses a problem that the subsequent development may be revealed to the player in advance. Therefore, a royal production pattern that overturns a weak development (for example, as described above, a pattern that creates a production with the same production tendency (production type) such as a pending change production, or a production tendency that is different from a specific high-expectation production In addition to the pattern of executing the low-expectation production of (production type) first and then executing the specific high-expectation production), the production pattern that develops from a strong development to an even stronger development (for example, as described above , A pattern that creates a production with the same production tendency (production type) such as a pending change production, or a low-expectation production with a production tendency (production type) that is different from the specific high-expectation production. A pattern for executing a high-expectation performance is also prepared, and it is a specification that allows the player to win a reward that feels hot at that time, regardless of the development of the performance up to that point. That is, by providing not only the sub-variation pattern P1 but also the sub-variation pattern P2, depending on which of the sub-variation patterns P1 and P2 is selected, the tendency of the production when developing to a strong development is configured to be different. (For example, when the main variation pattern PH1-14 is selected and it is determined to execute the first reward acquisition effect, the ratio of the sub variation pattern P1 and the sub variation pattern P2 is selected to 3: 1 If you do, 75% of the pattern that executes the pseudo-continuation 3 times and SP reach A to C production with the royal road production pattern that overturns the weak development, and the pseudo-continuation with the production pattern that develops from the strong development to the stronger development. The pattern of executing the production of 3 times and SP reach A to C can be set to 25%, and 1 in 4 times of the production pattern in which pseudo consecutive 3 times, SP reach A to C and the first reward acquisition production are executed. A turn can be a production pattern that develops from a strong development to a further strong development).

Next, the flow of the first reward acquisition effect will be described with reference to FIG. The first reward acquisition effect includes an introduction effect, a reward display effect, a button effect, and a result notification effect. (A) in the figure shows the case where the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is the first half of the pseudo fluctuation, and (B) in the figure shows the case where the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is the second half of the pseudo fluctuation, (C) in the figure shows a case where the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is SP reach A (character reach).

The introductory effect is an introductory effect performed at the start of the first reward acquisition effect. In this introductory effect, the character "win the reward" is displayed on the screen to inform the player that the first reward acquisition effect will start. The types of introductory effects include a first introductory effect in which the characters "win the reward" are displayed in white, and a second introductory effect in which the characters "win the reward" are displayed in red. The second introductory production is a chance-up production with a higher expectation of reward acquisition than the first introductory production.

The reward display effect is a effect in which the reward information (type of specific high-expectation effect) to be acquired in the first reward acquisition effect is displayed on the screen, and the reward is presented to the player in advance. . Whether or not the presented reward can be obtained (whether or not the presented specific high-expectation-level presentation is executed) is made clear by the result notification presentation after the next button presentation.

The button effect is a effect that instructs the player to operate the effect button 15 and prompts whether or not the player can obtain a reward by this button operation. The types of button performances include a single button performance in which the performance progresses by single operation (one operation) of the performance button 15, and a repeated button performance in which the performance does not progress unless the performance button 15 is operated a plurality of times. . The repeated button-hit effect is executed corresponding to the first introductory effect, and the one-button-hit effect is executed corresponding to the second introductory effect (chance-up effect). Therefore, as the button effect, the degree of expectation for obtaining the reward is higher when the single button effect is executed than when the button repeated effect is executed.

The result notification effect is a effect for notifying the effect result (success/failure) of the first reward acquisition effect. The types of result notification effects include a success notification effect for notifying that the reward has been successfully obtained, and a failure notification effect for notifying that the reward has not been obtained.

If the result notification effect is a success notification effect, a specific high-expectation effect corresponding to the reward will occur after the previously presented reward is successfully acquired and until the variable display ends. becomes deterministic. It should be noted that the timing at which the specific high-expectation-level effect appears may differ depending on the type of the specific high-expectation-level effect. For example, if the specific high-expectation-level effect is the red-holding change effect and the gold-holding-change effect, the specific high-expectation-level effect is generated immediately after the result is notified by the success notification effect. Also, if the specific high expectation effect is 7 tenpai effect, parts charge MAX, END reach, next notice effect, after the result is notified by the success notification effect, after a predetermined time has passed, this specific high Expectation performance occurs. At this time, if the specific high-expectation production is END reach, the waiting time from the notification of the result in the success notification production to the occurrence of END reach is long, so during the waiting time An icon indicating that a specific high-expectation performance (END reach) is scheduled to occur is displayed on the screen, that is, stocked as notice information indicating that the END reach will occur later.

Further, the game development after the success notification effect is performed differs according to the execution timing when the first reward acquisition effect is performed, as shown in FIG. First, when the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is the first half of the pseudo-variation, after the success notification effect is completed, the decorative pattern is tenpai (decorative pattern is in a ready-to-reach state), or the pseudo-continuous continuation effect is performed. will be executed. The pseudo-continuous continuation effect is, for example, a temporary stop display of a pseudo-continuous symbol (NEXT symbol) to suggest that the pseudo-fluctuation will continue (that the next pseudo-fluctuation will be performed). In addition, if the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is in the second half of the pseudo-variation, after the success notification effect is completed, the pseudo-variation start time effect when the next pseudo-variation starts, or the character reach development effect will be executed. The character reach development effect is a effect that notifies that the character reach (SP reach A) develops after the normal reach. Further, when the execution timing of the first reward acquisition effect is SP reach A, the character reach continuation effect is executed after the success notification effect ends. The character reach continuation effect is an effect for notifying that the character reach (SP reach A) will continue.

On the other hand, when the result notification performance is a failure notification performance, the variable display is immediately terminated after the failure notification performance ends without depending on the execution timing of the first reward acquisition performance, resulting in "missing". As a modification, even if the result notification effect becomes a failure notification effect, the specific high expectation effect is not executed, and then a new pseudo-variation is performed, or any of SP reach A to C. It may develop into a big hit in the end. As another modification, even if the result notification effect becomes a failure notification effect, the specific high expectation level A performance may be executed, and after that, a new pseudo-variation may be performed, or one of the SP reach A to C may be developed, and finally a big hit may be achieved.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the first reward acquisition effect is configured as an effect performed during execution of the variable display, but is not limited to this configuration. It may be configured as an effect that is performed during the execution of. As an application example of this modification, for example, the above-mentioned premium re-lottery effect (jackpot type determination effect) performed during the jackpot start demonstration is applied as the first reward acquisition effect, and information suggesting the jackpot type as a reward for the player. (Super longevity bonus) is presented in advance, and it is preferable that the player wins this reward (super longevity bonus) by operating a button. In addition, when applied to the above-mentioned premium re-lottery effect, it is preferable that only the success notification effect that confirms that the reward (super longevity bonus) has been acquired is derived as the result notification effect of the first reward acquisition effect. is.

<Second reward acquisition effect>
Next, the second reward acquisition effect will be described. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the second reward acquisition effect. The second reward acquisition effect is a effect for notifying in advance that a specific advance notice effect will occur as a reward given to the player during execution of the variable display. This second reward acquisition effect can be executed in the variable display when the game state is the normal game state (low-probability low-base state), and is suddenly entered from the start of the variable display. Hereinafter, the specific advance notice effect that is the target of the reward in the second reward acquisition effect is also referred to as "specific advance notice effect".

The second reward acquisition effect is executed in a variation display corresponding to the variation pattern of three pseudo-consecutive out of the plurality of types of variation patterns described above. That is, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the second reward acquisition effect can be executed in the advance notice lottery process only when the variation pattern of three pseudo-runs is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbols. At this time, the second reward acquisition effect is executed using the time scale from the start of the pseudo 1st variation display to the end of the pseudo 2nd variation display among the 3 times of the pseudo variation display. That is, the second reward acquisition effect is started at the start of the pseudo 1 variable display, and the second reward acquisition effect is completed at the end of the pseudo 2 variable display. However, the second reward acquisition effect only uses the time scale from pseudo 1 to pseudo 2 fluctuations, and during that period, the pseudo fluctuations of the decoration pattern (pseudo 1 to pseudo 2 fluctuations) are actually is not performed, and the decorative pattern is displayed as a small pattern at the edge of the screen. Then, after the second reward acquisition effect is completed (after the time scale from the pseudo 1st variation to the pseudo 2nd variation has elapsed), the pseudo 3rd variation (residual pseudo continuous presentation) is started. In other words, even if the pseudo-continuous three-time variation pattern is selected, when the second reward acquisition effect is performed, only the pseudo-3 variation is actually performed as the pseudo-continuous effect. The period up to the pseudo 2 fluctuation is used only as a time scale for the second reward acquisition effect. It should be noted that when the pseudo 3-variation display is started after the second reward acquisition effect ends, an image (for example, "×3 ”) is executed. Here, when the pseudo 3-variation display is performed without executing the second reward acquisition effect, in the pseudo 1-variation display, the pseudo-run number notification effect for displaying an image informing the number of pseudo-runs (the number of times the pseudo-runs are executed) is displayed. It is not executed, and in the pseudo 2-variation display, an image (for example, "x 2") indicating the number of pseudo-runs (the number of times the pseudo-run is executed) is displayed. A pseudo-continuation number notification effect is executed to display an image (for example, “×3”) for notifying the number of pseudo-continues (the number of executions of pseudo-continues).

FIG. 84 is a schematic diagram showing a reward pattern table. This remuneration pattern table defines the type of specific advance notice effect and the effect type of the specific advance notice effect. The types of specific notice effects include blue pending change effect, green pending change effect, red pending change effect, gold pending change effect, rainbow pending change effect, green frame advance notice effect, red frame advance notice effect, gold frame advance notice effect, and timer notice. Effect, roulette notice effect, parts charge x 2, parts charge x 4, parts charge MAX, green logo notice effect, red logo notice effect, gold logo notice effect, special zone effect, hit confirmation notice effect (What is rainbow hold change effect? It is a different presentation, and includes, for example, a giraffe presentation in which many animal giraffes are displayed. Each specific advance notice effect is basically a notice effect scheduled to be performed during execution of the variable display. That is, the specific advance notice effect specified in the scenario of the variable effect pattern (sub-variable pattern) becomes the reward target or candidate.

Here, the contents of the specific advance notice effect to be rewarded will be described in order. Part of the specific advance notice effect overlaps with part of the above-described specific high-expectation effect, but it will be explained again for easier understanding. The blue pending change effect is a effect in which the display mode of the changing image (the changing image displayed in the changing image display area 720) changes to blue. The green pending change effect is a effect in which the display mode of the changing image changes to green. The red pending change effect is a effect in which the display mode of the changing image changes to red. The gold reserve change effect is a effect in which the display mode of the changing image changes to gold. The rainbow holding change effect is a effect in which the display mode of the changing image changes to a rainbow color. In this embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit increases by one level in the order of blue pending change effect<green pending change effect<red pending change effect<money pending change effect<rainbow pending change effect. In addition, the rainbow holding change effect is a premium effect of confirming the big hit. The green frame notice effect is a effect of cutting in an image surrounded by a green frame (green frame). The red frame advance notice effect is a effect of cutting in an image surrounded by a red frame (red frame). The gold frame advance notice effect is a effect of cutting in an image surrounded by a gold frame (golden frame). In this embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit increases by one level in the order of the green frame advance notice effect<the red frame notice effect<the gold frame notice effect. The timer announcement effect is an effect that counts down the remaining time until a predetermined announcement effect (high expectation effect such as SP reach C, next announcement effect, etc.) is started in the variable display. In the roulette notice effect, an image simulating roulette is rotated and displayed, and one of a plurality of options is derived as the effect result according to the stop position of the roulette (suggesting or notifying the subsequent development of the game). ) production (for example, display options of “SP reach C”, “next notice production”, and “Kirin production”, select one, and then execute the selected production). ). As described above, each part charge effect is an effect that determines that the high expectation reach will be developed by acquiring all seven parts. Parts charge x2 is an effect of acquiring two parts out of all parts. Parts charge x4 is an effect of acquiring four parts out of all parts. Parts charge MAX is an effect of acquiring all parts (7 parts). Therefore, when part charge MAX is executed, all parts are gathered at once, so it is confirmed that it will develop into a high expected reach, but even if part charge x 2 and part charge x 4 are performed, other If you do not acquire the remaining parts in the parts charge effect, it will not be confirmed that it will develop into a high-expectation reach. The green logo preview effect is a effect in which the logo accessory emits green light. The red logo preview effect is a effect in which the logo accessory emits red light. The gold logo preview effect is a effect in which the logo accessory emits gold light. In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit increases by one level in the order of green logo notice effect<red logo notice effect<gold logo notice effect. The hit confirmation notice effect is a so-called one-shot announcement premier effect that notifies the big win decision in advance. In addition, as described above, the second reward acquisition effect is an effect that is performed using the time scale from the pseudo 1st fluctuation display to the pseudo 2nd fluctuation display in the pseudo 3 times fluctuation display. An advance notice effect suggesting that it will occur (performing a pseudo-variation display) cannot be a reward target.

The second reward acquisition effect, as shown in FIG. 83, includes an introductory stimulating effect, an introductory effect, and a main story effect. In this embodiment, the second reward acquisition effect is suddenly entered from the start of the variable display, and the introductory stimulus effect is started.

The introductory inciting effect is an inciting effect as to whether or not the introductory effect is to be started. When this introductory fanciful production succeeds, the introductory production is performed and progresses to the main story production. On the other hand, if the introductory stimulating effect fails, the introductory effect and the main story effect are not performed, and the second reward acquisition effect ends. In other words, if the introductory hype production succeeds, the main variation pattern that can execute the pseudo 3 fluctuation display is selected, and if the introductory hype production fails, normal fluctuation or pseudo 1 hype (failure) An executable main variation pattern is selected.

The introductory effect is an introductory part of the transition to the main effect by displaying, for example, a message "What is the reward this time?" to notify that the second reward acquisition effect has started.

The main effect includes an operation instruction effect, a treasure box appearance effect, and a treasure box opening effect, and the effects progress in the order of operation instruction effect→treasure box appearance effect→treasure box opening effect. This main production is a production content in which the player obtains a reward by opening a treasure box that has appeared by operating a button.

The operation instruction effect is an effect for instructing the player to operate the effect button 15 . During execution of this operation instruction effect, an operation valid period is set during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid. During the effective operation period, an image simulating the production button 15 is displayed on the screen to notify that the operation of the production button 15 is valid or to prompt an operation input.

The treasure box appearance effect is a effect in which a plurality of (five) treasure boxes appear on the screen when the player operates the effect button 15 during the operation valid period. The types of treasure chests include normal treasure chests with normal decorations and special treasure chests with special decorations. In this embodiment, the special treasure box is set to have a higher possibility of appearing a specific advance notice effect (reward with a high degree of advantage for the player) with a higher expectation of a big hit than a normal treasure box.

The treasure box opening presentation is a presentation in which five treasure boxes are opened in order to reveal the contents of each treasure box. When the treasure box is opened in this treasure box opening effect, an icon image (referred to as a “reward icon”) indicating the type of reward (specific advance notice effect) appears from the treasure box. In this embodiment, one reward (reward icon) appears from one treasure box, and finally five rewards (specific advance notice effect) corresponding to a total of five treasure boxes can be obtained. there is

FIG. 85 is a schematic diagram showing a reward combination pattern table. A total of 42 reward combination patterns are defined in the reward combination pattern table. A reward combination pattern is an effect pattern that defines a combination mode of five rewards (first to fifth rewards) selected from a total of 18 rewards. That is, this reward combination pattern defines a first reward, a second reward, a third reward, a fourth reward, and a fifth reward. The vertical column in the figure shows the reward combination pattern number, and the horizontal column in the figure shows the first reward (specific notice effect), the second reward (specific notice effect), and the second reward (specific notice effect) from the left. ), the third reward (specific advance notice effect), the fourth reward (specific notice effect), and the fifth reward (specific notice effect). For example, in reward combination pattern 1, the first reward is "blue pending change effect", the second reward is "parts charge MAX", the third reward is "red frame notice effect", and the fourth reward is As a reward for , a "green pending change effect" is set, and as a reward for the fifth reward, a "red logo notice effect" is set.

For the first to fifth rewards in the reward combination pattern, five specific advance notice effects having different display modes (display contents) are determined. That is, each reward combination pattern is composed of a combination of at least five specific advance notice effects with different display modes. However, the first to fifth rewards may include a plurality of specific advance notice effects belonging to the same effect type (effect category). In other words, two or more rewards out of the total of five rewards may be the same type of specific advance notice effect belonging to the same effect type. Here, the same effect type means that the basic component elements or main component elements of the effect are common or similar, but some component elements or their display modes are different. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84, the blue pending change effect, the green pending change effect, the red pending change effect, the gold pending change effect, and the rainbow pending change effect belong to the same effect type (holding change effect), and the green frame Notice effect, red frame notice effect and gold frame notice effect belong to the same effect type (frame notice effect), parts charge x2, parts charge x4 and parts charge MAX belong to the same effect type (parts charge effect), green The logo notice effect, the red logo notice effect, and the gold logo notice effect belong to the same effect type (logo notice effect).

Here, when one reward combination pattern includes a plurality of specific advance notice effects of the same effect type, the lower the rank of the specific advance notice effect (the specific notice effect with relatively lower expectation of big hit), the faster it is. While it becomes a reward that is opened at the timing, it becomes a reward that is opened at a later timing as the rank of the specific announcement effect (specific preview effect with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big hit) is relatively high. That is, when five rewards in one reward combination pattern are opened one after another, and the reward includes a plurality of specific advance notice effects belonging to the same effect type, the plurality of specific advance notice effects are the rewards. There is no descending (ranking down) in the order of opening, and it is always supposed to rise (ranking up) in the order of opening the reward. For example, if the fourth reward and the fifth reward are the same type of specific preliminary effect (for example, a pending change effect), assuming that the fourth reward is a red pending change effect, 5 The second reward is a gold reserve change production or a rainbow reserve change production.

In addition, the specific notice effect (rainbow pending change effect, hit confirmation notice effect) of the one-shot announcement that the big hit is confirmed is always set as the fifth reward (reward opened last). The reason for this is that when the specific notice effect of the one-shot announcement appears as the 1st to 4th rewards, it is certain that the jackpot will be hit at that point, so the remaining rewards are practically wasted (the remaining This is because there is no meaning in opening the treasure chest), and it can also be a factor that lowers the production effect.

Also, in the figure, in order to distinguish between the above-mentioned normal treasure chests and special treasure chests, the rewards that appear from special treasure chests are marked with an asterisk "☆", and the rewards that appear from normal treasure chests are marked with stars. "☆" is not attached. Of the five treasure boxes assigned to each reward combination pattern, at least one treasure box is a special treasure box and the remaining treasure boxes are normal treasure boxes. As a modification of the present embodiment, a specification may be adopted in which, when the number of special treasure chests that appear reaches a predetermined number or more, the appearance of a specific advance notice effect with a predetermined degree of expectation or more is confirmed. For example, when there are 2 or more special treasure chests, it is confirmed that one special notice effect will be displayed in gold. When it is confirmed that more than 5 special treasure chests will appear, and if there are 5 special treasure chests, the jackpot will be confirmed regardless of the content of the reward. It may be configured to

FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a second reward acquisition effect (main story effect). In this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the reward (reward icon) that appears from the treasure box moves to the upper area on the screen, and remains in the upper area until the specific advance notice effect corresponding to the reward icon is executed. stocked. In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the reward combination pattern 30 (see FIG. 85) is selected is illustrated. In this remuneration combination pattern 30, as five remunerations (specific advance notice effects), a blue pending change effect, a parts charge MAX, a red frame advance notice effect, a gold reserve change effect, and a gold logo advance notice effect are set.

As shown in (A) in the figure, when the main effect is started (when the effect button is operated within the effective period of operation), five treasure chests are displayed on the screen. A total of 5 treasure chests are opened one by one from left to right. In the figure, the 1st to 3rd and 5th treasure boxes are normal treasure boxes, and the 4th treasure box is a special treasure box.

As shown in (B) in the figure, when the first treasure box is opened, a reward icon with the words "blue reservation" appears, and the blue reservation change effect is obtained as the first reward. You will be informed of what has happened.

As shown in (C) in the figure, when the second treasure chest is opened, a reward icon with the text "Parts MAX" appears, and the second reward is the Parts Charge MAX. is notified.

As shown in (D) in the figure, when the third treasure chest (regular treasure chest) is opened, a reward icon with the text "red frame" appears, and the third reward is a red frame. It is reported that the advance notice effect has been obtained.

As shown in (E) in the figure, when the fourth treasure box is opened, a reward icon with the words "money reserve" appears, and a gold reserve change effect is obtained as the fourth reward. You will be informed of what has happened. In addition, by overlapping the reward icon for the 4th “pending gold” reward icon with the 1st “pending blue” reward icon, the “pending blue” reward icon will be updated (overwritten) to the “pending gold” reward icon. ). In other words, if a specific notice effect (gold reservation change effect) belonging to the same effect type as the specific notice effect (blue pending change effect) that has already appeared appears, the already appearing specific notice effect (blue hold change effect) By overlapping the reward icon (low-rank icon) corresponding to the special notice effect (gold hold change effect) that appeared this time (high-rank icon), the reward icon will be overwritten.

As shown in (F) in the figure, when the fifth treasure chest is opened, a reward icon with the words "gold logo" will appear, and the fifth reward will be a gold logo notice effect. You will be informed of what has happened. A plurality of reward icons on the screen are displayed in a stocked state until a specific advance notice effect corresponding to each reward icon occurs. Thereby, the player can recognize the type of specific advance notice effect to be executed from now on. Then, each time the specific advance notice effect is executed, the corresponding reward icon is erased one by one (all the reward icons are erased at the end of the variable display). When executing the second reward acquisition effect, as described above, the decorative pattern is displayed as a small pattern (that is, the display size is changed and displayed), but the decorative pattern is hidden. In that case, a resident pattern that is always displayed (variable display and stop display) may be provided. This resident pattern is displayed in a small size on the upper left of the screen. While the special pattern is fluctuating, the display is changed, and while the special pattern is stopped, the display is stopped. Similarly, three symbols are displayed in a variable and stationary manner. By providing this resident pattern, the situation where you want to make the decorative pattern smaller or hide it (for example, when executing the second reward acquisition effect, when executing the SP reach, the character role is performed and the screen Even if the center of the ball is hidden, it is possible to notify that the game is changing (in other words, the result of winning or losing has not been determined). That is, it can be said that this resident pattern is a pattern for display security (for compensating the display state of the decorative pattern). It should be noted that, when the resident design is displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to always continue the variable display from the start of the special design until the stop display is performed. It is preferable to configure so that the resident symbols are not temporarily stopped in the middle even if a special decorative pattern displaying characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped when executing the continuous effect. Yes (Therefore, there is no special pattern that displays characters such as "NEXT" for the resident pattern), and furthermore, in the case of a big hit fluctuation, in order to prevent misunderstanding that it is a big hit when it is a losing fluctuation In order to prevent the player from recognizing the big hit in advance, regardless of whether it is a winning variation or a big winning variation, the symbol combination indicating the winning is displayed to the player while maintaining the combination (for example, "1, 2・3” → “2.3.4” → “3.4.5” → “4.5.6” → “5.6.7” → “6.7.1” → “7.1.2” ”→“1, 2, 3”→ . . . ). In addition to this, the resident design has the following characteristics, so that the role can be clearly differentiated from the decorative design.
(1) The display area of decorative symbols, which is easy for the player to recognize, is larger than the display area of resident symbols for display security (for compensating the display state of the decorative symbols). This is a situation in which the decorative patterns and resident patterns are fixed and stopped, the decorative patterns are in a ready-to-reach state immediately after forming (the ready-to-reach state in a state that has not developed into the SP ready-to-reach state), and the resident patterns are in a variable display. This configuration is preferable even in a situation where the decoration pattern is a small pattern and the resident pattern is being variably displayed during SP reach.
(2) The display position of the decorative pattern is either in the first production mode (for example, normal mode or stage A in normal mode) or in the second production mode (for example, rush mode or stage B in normal mode). By setting different display positions accordingly, it is possible to realize diversity of effects with decorative patterns according to the effect mode. On the other hand, since it is sufficient for the resident pattern to play the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern, regardless of whether it is the first production mode or the second production mode, the same display position is used, and unnecessary development and design are required. It is preferable to forgo.
(3) The display mode of the decorative pattern is the first production mode (for example, normal mode or stage A in normal mode) or the second production mode (for example, rush mode or stage B in normal mode). By using different display modes depending on the performance mode, it is possible to realize the diversity of performance in the decorative pattern according to the performance mode. For example, in the first production mode, decorative patterns are composed only of decorative patterns of numbers (decorative patterns such as "1", "2", ..., "7"), and in the second production mode, decorative patterns of numbers and allies A decorative pattern is formed by combining the decorative patterns of the characters (decorative patterns such as “1”+“character a”, “2”+“character b”, . . . , “7”+“character g”). On the other hand, the resident pattern only needs to play a role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern. It is preferable to configure the resident pattern only with the pattern and avoid unnecessary development and design.
(4) The display area of the decorative pattern is changed (moved, small pattern) according to the changing situation (for example, whether it is in normal reach, whether it is in SP reach, etc.) Diversity can be given to the performance of the decorative pattern. On the other hand, since the resident pattern only needs to play the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern, the display area of the resident pattern should not be changed (do not move or be a small pattern) to avoid unnecessary development and design. preferably done.
(5) The variation speed of the decorative pattern can be changed to low speed, medium speed, high speed, super high speed, etc. according to the variation situation (eg, at the start of the variation, in the middle of the variation, just before the end of the variation, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to provide variety in the production of decorative patterns. On the other hand, since the resident pattern only needs to play the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern, the variable speed of the resident pattern should not be changed, or the number of variable stages should be reduced (for example, only low speed and high speed). It is preferable to avoid extra development design. Also, regarding the direction of movement, the decorative design allows for movement not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (allows for movement in multiple directions), while the resident design allows for movement from top to bottom. It is preferable to only change to .
(6) The decorative pattern is temporarily stopped before the fixed stop (stop at the timing when the special pattern stops) (temporary stop during the fluctuation of the special pattern, temporary stop with slight fluctuation) ), and at that time, by temporarily stopping a specific pattern that is a decorative pattern other than a number (for example, a decorative pattern with the word “super” that predicts the development of SP reach), the decorative pattern is produced. and other performances. On the other hand, since the resident pattern only needs to play the role of compensating for the display state of the decorative pattern, neither the resident pattern is temporarily stopped nor the specific pattern is temporarily stopped to avoid unnecessary development and design. is preferable.
(7) The decorative pattern overlaps the display area of other notice effects (for example, comment notice effects, SU (step-up) notice effects, etc.), that is, is superimposed. Such a superimposed display is permitted in order to use the area on the screen as much as possible to produce a powerful effect. It is desirable to design the area so as not to overlap (not to be superimposed) with the display area of the other notice effect. However, regarding the relationship with special notice effects that inevitably overlap (for example, group notice effects displayed on the entire screen, background notice effects, etc.), the display priority of the resident pattern is changed to that of the special notice effect. It is preferable to set the display priority higher than the display priority (set so that the resident symbol is displayed in front of the special advance notice effect). In addition, a right hitting notification image (different from the image displayed during the special game, a right hitting notification image dedicated to the high base state displayed during the high base state, but may be an image common to the image during the special game) ) is also desirable to be visible to the player without fail, so it is desirable to design so that the display area of the resident symbol and the display area of the right-handed informing image do not overlap (not be superimposed). However, when the display area of the decorative pattern is moved or enlarged, the display area of the decorative pattern and the display area of the right-handed notification image may overlap (superimposed display). It is preferable to set the display priority of the decorative symbols lower than the display priority of the right-handed informing image (set so that the decorative design is displayed behind the right-handed informing image).
(8) During the special game, only one decoration pattern may be displayed instead of a combination display. For example, when the special game is executed after "7.7.7" is confirmed and stopped, "7" is displayed during the special game, and "2.2.2" is confirmed and stopped and then the special game is executed. When the game is executed, "2" is displayed during the special game. As a result, it is possible to recognize during the special game which decorative pattern has resulted in a big hit. As a modification, decorative patterns corresponding to high-advantage jackpots (for example, "3.3.3", "5.5.5", "7.7" indicating a jackpot of 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R) · 7”, etc.) may be displayed during the special game. In this way, the display area for displaying one decorative pattern displayed during the special game includes the other display areas during the special game, namely, the round display area, the right-handed display area, the award ball acquisition display area, and the cumulative number of award balls. It is desirable to configure so as not to overlap with the display area, that is, not to be superimposed (however, the highlighted display may be superimposed, and in that case, the highlighted display has a higher display priority). In addition, the resident symbols are preferably hidden during the special game (because the variable display is not performed during the special game), but they may be displayed during the special game. In this case, it is desirable to configure the display so as not to overlap with other display areas during the special game such as the round display area, the right-handed display area, the prize ball acquisition display area, and the accumulated prize ball number display area. It is desirable not to highlight or superimpose.
(9) In the decorative pattern, in addition to performing fluctuations (for example, moving from top to bottom), at the start of fluctuation, immediately after temporary stop, after establishing reach, during temporary stop, etc. A display may be performed (the motions in each situation may be referred to as a variation start motion, a temporary stop motion, a ready-to-reach establishment motion, and a swing motion). For example, if it becomes non-reach (when the decorative pattern and the resident pattern are displayed as "6, 2, 4" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of the fluctuation, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern in the decorative pattern After performing an operation that expands everything, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left pattern temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation, and after "6" temporarily stops, the shaking operation continues. After that, when the right pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing action, the swinging action continues after "4" temporarily stops, and then when the middle pattern temporarily stops After performing the above operation, "2" temporarily stops and performs a little swinging operation, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the operations of the left pattern, the middle pattern and the right pattern are finished. In this case, the resident symbols do not perform any actions. Also, if it becomes a normal reach (when the decorative pattern and the resident pattern are displayed as "2, 1, 2" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of the fluctuation, all the left, middle, and right patterns in the decorative pattern After performing an operation that expands, it starts to fluctuate, and after that, when the left pattern temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation, and after "2" temporarily stops, the shaking operation continues. , After that, when the right pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing action, the swinging action continues after "2" temporarily stops, and then the left pattern and the left pattern to notify that it is a reach. The right symbol rotates and then continues the shaking motion. After that, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it performs a jumping motion, and then "1" temporarily stops and shakes a little. After that, at the fixed stop timing, all operations of the left design, the middle design, and the right design are finished (the middle design does not rotate). In this case, the resident symbols do not perform any actions. Also, if it becomes an SP reach (when the decorative pattern and the resident pattern are displayed as "2, 3, 2" at the time of fixed stop), at the start of the fluctuation, the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern in the decorative pattern After performing an operation that expands everything, it starts to fluctuate, and then when the left pattern temporarily stops, it performs a bouncing operation, and after "2" temporarily stops, the shaking operation continues. After that, when the right pattern temporarily stops, after performing a bouncing action, the swinging action is continued after "2" temporarily stops, and then the left pattern to notify that it is a reach. After that, the right design rotates and continues to shake again. After that, the middle design fluctuates while the left and right designs are swinging (At this time, the middle design expands. It fluctuates from top to bottom in the state, and the left and right symbols that did not overlap or had a low overlap rate have overlapped or have a high overlap rate), then SP reach In order to execute the production, the background is changed from the normal background to the reach background, and when the result of the failure is notified in the SP reach production, the reach background is changed to the normal background, and after the shift, the left pattern, the middle pattern. , The right pattern continues the shaking motion for a predetermined time, and then, at the fixed stop timing, all the motions of the left, middle and right symbols are finished (the middle pattern neither bounces nor rotates). In this case, the resident symbols do not perform any actions. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the production of the decorative patterns. It is preferable to avoid unnecessary development and design. Also, even during the period from when the fluctuation is stopped until the standby demonstration effect is displayed, the decorative pattern may perform a swinging motion after a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 10 seconds) after the fluctuation is stopped. However, even in this situation, it is preferable that the resident symbols do not perform any action. By constructing in this way, it is possible to stimulate the desire to play the game even during the game standby (while the symbols are stopped), and the fact that the game is on standby can be notified by not performing the swaying motion of the resident symbols. We can guarantee it. In addition, when the standby demonstration effect is displayed, the decorative symbols are hidden, but it is preferable that the resident symbols continue to be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to ensure the display of what symbols are stopped while emphasizing the display of the standby demonstration effect screen. However, since the game is not being played during the standby demonstration effect, the resident symbols may also be hidden. In addition, among the decorative symbols, a specific symbol (for example, a medium symbol "7") may be configured so that the predetermined action is not performed or the probability of performing the predetermined action is lower than that of the other symbols. This predetermined action may be, for example, the above-described temporary stop action (jumping action) (especially for the medium symbol "7" after reaching reach). By configuring in this way, it is possible to increase the rarity of actions in a specific pattern.

<Special button effect>
Next, the special button effects will be explained. FIG. 87 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of special button effects. The special button effect indicates that the effect button 15 has been operated before the number of times the player has operated the effect button 15 within a predetermined operation valid period reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (operable number of times). It is the production of the content whether or not it is possible to cause a predetermined premium production to appear as a trigger. This special button effect is executed when the variable display is a predetermined variable display when the game state is the probability variable game state (high-probability high-base state). Predetermined variation display refers to high-expectation variation display (referred to as "chance variation display") in which the variation time of the special symbol is a predetermined time or longer or the degree of expectation for the big win is greater than or equal to a predetermined expectation. In this embodiment, the variation display of the SP reach performed in the variable probability gaming state corresponds to the chance variation display. Specifically, the variation display performed by selecting SP reach variation patterns PH3-3, PH3-4, PA3-1, and PA3-2 as the variation pattern of the variable probability gaming state corresponds to the chance variation display. .

The special button effect, as shown in FIG. 87, includes a button appearance effect, a button appearance effect, and an operation result notification effect.

The button appearance prompting effect is an effect for prompting whether or not the button appearance effect is to be started. In this button appearance effect, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the effect button 15 is displayed on the screen in advance, and then a button image imitating the effect button 15 appears (that is, the button appearance effect is started. It will be a production that makes you expect When the silhouette image of the production button 15 gradually changes to the button image in this button appearance fanning effect, the fanning success effect is obtained. On the other hand, if the silhouette image of the effect button 15 fades out from the screen in this button appearance fanning effect, the fanning failure effect occurs.

The button appearance effect is an effect for instructing the player to operate the effect button 15 by causing a button image imitating the effect button 15 to appear on the screen. In addition, in this button appearance effect, the number of possible operations, which is the upper limit number of times that the operation of the effect button 15 can be effectively accepted within the effective period of operation, is displayed. As a result, the player recognizes that the effect button 15 can be effectively operated within the valid operation period within the allowable number of operations displayed on the screen. The number of times the effect button 15 can be operated is determined based on a button number setting table which will be described later. The number of possible operations displayed on the screen is updated (subtracted) each time the effect button 15 is operated by the player.

The operation result notification performance is a performance performed each time the performance button 15 is operated (single-shot operation), and basically can be executed the number of times corresponding to the number of times the performance button 15 can be operated. For example, when the number of times the effect button 15 can be operated is 10 times, the operation result notification effect is performed only 10 times under the condition that the effect button 15 is operated 10 times by the player within the effective period of operation. will be That is, each time the effect button 15 is operated once with the allowable number of times of operation as the upper limit, one operation result notification effect is performed in conjunction with the operation. However, as an exception, the special button effect may end before the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the allowable number of operations, which will be described later.

The types of operation result notification effects include a success notification effect (also referred to as a "hit confirmation effect") as a premium effect for deterministically informing that a jackpot has been won in the variable display, and a big hit in the variable display. There is a failure notification effect that informs that it is uncertain whether or not the game is won (that is, even if the failure notification effect is performed, it does not mean that the big hit is denied). The success notification effect (hit confirmation effect) is a one-shot notification effect of displaying an image (jackpot confirmation image) notifying the jackpot confirmation and outputting a sound (jackpot confirmation sound) when the production button 15 is operated. is. The failure notification effect is an effect in which an image (jackpot confirmation image) for notifying the jackpot confirmation and a sound (jackpot confirmation sound) are not output even if the production button 15 is operated.

Here, FIG. 88 is a schematic diagram showing a button count setting table. In this button frequency setting table, the corresponding relationship between the number of times the effect button 15 can be operated, the execution rate of the hit confirmation effect, and the selection rate of the number of times that the effect button can be operated is defined. The number-of-buttons setting table has different fields to be referred to depending on the results of the special symbol win/loss determination (big hit, miss). In the figure, the "selection rate" is indicated for convenience, but in reality, the determination number for determining the number of possible operations (range of the lottery random number ) is set, and the number of possible operations is determined based on which determination number the lottery random number belongs to.

As shown in FIG. 88, the possible number of operations of the effect button 15 is set within a range of 5 to 100 times, and one of the numbers is determined by lottery. In this embodiment, the greater the number of possible operations, the higher the expectation for a big hit is set. Also, the appearance rate of the hit confirmation effect is the probability that the operation result notification effect is selected as the hit confirmation effect (success notification effect). The rate of appearance of the hit confirmation effect can vary depending on the number of times the effect button 15 can be operated and the result of the win/loss determination (hit/lose). In the present embodiment, the number of times the effect button 15 can be operated is provided that the hit confirmation effect (success notification effect) does not occur until the number of times the effect button 15 is operated reaches at least the number of times that the effect button 15 can be operated. This is the upper limit number of times that the player can actually operate the effect button 15 (the upper limit number of times that the player's operation of the effect button 15 is effectively accepted). The upper limit number of times (false upper limit number of times) may be set, and internally, a number of times less than the number of possible operations displayed on the screen may be set as the actual upper limit number of times (true upper limit number of times). In this modification, when notifying a big win in the special button effect, before the number of times of operation of the effect button 15 reaches the number of possible operations (false upper limit number of times) displayed on the screen (the number of possible operations is Before the remaining number of times display becomes "0"), a win determination effect (success notification effect) appears, and after that, the operation of the effect button 15 becomes invalid.

(Execution rate at the time of jackpot)
First, if the result of the hit/fail judgment corresponds to a "big hit", it is decided whether or not to execute the hit confirmation effect based on the execution rate (execution rate in the figure) set according to the number of times the effect button 15 can be operated. be done. Specifically, if the number of possible operations is 5 to 9 times, the execution rate is "1 / number of possible operations", and if the number of possible operations is 10 to 15 times, it is "1 / (number of possible operations - 2)". Execution rate, if the number of possible operations is 16 to 19, the execution rate is "1/(number of possible operations - 4)", and if the number of possible operations is 20 to 25, "1/(number of possible operations - 6)" ”, the hit confirmation effect is executed. When the number of possible operations is 100, the execution rate of "number of possible operations/number of possible operations" (execution rate of 100/100), that is, the hit confirmation effect is executed with a probability of 100%. The execution rate of this hit confirmation effect is set to the same probability for each operation corresponding to the number of possible operations. For example, if the number of possible operations is 5, the hit confirmation effect can be executed at an execution rate of "1/5 (=1/number of possible operations)" for each of the five operations. In addition, when the number of possible operations is 100 times (also referred to as "special number"), for each of the 100 operations, the hit confirmation effect is executed with a probability of "100%" (that is, The first operation always executes a hit confirmation effect).

(execution rate when missing)
On the other hand, when the result of the success/failure determination corresponds to "lose", the execution rate of the hit confirmation effect is set to "0" regardless of the number of times the effect button 15 can be operated. In other words, when the variation display is lost, only the failure notification effect is executed without executing the hit confirmation effect as the operation result notification effect. The reason for this is that if the hit determination effect occurs when the variable display is lost, there will be a discrepancy between the result of the win/fail judgment and the effect result of the special button effect. Therefore, when the variable display corresponds to a loss, the possible number of operations (special number) of "100 times", in which the execution rate of the winning effect is 100%, is not selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the win-or-fail determination is “miss”, “7 times” is not selected as the number of times the effect button 15 can be operated. That is, the possible number of operations of "7 times" can be selected only when the variation display results in a big win. That is, the possible number of operations of "7 times" is the number of operations for determining the big win, and can be selected only when the result of the win/loss determination is "big win". Thus, in the present embodiment, when "7 times" is displayed as the number of possible operations on the screen in connection with the number "7" having a special meaning (a character indicating a high degree of expectation), the effect Irrespective of whether or not the winning confirmation performance appears with the operation of the button 15 as a trigger, the winning of the big win is decided when the number of possible operations of "7 times" is displayed.

Incidentally, when the hit fixing performance appears before the number of operations of the performance button 15 reaches the number of possible operations, the operation of the performance button 15 for the remaining number of times is canceled and the special button performance ends. The reason for this is that although the player has already been notified of the effect desired by the player (winning a jackpot), there is little need to continue the effect, and the operation is troublesome even for the player who knows the result. This is because However, if the number of possible operations is a special number (100 times), as described above, in order to enjoy the winning confirmation effect (premium effect) for each of the 100 operations, the winning confirmation effect is performed with the first operation. Even if it is executed, the remaining number of operations will not be canceled, and basically all 100 operations can be performed (that is, the hit confirmation effect can be executed up to 100 times in succession). .

Further, when the number of operations of the production button 15 reaches the number of possible operations (upper limit number of times) and the final operation is performed, if the hit confirmation production (success notification production) is not executed, the variable display is displayed. It may also be configured to execute the final performance that suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit. As an example of the final performance, when the final operation of the performance button 15 is performed, any one of the characters "subtle", "opportunity", and "very hot" is displayed, and the variation is displayed. Whether the expectation of a big hit in the display is subtle (for example, is it about 10% of the expectation of a big hit), is it a good opportunity (for example, is it about 50% of the expectation of a big hit), or is it intense ( For example, it may be configured to suggest a jackpot expectation of about 80%). In addition, in the case of a big hit, the last operation of the production button 15 is used as a trigger to display the characters ``confirmed'' suggesting the decision of the big win (indicating that the expectation of the big win is 100%). Alternatively, the final operation of the effect button 15 may be configured so that the execution rate of the hit confirmation effect is always "1/2".

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the left and right keys (left and right key switches) of the cross key are operated simultaneously during the execution of the special button effect, the operation of the effect button 15 is not used as a trigger. (Multiple lotteries) are performed one after another (for example, if the number of possible operations is 5, by operating the left and right keys at the same time, 5 lotteries of "1/5" are performed at once. Can receive). In other words, when the left and right keys are pressed at the same time, the lottery for a plurality of times (the number of possible operations) is completed at once without going through the operation of the effect button 15, and the result is notified. ing. This is an effective trick for a player who wants to know the result quickly without requiring multiple operations.

Next, a characteristic action of special button effects will be described. In the following description, ``operation of the effect button 15 is possible'' or ``operation of the effect button 15 is valid'' means that the effect control board 200 effectively accepts the operation of the effect button 15 when the effect button 15 is operated. , means that a predetermined process is performed based on the valid operation. The predetermined processing corresponds to the processing of the operation result notification effect (the process of performing the success notification effect or the failure notification effect with the operation of the effect button 15 as a trigger).

First, when the variable display is a failed variable display, the effect button 15 can be operated until the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the allowable number of operations (upper limit number of times). As described above, when the result of the success/failure determination is a failure, the hit confirmation effect is not selected, and the operation of the effect button 15 is not canceled before the number of possible operations (upper limit number of times) is reached. because there is no

On the other hand, if the variable display is a big hit variable display, (A) the production button 15 can be operated until the number of operations of the production button 15 reaches the maximum number of operations (upper limit number of times); B) There are cases where the operation of the production button 15 becomes impossible before the number of operations of the production button 15 reaches the number of possible operations (upper limit number of times). Here, (A) the case where the operation is possible until the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the maximum number of operations (maximum number of operations) is before the number of operations is reached (up to one time before the maximum number of operations). This is the time when the fixed presentation is never selected. Therefore, according to the selection result of the final round when the number of operations of the production button 15 reaches the number of times that can be operated, the winning confirmation production is executed (the winning confirmation production is selected in the final round), and the winning confirmation production is never executed (when the final hit is not selected). On the other hand, (B) the case where the operation is disabled before the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the maximum number of operations (maximum number of operations) is before the maximum number of operations is reached (up to one time before the maximum number of operations). It is time to select the final production. Incidentally, when the number of possible operations is the special number of times (100 times), before the number of times of operation of the effect button 15 reaches the number of times of possible operations (special number of times), the hit confirmation effect is executed every time. The operation of the effect button 15 is never interrupted (it is never canceled). However, when the left and right keys are pressed simultaneously, it is possible to perform 100 (or the remaining) operations of the effect button 15 at once.

In the above-mentioned special button effect, when the variable display is the variable display of the big win, whether or not the hit confirmation effect can be executed for each operation of the effect button 15 is randomly determined by a predetermined lottery. It is not limited to this configuration, and one or a plurality of types of performance patterns may be provided for each possible number of operations of the performance button 15, and whether or not to execute the fixed performance may be determined in advance according to the scenario of the performance pattern. . For example, as a production pattern in which the number of possible operations of the production button 15 is a predetermined number (for example, 10 times), the production button 15 can be operated until the number of operations of the production button 15 reaches the maximum number of operations. It has a performance pattern A and a performance pattern B in which the operation of the performance button 15 is disabled before the number of times of operation of the performance button 15 reaches the number of possible operations (upper limit number of times). Here, in the effect pattern A, since the effect button 15 can be operated until the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the allowable number of operations, it hits before reaching the allowable number of operations (up to one time before the upper limit number of times). It becomes an effect pattern in which the fixed effect is not executed. Therefore, the performance pattern A is divided into a performance pattern A1 in which the winning confirmation performance is executed in the final operation and a performance pattern A2 in which the winning confirmation performance is not executed even in the final operation. On the other hand, in the production pattern B, since the operation of the production button 15 becomes impossible before the number of times of operation of the production button 15 reaches the number of times that can be operated, it hits before the number of times that can be operated is reached (up to one time before the upper limit number of times). It becomes a production pattern in which a fixed production is performed. As a further modified example, in the case of a big win, not only the number of possible operations is determined, but also the number of times of the possible number of operations to execute the winning confirmation effect may be determined in advance. In this configuration, the number of possible operations is only an apparent number, and the number of operations for which the winning confirmation effect is actually executed is the actual number of possible operations. is determined not to be executed, the displayed number of possible operations is not the apparent number of times but the actual number of operations. Triggered by the performance of the operation of the round, the last round performance may be executed, which suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit with the variable display as described above). In the case of such a configuration, even in the case of a loss, the last operation of the production button 15 is used as a trigger, and the fluctuation display as described above suggests the degree of expectation for a big hit. It is preferable to execute a spinning effect.

Further, as a modification of the special button effect, each time the effect button 15 is operated, a predetermined effect other than the operation result notification effect described above may be executed. The predetermined effect is an effect performed each time the effect button 15 is operated once (single-shot operation), like the operation result notification effect (success notification effect, failure notification effect). That is, in this modification, each time the effect button 15 is operated, the cut-in effect and the operation result notification effect are executed once. In the predetermined performance, a predetermined cut-in image is interrupted and displayed immediately before the operation result notification performance is executed with the operation of the performance button 15 as a trigger, and the win is confirmed according to the display mode of the cut-in image. This is an effect (cut-in effect) that suggests or notifies the execution expectation level of the effect. There are three types of display modes of this cut-in image, for example, "default display", "chance display", and "extreme heat display". , The execution expectation of the hit confirmation effect increases one step at a time (for example, if it is "default display", the expectation of big hit is 5%, if it is "chance display", the expectation of big hit is 20%, "hot display" If so, the expected jackpot is 50%, etc.). According to this modified example, the synergistic effect of the operation result notification effect and the predetermined effect increases the expectation for each operation of the effect button 15, making it possible to further improve the effect of the special button effect.

As described above, the main effects achieved in the third embodiment can be summarized as follows.

First, according to the third embodiment, the execution time of the jackpot start demonstration is changed according to the combination of decorative symbols (jackpot numbers) indicating that the result of the win/fail judgment is a jackpot. By performing a re-lottery performance of a big hit type, which has conventionally been performed when the variation of decorative patterns is stopped, during the execution time, a re-lottery performance with abundant variations is realized while suppressing the number of variation patterns (variation time). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, the fact that the high-expectation effect will occur during the variable display is presented in advance to the player as a reward, and the player is encouraged as to whether or not the reward can be obtained. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for (occurrence of a high-expectation performance), and to change the tendency of the high-expectation performance as a reward according to the timing of pre-presenting the reward, and at that timing. Since it is possible to foresee the occurrence of an effective performance that the player feels hot, it is possible to balance the development of the game with the performance as well as the diversity of the performance, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible. In addition, since the player can feel that he/she has won the reward (high-expectation performance) on his or her own by operating the buttons, it is possible to further enhance the player's sense of satisfaction and achievement when the high-expectation performance occurs. becomes.

Further, according to the third embodiment, even if the combinations of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in the variation display of the big win (jackpot results) are the same, the type of effect that passes through during the variation display is the same. To attract a player's interest not only to a combination mode (big win) of decorative patterns but also to the content of performance until the end of the variable display by making the profit mode given to the player different according to the situation. In addition, the role of the advance notice effect and reach effect performed during the variable display not only suggests the degree of expectation for the big hit (reliability), but also the combination of the decorative patterns (jackpot appearance). It is also possible to play a role of differentiating the profit modes that are given from time to time, and as a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, the occurrence of two or more advance notice effects is notified in advance as a reward to the player using the time scale from the pseudo 1 fluctuation display to the pseudo 2 fluctuation display in the fluctuation display, and then, By successively generating each advance notification performance notified in advance after shifting to the pseudo 3-variation display, the player is clearly taught a reward suitable for the development situation from the pseudo 3-variation display to the development of the reach, and Despite being in the middle stage of the variable display, it will be possible to infer the overall jackpot expectation (reliability) considering the reach development before and after, and the flow and logic of the production that will be performed in the future. The player can grasp it in advance, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the third embodiment, the number of operations of the effect button 15 reaches the upper limit number of times (operable number of times) as the button effect executed when the predetermined variable display (high-expectation variable display) is performed. By creating a situation in which it is not known at what timing the one-shot announcement (hit confirmation effect) will occur, the monotony of button operation is eliminated and the player is not bored with high randomness. A game performance can be realized, and added value can be increased when the high expectation level fluctuation display is performed. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Fourth embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment described above, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted, and mainly the different parts will be described. That is, in the following description, except for special cases, it is possible to apply the configuration common to the second embodiment.

Hereinafter, the basic configuration of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment will be described in order. It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, as in the second embodiment described above, when the gaming state is the latent probability variable gaming state (high probability low base state), as a result of the special symbol suitability determination " A small hit RUSH, which is a game in which a small hit occurs frequently, is adopted.

<Board composition>
In the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1 (similar to the first embodiment described above), the game balls flowing down the left side area PA1 are mainly the first starting port 51 arranged below the center decoration 21. , general winning openings 61-63. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can enter any one of the operation gate 53, the general winning opening 64, the second starting opening 52, and the big winning opening 54, which are mainly arranged on the right side of the center decoration 21. is. In addition, the big winning opening 54 of the fourth embodiment includes a specific area (probability variation operation area) 548 that triggers the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol when the game ball enters the game ball, as in the above-described third embodiment. Also, it is configured as a so-called V-attacker. Since the configuration of the big winning opening 54 (V attacker) has already been described with reference to FIG. 64 in the above-described third embodiment, redundant description will be omitted here. On the other hand, the lower end of the game area PA is provided with an out port 29 through which the game balls that have flowed down without entering the winning ports are discharged to the back side of the game board 20 .

<Number of prize balls>
In the fourth embodiment, the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) to be paid out when one game ball enters each winning hole is "4" for the first start hole 51, and "4" for the second start hole 52. "1", "3" for the general prize winning openings 61 to 64, and "15" for the big winning prize opening 54 are set. Note that the number of prize balls per unit is not limited to that illustrated in the fourth embodiment, and other number of prize balls per unit may be applied.

<Acceptance judgment>
A description will be given of whether or not the special symbol is determined according to the fourth embodiment. In the determination of whether the special symbols of the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 described above, when the game state (low probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbols is not operating, the probability of a big hit When it is set to "1/320" and the game state (high probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is activated, the probability of a big hit is set to "1/80". In addition, in the winning judgment of the first special symbol, if the big hit is not won, it is unambiguously lost. / 1.1" with a high probability of winning a small hit. The probability of a small hit is set to the same probability of winning regardless of the game state (low probability state, high probability state).

It should be noted that, as in the second embodiment described above, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the determination of whether one of the special symbols is a big hit, and during the fluctuation display of the one special symbol (variation of the big hit) During display), if the other special symbol is judged to be correct, it is prohibited to derive a big hit as a result of the judgment of the other special symbol, while it is not possible to derive a small hit or a loss. Permissible. In addition, when a big hit is derived as a result of the judgment of the other special symbol, the result of the judgment is forcibly replaced with a deviation from the big hit.

<Jack type>
Subsequently, the jackpot type (jackpot breakdown) of the special symbols of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the fourth embodiment, when the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is "big win", the special symbol big win symbol table is referenced to determine the big win type (big win symbol, symbol group). Also in the fourth embodiment, similarly to the above-described third embodiment, each jackpot type is broadly classified into a "conditional specific jackpot" and a "conditional normal jackpot".

FIG. 89(A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol jackpot symbol table, a special symbol hit symbol random value is associated with a symbol group and a jackpot type (in this example, description of stop symbols is omitted for the sake of convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot symbol table, there are three kinds of jackpot types (symbol groups), 10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A), 10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B), and 6R conditional. A normal jackpot (symbol group C) is set. Specifically, the 10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A) has a selection rate of 10%, the 10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B) has a selection rate of 40%, and the 6R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group C ) are distributed with a selectivity of 50%.

FIG. 89(B) is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol jackpot symbol table, a special symbol hit symbol random value is associated with a symbol group and a jackpot type (in this example, description of stop symbols is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot symbol table, as two types of jackpot types (symbol group), a 10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group D) and a 10R conditional specific jackpot 4 (symbol group E) are set. there is Specifically, the 10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group D) is distributed with a selection rate of 50%, and the 10R conditional specific jackpot 4 (symbol group E) with a selection rate of 50%.

Here, as shown in FIG. 89(A), in the first special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the conditional specific jackpot is set to "50%", and the selection rate of the conditional normal jackpot is set to "50%". is set. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 89(B), in the second special symbol lottery, the conditional specific jackpot selection rate is set to "100%". In other words, when a big win occurs in the second special symbol lottery, regardless of the type of the big win, it is certain that the conditional specific big win is always won. Therefore, there is a higher possibility of winning a conditional specific jackpot (equivalent to a probability variable jackpot) in the case of a jackpot in the second special pattern lottery than in the case of a jackpot in the first special pattern lottery. After the special game ends, the game state is shifted to an advantageous game state (high probability state).

Next, the operation pattern of the big winning opening of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 90 is a schematic diagram showing a large winning opening operation pattern table of the fourth embodiment. In the big winning opening operation pattern table, the opening mode (opening pattern) of the big winning opening 54 and the specific area 548 in each round is defined for each jackpot type. The opening mode of the big winning opening 54 and the specific area 548 is, depending on the length of the opening time, a long opening (long opening) in which the opening time is set to a relatively long time, and a long opening in which the opening time is relatively long. It is distinguished from a short open (short open) that is set for a short time. In the figure, "L" means long opening and "S" means short opening as the mode of opening the big winning opening 54 and the specific area 548 in each round. The long opening time of the big winning opening 54 is an opening time (for example, 28 seconds) that is set to enable or easily enter a game ball of a specified count (full count) into the big winning opening 54 . In the third embodiment, as the opening mode of the big winning opening 54, short opening is not set in any round, and long opening is set in all rounds. However, even if the number of rounds of the big winning game is the same, a short opening is provided to shorten the opening time of the big winning opening 54 to, for example, 2 seconds in a predetermined round or all rounds during the same big winning game. Alternatively, a configuration having jackpots with different numbers of rounds (jackpots with different numbers of actual rounds) in which the number of actual balls can be obtained may be adopted. On the other hand, the long opening time of the specific area 548 is an opening time (for example, 28 seconds) set so that the game ball entering the big winning hole 54 can or easily pass through the specific area 548 . Also, the short opening time of the specific area 548 is the opening time (for example, 0.05 seconds) set so that the game ball entering the big winning hole 54 cannot pass through the specific area 548 or is difficult to pass through. The condition for closing the big winning opening 54 in the big winning game (the condition for ending the big winning game) is that a specified count number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls enter the big winning opening 54, or , the opening time of the big winning opening 54 has reached the opening limit time ("28 seconds" in this embodiment). The opening of the specific area 548 is synchronized with the opening of the big winning opening 54 (start of the first round) in either long opening or short opening. That is, the specific area 548 opens at the same timing as the opening start timing of the big winning opening 54 in the first round, or at the timing after one second has passed from the opening starting timing of the big winning opening 54 in the first round. . Also, not limited to this, the specific area 548 may be opened with the detection of the ball entering the big winning opening 54, and the count number (for example, the specified If the count number is 10 counts, the specific area 548 may be opened by detecting the first count). In the case of such a configuration, in the case of a conditional specific jackpot, the specific area 548 is long-opened by detecting the first count of the big winning opening 54 in the first round, and in the case of a conditional normal jackpot, in the first round. It is preferable to short open the specific area 548 by detecting the first count of the big winning opening 54 .

In the fourth embodiment, even if it corresponds to any jackpot type, in the specific round of the special game, based on whether the game ball enters the specific area 548, the game state after the end of the special game Whether or not to shift to a high probability state (variable probability game state or latent probability game state) is sorted. The specific round means that the movable member 545 in the big winning opening 54 opens and closes, and the specific area switch 547 becomes effective (detection of the game ball entering the specific area 548 becomes effective, that is, the game ball is determined by entering the specific area 548) round. This specific round is set to the first round (initial round) in common for all jackpot types. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the entry of a game ball into the specific area 548 during execution of a specific round is also referred to as "V winning". In addition, as a modification, when adopting a spec (so-called normal probability variable gaming machine) that does not have a specific area 548 in the big winning opening 54, as the jackpot type of this embodiment, "conditional specific jackpot" is "specific jackpot" Alternatively, it corresponds to the "probability variable big hit", and the "conditional normal jackpot" corresponds to the "normal big hit" or the "non-variable probability big hit".

As shown in FIG. 90, when the jackpot type is the first special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B)", the jackpot game The prescribed number of rounds is 10 rounds, and the opening mode of the big winning opening 54 is long opening in all the rounds. In addition, in any of the jackpot types of "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)" and "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B)", the specific area 548 is long open in the specific round (first round). Therefore, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 in the round.

In addition, when the jackpot type is the first special symbol "normal jackpot with 6R condition (symbol group C)", the prescribed number of rounds of the jackpot game is 6 rounds, and the opening mode of the big prize opening is long in all rounds. becomes open. In the case of "6R conditional normal jackpot (symbol group C)", since the specific area 548 is short-opened in the specific round (first round), the game ball enters the specific area 548 in the round. is practically impossible or difficult.

In addition, when the jackpot type is the second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group D)" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 4 (symbol group E)", the specified number of rounds of the jackpot game is 10. In the rounds, the opening mode of the big winning opening 54 is long opening in all the rounds. In addition, in any of the jackpot types of "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group D)" and "10R conditional specific jackpot 4 (symbol group E)", the specific area 548 is long open in the specific round (first round). Therefore, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 in the round.

Although illustration is omitted, if the result of the special symbol success/failure determination corresponds to a "small hit", a round game in which the big winning opening 54 is opened for a short period of time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is executed only once. . That is, the small winning game is distinguished from the big winning game composed of a plurality of round games in that it is composed of one round game. In addition, the small winning game is a special game that does not trigger the opening of the specific area 548, and is distinguished from the big winning game that is a special game that triggers the opening of the specific area 548.例文帳に追加It should be noted that the closing condition of the big winning opening 54 in the small winning game (end condition of the small winning game) means that the game ball of the prescribed count number ("10" in this embodiment) entered the big winning opening 54. Alternatively, the opening time of the big winning opening 54 has reached the opening limit time ("1.8 seconds" in this embodiment). Here, as a modified example, the specific area 548 may be configured to be opened even if it is a small hit game, but it is preferable to control so that even if the ball enters the specific area 548, the probability variation does not shift.

<Game state>
Next, the game state of the fourth embodiment will be explained. In the fourth embodiment, as a plurality of types of game states, "normal game state", "time-saving game state", "latent certainty game state", and "probability variable game state" are set. As the types of the game state, (1) the game state in which the special symbol probability variation function, the special symbol variation time reduction function, and the electric chew support function operate is called "probability variation state" or "probability variation game state", 2) The gaming state in which the probability variation function of special symbols and the variation time reduction function of special symbols are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated is called "latent probability gaming state (latency probability variable gaming state)" or "latency probability variable state". (3) The game state in which the special symbol probability variation function does not operate and the special symbol variation time reduction function and the electric chew support function operate is called a “time saving state” or “time saving game state”, (4 ) The state in which all the functions are not activated is called "normal state" or "normal game state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variable gaming state", the "latent certainty gaming state" and the "shortening gaming state" are all advantageous gaming states for the player compared to the "normal gaming state". In addition, each game state is a combination of the operating state of the special symbol probability variation function (high probability state / low probability state) and the operating state of the electric chew support function (high base state / low base state). ) The variable probability game state is “high probability high base state”, (2) the latent probability game state is “high probability low base state”, (3) the time saving game state is “low probability high base state”, (4) normal game state can also be expressed as a "low-probability low-base state". Here, with respect to the special symbol variation time shortening function, at least the variation time of the special symbol which is the subject of the game in the game state should be shortened, out of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, it can be said that the special symbol variation time reduction function is operating because the variation time of the first special symbol is shortened in the game state (normal game state) in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main part of the game. , In the game state (time reduction game state, latent certainty game state, probability variation game state) in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main part of the game, the variation time of the second special symbol should be shortened.

FIG. 91 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table of the fourth embodiment. In the game state setting table, a game state to be shifted to after the end of the big win game is set for each big win type (type of symbol group). In the fourth embodiment, when the result of the special symbol win/loss determination is a big hit, the game state after the end of the big win game is (A) the big win type (type of symbol group) and (B) when the big win is won. and (C) the presence or absence of the game ball entering the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game (whether or not there is a V prize).
In addition, the number of continuations of each game state (the number of times of fluctuation display of special symbols) is the number of probability fluctuations that the probability fluctuation function of special symbols operates (the number of times of probability fluctuations) and the fluctuation time that the fluctuation time reduction function of special symbols operates. It is set based on the number of times of shortening (number of times of time saving operation) and the number of times of electric support that the electric chewing support function operates (number of times of electric support operation).

When the first special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 1 (symbol group A)" is won, a game ball can enter the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game or can be easily entered. Therefore, basically, without depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, a latent game state is set as the game state after the jackpot game is completed on the condition that the game ball is entered into the specific area 548. be done. When shifting to the potential game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "130 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "130 times", and the number of electric support times "0 times" are set. In addition, in spite of the fact that it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548, if the game ball cannot actually enter the specific area 548, the jackpot is won. A time-saving game state is set as a game state after the end of the big win game without depending on the game state of time. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, probability fluctuation frequency "0 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "100 times", and power supply frequency "100 times" are set.

When the first special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 2 (symbol group B)" is won, a game ball can or easily enter the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, basically, without depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit, on the condition that the game ball is entered into the specific area 548, the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the big win game. be. When shifting to the potential game state after the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation frequency "130 times", the variation time reduction frequency "130 times", and the power support frequency "130 times" are set. In addition, in spite of the fact that it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548, when the game ball cannot actually enter the specific area 548, a big hit is made. A time-saving game state is set as a game state after the end of the big winning game without depending on the game state at the time of winning. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, probability fluctuation frequency "0 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "100 times", and power supply frequency "100 times" are set.

When the first special symbol "6R conditional normal jackpot" is won, it becomes substantially impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game. Basically, without depending on the game state at the time of winning the big win, on the condition that the game ball could not enter the specific area 548, the game state after the end of the big win game is a time-saving game state. is set. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, probability fluctuation frequency "0 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "100 times", and power supply frequency "100 times" are set. In addition, in spite of the fact that it was substantially impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area 548, if the game ball could actually enter the specific area 548 A variable probability game state is set as a game state after the end of the big win game without depending on the game state at the time of winning the big win. When shifting to the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation frequency "130 times", the variation time reduction frequency "130 times", and the electric support frequency "130 times" are set.

When the second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 3 (symbol group D)" is won, it becomes possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, basically, without depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot, a latent game state is set as the game state after the jackpot game is completed on the condition that the game ball is entered into the specific area 548. be done. When shifting to the potential game state after the end of the jackpot game, the number of times of probability fluctuation "130 times", the number of times of shortening the fluctuation time "130 times", and the number of electric support times "0 times" are set. In addition, in spite of the fact that it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548, if the game ball cannot actually enter the specific area 548, the jackpot is won. A time-saving game state is set as a game state after the end of the big win game without depending on the game state of time. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, probability fluctuation frequency "0 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "100 times", and power supply frequency "100 times" are set.

When the second special symbol "10R conditional specific jackpot 4 (symbol group E)" is won, it becomes possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game. Therefore, basically, on the condition that the game ball is entered into the specific area 548, the probability variable game state or the latent probability game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. The game state after the end of the game is selectively determined according to the game state when the big win is won. That is, if the game state at the time of winning the big hit is the normal game state, the time-saving game state or the variable probability game state, the probability variable game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game, and the game state at the time of the big hit is the latent certainty game. If it is in the state, the potential game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. When shifting to the variable probability game state after the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation frequency "130 times", the variation time reduction frequency "130 times", and the electric support frequency "130 times" are set. On the other hand, when shifting to the potential game state after the end of the jackpot game, the probability variation frequency "130 times", the variation time reduction frequency frequency "130 times", and the electric support frequency frequency "0 times" are set. In addition, in spite of the fact that it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548, if the game ball cannot actually enter the specific area 548, the jackpot is won. A time-saving game state is set as a game state after the end of the big win game without depending on the game state of time. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the end of the jackpot game, probability fluctuation frequency "0 times", fluctuation time reduction frequency "100 times", and power supply frequency "100 times" are set.

In addition, as described above, the occurrence of a big hit can be a trigger to shift the game state, but the occurrence of a small hit is not a trigger to shift the game state. That is, if the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a small hit, the final fluctuation display that is the end condition of the game state (for example, the 130th rotation fluctuation display of the probability variation game state or the latent probability game state, time saving game The game state at the time of winning the small win is continued as it is, except for the 100th rotation display of the state, and the game state is not shifted with the winning of the small win as a trigger. That is, if the game state before the occurrence of the small hit is the normal game state, the game state during execution of the small win game and after the end of the small win game also becomes the normal game state, and the game state before the occurrence of the small win is the time-saving game state. If so, the game state during execution of the small win game and after the end of the small win game also becomes the time saving game state, and if the game state before the occurrence of the small win is the variable game state, during the execution of the small win game and the small win The game state after the end of the game is also the variable probability game state, and if the game state before the occurrence of the small win is the latent certainty game state, the game state during execution of the small win game and after the end of the small win game is also the latent certainty game state. becomes.

<Variation pattern selection status>
Next, the variation pattern selection state of the fourth embodiment will be described. The variation pattern selection state is, as described above, one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation pattern table) of the special symbol. In this embodiment, "selection state 1", "selection state 2", and "selection state 3" are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states. Selection state 1 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state). Also, this selection state 1 is set corresponding to the variable display when the production mode is the "normal mode" described later. Selection state 2 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the game state is a time-saving game state (low-probability high-base state). Moreover, this selection state 2 is set corresponding to the variable display when the effect mode is the later-described "time saving mode". Selection state 3 is a variation pattern selection state that is set when the gaming state is a latent certainty gaming state (high probability low base state) or a certainty variable gaming state (high probability high base state). Further, this selection state 3 is set corresponding to the variable display when the effect mode is the "latent probability mode" or the "variable probability mode" which will be described later. In this embodiment, one of a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states is alternatively set according to the game state and the number of times of variation display of special symbols, and according to the set variation pattern selection state A variation pattern table is selected.

<Production mode>
Next, the production mode of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, a normal mode, a time saving mode, a latent probability mode, and a probability variable mode are set as multiple types of production modes. Either one of them is set alternatively, and a variable effect corresponding to the set effect mode is executed.

Basically, when the game state is the normal game state, the "normal mode" is set, when the game state is the time-saving game state, the "time-saving mode" is set, and the game state is the latent game state. When the "probability mode" is set, and when the game state is the probability variation game state, the "probability variation mode" is set. Then, when one of the production modes is set, as a production (variable production) that suggests that you are staying in the production mode, a background image dedicated to the production mode (a decorative pattern is displayed on the back of the screen) A background image) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11 . Since the background image and the BGM are set differently for each effect mode in this way, the player can recognize which effect mode the player is currently staying in from the type of the background image or the BGM. ing.

<Variation pattern>
Next, the variation pattern of the special symbol of the fourth embodiment will be described. 92 to 94 are schematic diagrams showing the special symbol variation pattern table of the fourth embodiment. As described above, the special symbol variation pattern table has different columns to be referred to for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and even if the same special symbol variation pattern random number value is obtained, they are different. Variation patterns can be selected.

(Variation pattern table 1)
92 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 1. FIG. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table set when the variation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 1. The variation pattern table 1 has different table contents according to the result of the special symbol success/failure determination (big win, loss).

In the fluctuation pattern table 1 for loss, five kinds of fluctuation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-5 are set. If the result of the suitability determination of the first special symbol is "miss", one of the four variation patterns PH1-1 to PH1-4 is selected according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value. In this embodiment, if the result of the validity determination of the first special symbol is "missing", the reference destination according to the number of operation pending balls (0/1 to 2/3) of the first special symbol table contents are set differently, and even if the special symbol variation pattern random number is the same, different types of variation patterns can be selected according to the number of activated balls with the first special symbol. ing. Specifically, the larger the number of balls with the first special symbol activated, the more easily the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively short is selected, and the number of the balls with the first special symbol activated is more likely to be selected. The smaller the number, the easier it is to select a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the validity judgment of the second special symbol is "missing", the number of activated balls of the second special symbol (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) and the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number Independently, only fixed variation patterns PH1-5 (ultra-long variation) are selected. In other words, if the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is lost, only the variation pattern PH1-5 (long long variation) set to a very long time (10 minutes) for the variation time of the second special symbol selected.

Two types of variation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-2 are set in the variation pattern table 1 for big hits. When the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol is "jackpot", only the fixed variation pattern PA1-1 is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol variation pattern random number value. That is, when the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol corresponds to "big hit", only the fixed variation pattern PA1-1 (END reach A) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed variation pattern PA1-2 (super long variation) is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol variation pattern random number value. be done. In addition, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is "small hit", only the fixed variation pattern PA1-2 (super long variation) is selected without depending on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. . That is, when the result of the determination of whether or not the second special symbol corresponds to "big hit" or "small hit", the variation pattern PA1- in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes) Only 2 (long long variation) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 2)
93 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 2. FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 2. The variation pattern table 2 has different table contents according to the result of the special symbol win/loss determination (big win, loss).

Four types of variation patterns PH2-1 to PH2-4 are set in the variation pattern table 2 for loss. If the result of the propriety determination of the first special symbol is "missing", the special symbol fluctuation pattern random One of two variation patterns PH2-3 and PH2-4 is selected according to the numerical value. On the other hand, if the result of the suitability determination of the second special symbol is "missing", four types of variation patterns PH2-1, PH2-2, PH2-3, PH2-4 according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value is selected. In this embodiment, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the reference destination according to the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the second special symbol table contents are set differently, and even if the special symbol variation pattern random number is the same, different types of variation patterns can be selected according to the number of balls with the second special symbol activated. ing. Specifically, when the number of operation pending balls of the second special symbol is one or more, the variation pattern PH2-1 (super shortened variation) in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively short, PH2- 2 (shortened variation) is likely to be selected, and when the number of balls with the second special symbol is 0, the variation pattern PH2-3 (normal variation) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set relatively long are likely to be selected.

Two types of variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-2 are set in the variation pattern table 2 for big hits. When the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol is "jackpot", only the fixed variation pattern PA2-1 is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol variation pattern random number value. That is, when the result of the hit/fail determination of the first special symbol corresponds to "big hit", only the fixed variation pattern PA2-1 (immediate hit) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is "big hit", only the fixed variation pattern PA2-2 is selected without depending on the big hit type or the special symbol variation pattern random number value. Further, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is "small hit", only the fixed variation pattern PA2-1 is selected without depending on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. That is, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol corresponds to "big hit", only the variation pattern PA2-2 (END reach B) is selected, and the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is "small hit". , only the variation pattern PA2-1 (immediate hit) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 3)
94 is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table 3. FIG. The fluctuation pattern table 3 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state during the current stay is the selection state 3. The variation pattern table 3 has different table contents according to the result of the special symbol win/loss determination (big win, loss).

In the fluctuation pattern table 3 for loss, five kinds of fluctuation patterns PH3-1 to PH3-5 are set. If the result of the judgment of the validity of the first special symbol is "miss", it depends on the number of activated balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the first special symbol and the random number of special symbol fluctuation patterns. Only the fixed variation pattern PH3-2 is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the validity determination of the second special symbol is "missing", the special symbol fluctuation without depending on the number of operation pending balls (0 / 1 to 2 / 3) of the second special symbol One of four variation patterns PH3-1, PH3-3, PH3-4 and PH3-5 is selected according to the pattern random number value.

Four types of variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4 are set in the variation pattern table 3 for big hits. When the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol is "jackpot", only the fixed variation pattern PA3-1 is selected without depending on the jackpot type or the special symbol variation pattern random number value. That is, when the result of the hit/fail judgment of the first special symbol corresponds to "big hit", only the variation pattern PA3-1 (immediate hit) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is "jackpot", three types of variation patterns PA3-2 to PA3-4 according to the special symbol variation pattern random number value without depending on the jackpot type. is selected. That is, when the result of the determination of whether the second special symbol corresponds to "big hit", the variation patterns PA3-2 (END reach A), PA3-3 (END reach B), PA3-4 (END reach C) (That is, only END reach variation patterns PA3-2 to PA3-4 are selected). In addition, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is "small hit", only the fixed variation pattern PA3-1 is selected without depending on the special symbol variation pattern random number value. That is, when the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol corresponds to "small hit", only the variation pattern PA3-1 (immediate hit) is selected.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, END reach A, END reach B, and END reach C are prepared as a plurality of types of SP reach. “END reach” is a ready-to-win effect that includes at least a specific effect element (referred to as a “specific element”) among a plurality of types of effect elements that constitute the game effect. END reach A, B, and C each include the same specific element, while at least part of the other effect elements are configured as different effects. In this embodiment, for example, an enemy character called "END" corresponds to the specific element, and the ready-to-win effect in which this specific element appears is called END reach. This END reach is a battle effect for suggesting or notifying the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is appropriate according to the result (win or lose) of the teammate character's battle with the enemy character (END). Basically, if you win this battle presentation, it is decided that you will be a "big hit", and if you lose the battle presentation, it will be decided that you will be "lost". In this embodiment, the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to increase by one step in the order of "END reach A"<"END reach B"<"END reach C". The variation times of END reach A, B, and C are all set to 60 seconds, but depending on the degree of expectation for a big hit, 'END reach A' < 'END reach B' < 'END reach C' You may set so that a fluctuation time may become long in order. In addition, regarding all or part of the END reach A, B, C, when the END reach is executed and a big win is achieved, it is confirmed that the transition to the potential game state (small win RUSH) is made at that time. It may be a specification to In addition, when END reach A, B, and C are executed, the transition to the potential game state (small hit RUSH) is expected in the order of "END reach A" < "END reach B" < "END reach C". It may be configured to have a higher degree.

As a characteristic point of the fourth embodiment, when the game state is the normal game state, the game state is more likely than the case where the END reach is executed in the variable display performed by the result of the success determination of the special symbol being a big hit. If the END reach is executed in the variable display performed by the result of the judgment of the special symbol being a big hit when the is in the probability variation gaming state, the latent probability gaming state (small hit RUSH mode). This characteristic point will be outlined below.

First, when the game state is the normal game state, if the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol, which is the subject of the game in this game state, is a big hit, the variation pattern PA1 does not depend on the big hit type. Only -1 (END reach A) is selected. On the other hand, when the game state is the normal game state, if the result of the win/loss determination of the second special symbol in the game state is a big hit, the variation pattern PA1-2 (super long variation) is selected. Therefore, the END reach is performed in the variable display when the game state is the normal game state is limited to the variable display of the first special symbol which is the main part of the game in the game state. Here, when the jackpot type of the first special symbol is "10R conditional specific jackpot 1", as described above, it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game. Basically, the latent game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. Further, when the jackpot type of the first special symbol is "10R conditional specific jackpot 2", as described above, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game. There is, basically, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set probability variable game state. Further, when the jackpot type of the first special symbol is "normal jackpot with 6R condition", as described above, it is substantially impossible to let the game ball enter the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game. Or it is difficult, and basically, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set to the time-saving game state. At this time, as a breakdown of the jackpot type of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 89(A), the selection rate of 10% for the 10R conditional specific jackpot 1 and the 40% selection rate for the 10R conditional specific jackpot 2 , 6R conditional normal jackpots are distributed with a selectivity of 50%. Therefore, when the game state is the normal game state, the END reach is executed in the variable display of the first special symbol to become a big hit, so that the latent game state (small hit RUSH mode) is entered after the big win game is finished. It is only when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 1", and the transition rate to the hidden game state (small hit RUSH mode) is 10%.

On the other hand, when the game state is the variable probability game state, if the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol, which is the subject of the game in the game state, is a big hit, the variation pattern PA3 does not depend on the big hit type. -2 (END reach A), PA3-3 (END reach B), or PA3-4 (END reach C) is selected. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the variable probability gaming state, if the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol in the gaming state is a big hit, the variation pattern PA3-1 (immediate hit ) is selected. Therefore, the END reach is performed in the variable display when the gaming state is the probability variable gaming state is limited to the variable display of the second special symbol which is the main part of the game in the gaming state. Here, when the jackpot type of the second special symbol is "10R conditional specific jackpot 3", as described above, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game. Basically, the latent game state is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game. Further, when the jackpot type of the second special symbol is "10R conditional specific jackpot 4", as described above, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game. There is, basically, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is set probability variable game state. At this time, as a breakdown of the second special symbol jackpot type, as shown in FIG. % selectivity. Therefore, when the game state is the probability variable game state, the END reach is executed in the variable display of the second special symbol to become a big hit, so that the transition to the latent probability game state (small hit RUSH mode) after the big win game is completed. It is only when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 3", and the transition rate to the hidden game state (small hit RUSH mode) is 50%.

Therefore, as described above, when the game state is the normal game state (low-probability low-base state), the result of the success/failure determination of the first special symbol becomes a big hit, and END reach is executed in the variable display. When the game state is a probability variable game state (high probability high base state) than the case (transition rate: 10%), the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is a big hit. When reach is executed (transition rate: 50%), the rate (transition rate) of shifting to the potential game state (small winning RUSH mode) after the end of the big win game is higher, basically, the first hit. A small hit RUSH is more likely to occur at the time of consecutive villas than at time. It should be noted that, regarding the feature point, it is also possible to read and apply the "probability variable gaming state" to the "latent certainty gaming state". That is, when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state), the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is a big hit, and the END reach is executed in the variable display (transition rate : 10%), END reach is executed with a variable display that is performed when the result of the judgment of the second special symbol becomes a big hit when the game state is a latent game state (high probability low base state). In the case of (transition rate: 100%), the rate (transition rate) of shifting to the potential game state (small winning RUSH mode) after the end of the big win game is higher.

<Normal design lottery>
Subsequently, the normal symbol lottery of the fourth embodiment will be described. Incidentally, the normal symbol lottery of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61, similarly to the normal symbol lottery of the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to "1/1.02" when the electric chew support function (ordinary symbol probability variation function) is not operating, and the electric chew support It is set to "1/1.01" when the function (probability variation function of normal symbols) is operating. Therefore, in the second embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state, it is a specification that a hit is derived with an extremely high probability in the determination of whether the normal symbols are correct.

As shown in FIG. 61(B), the variation time of normal symbols is set to "0.5 seconds" when the electric chew support function (normal symbol variation time shortening function) is not operating, and the electric chew support It is set to "0.2 seconds" when the function (variation time shortening function of normal symbols) is in operation. In other words, in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is set to be extremely short. It should be noted that the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbols is set to "0.1 seconds" regardless of which normal symbol variation pattern is selected. The fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time during which the normal symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time during which the completely stopped state is maintained).

As shown in FIG. 61(C), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is "open for 1 second→close for 2 seconds→close for 1 second" when the electric chew support function (open extension function) is not in operation. It is set to "Open → Closed for 2 seconds → Open for 1 second", and if the electric chew support function (open extension function) is operating, it is set to "Open for 5.9 seconds". That is, as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory 522, the total opening time is "3 seconds" because the opening operation of 1 second is performed three times in the low base state, and the total opening time is 5.9 seconds in the high base state. Since the opening operation is performed only once, the total opening time is "5.9 seconds".

Subsequently, simultaneous variation processing (variation interruption processing, variation forced stop processing) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described with reference to FIG. In the fourth embodiment, the determination of the variation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the variation start condition of the second special symbol are performed separately and independently. A specification (spec called a so-called parallel machine) is adopted in which the variation display of the symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 72 are executed in parallel. In other words, by independently digesting the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol and the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol, the winning lottery and the variable display corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol respectively etc. in parallel. Therefore, even if one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is variably displayed for a long time, the other special symbol is variably displayed in parallel with the variable display of the one special symbol. is carried out, during the execution of the variable display of one special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol will not be delayed. In the following, regarding the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variation display of the big hit is called "big hit variation display", and the variation display of the small hit is called "small hit variation display". is referred to as "off-variation display".

(Variation interruption processing)
Here, among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of one of the special symbols is the big hit variation display, the small hit variation display or the losing variation display, and the variation display of the other special symbol is the small hit variation display. , in a situation in which the variable display of one special symbol and the small hit variable display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, before the variable display of one special symbol ends, the other When the small hit variation display of the special symbol ends, the variation display of one special symbol is interrupted from when the small hit variation display of the other special symbol ends until the small hit game ends ( The measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is interrupted). It should be noted that the suspension of variable display is used to mean temporary suspension of variable display (meaning that it is scheduled to be resumed later). Then, when the small winning game of the other special symbol ends, the measurement of the variation time relating to the variation display of the one special symbol is restarted, and the measurement time of the variation time before the restart and the measurement time of the variation time after the restart. When the total time reaches a predetermined specified fluctuation time (variation time according to the design value), the fluctuation display of one special symbol ends.

(fluctuation forced stop processing)
On the other hand, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the variation display of one special symbol is a big hit variation display and the variation display of the other special symbol is a small hit variation display or a losing variation display, one In a situation where the big hit variation display of the special symbol and the small hit variation display or loss variation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, the small hit variation display or loss variation display of the other special symbol ends. Before, when the big hit fluctuation display of one special symbol is completed, the prescribed fluctuation time (fluctuation time according to the design value) in which the measurement time of the small hit fluctuation display or the loss fluctuation display of the other special symbol is preset Even before reaching , at the end of the big win variation display of one special pattern, the small win variation display or the losing variation display of the other special pattern is forcibly terminated in conjunction with or synchronizing with it. In addition, when forcibly ending the small hit fluctuation display of the other special pattern, the pattern (confirmed display pattern) that is stopped and displayed at the end of the small hit fluctuation display shall be replaced with a design that is out of the small hit pattern. . That is, the small-hit fluctuation display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped and displayed in the loss fluctuation display (resulting in the cancellation of the small-hit game). Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a special game (big hit game) in one special pattern and a special game (small hit game) in the other special pattern compete with each other. In addition, when the variation display of one of the special symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol starts as a big hit variation display, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts to fluctuate after that is other than the big hit variation display. Change display (that is, lose change display or small hit change display, and if the hit/fail random number corresponding to the big hit in the win/fail judgment process is forced to replace the hit/fail judgment result with a loss, and make a loss change display) is desirable. In addition, when the variation display of one special symbol starts as a big hit variation display, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts to vary after that is not displayed. If it is a random number, the result of the judgment may be forcibly replaced with a loss, and the result may be displayed as a change of loss).

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow of the fourth embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a latent probability variable game state, and a probability variable game state are set as a plurality of types of game states. Then, the normal mode is set as the production mode corresponding to the normal gaming state, the time saving mode is set as the production mode corresponding to the time saving gaming state, and the probability variation mode is set as the production mode corresponding to the probability variation gaming state, latent probability A latent mode is set as a production mode corresponding to the skill state.

<Normal game state>
First, in the pachinko game machine PM when the power is turned on, the game state is set to the normal game state (low probability low base state), and the game is started from this normal game state. When the game state is the normal game state, since the frequency of game balls entering the first starting port 51 is set higher than the frequency of game balls entering the second starting port 52, left-handed hitting is performed. By (shooting the game ball aiming at the left area PA1), the game ball is entered into the first start port 51, and the judgment of the first special symbol (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed independently. It becomes the playability to do. When staying in this normal game state, the production mode is controlled to the normal mode or the special mode. In this normal game state, when the result of the winning/failure determination of the first special symbol corresponds to a big win, the big win types are ``10R conditional specific jackpot 1'' at 10%, ``10R conditional specific jackpot 2'' at 40%, "6R conditional normal jackpot" occurs with a winning probability of 50%. Basically, when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 1", on condition that the game ball is entered in the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, Shift to the latent game state. In addition, when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 2", on the condition that the game ball is entered in the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game, the probability variable game state is entered after the jackpot game is completed. Transition. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is "normal jackpot with 6R conditions", on the condition that the game ball could not enter the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, Shift to the time-saving game state.

<Time-saving game state>
When the game state shifts to the time-saving game state (low probability high base state), the electric chew support function is activated, so that the ease of entering the game ball to the second start port 52 is increased. A game ball is made to enter the second starting port 52 by shooting a game ball aiming at PA2), and a game property of subjectively executing the judgment of whether the second special symbol is valid (variation display of the second special symbol). becomes. In this time-saving game state, the probability of winning a big hit in the judgment of special symbols is as low as the normal game state, but it becomes a high base state in which the electric chew support function is activated, and the game is played while suppressing the decrease of the ball. can be advanced. When staying in this time-saving game state, the performance mode is controlled to the time-saving mode. In this time-saving game state, if the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol corresponds to the jackpot, the jackpot type is 50% for "10R conditional specific jackpot 1" and 50% for "10R conditional specific jackpot 2". Occurs with a winning probability. When the jackpot type is ``10R specific jackpot 1'', on the condition that the game ball is entered in the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game, after the jackpot game is finished, the state shifts to the latent probability variable game state. . On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 2", on the condition that the game ball is entered in the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable game state transition to It should be noted that this time-saving game state continues until the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches 100 times after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches 100 times without the occurrence of the next big hit in the time saving game state, the time saving game state ends and the player falls to the normal game state.

<Variable gaming state>
When the game state shifts to the probability variable game state (high probability high base state), the electric chew support function is activated, so that the ease of entering the game ball to the second start port 52 is increased. A game ball is made to enter the second starting port 52 by shooting a game ball aiming at PA2), and a game property of subjectively executing the judgment of whether the second special symbol is valid (variation display of the second special symbol). becomes. In this variable probability game state, the second starting port 52 becomes easy to enter, and the probability of winning a big hit in the judgment of the success or failure of the special symbol is high, so the big hit of the second special symbol is likely to occur early. can do. When staying in this variable probability game state, the production mode is controlled to the variable probability mode. In this probability variable gaming state, if the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol corresponds to the big hit, the type of the big hit is 50% for "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" and 50% for "10R conditional specific jackpot 4". Occurs with a winning probability. When the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 3", on the condition that the game ball is entered in the specific area 548 during the execution of the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the latent game state is entered. Transition. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 4", on the condition that the game ball is entered in the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game, after the jackpot game ends, the probability variable game state transition to It should be noted that this variable probability game state continues until the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches 130 times after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches 130 times without the occurrence of the next big win in the variable probability game state, the variable probability game state is terminated and the player falls to the normal game state.

<Latent probability variable game state>
When the game state shifts to the latent probability variable game state (high probability low base state), the electric chew support function will not operate, so it is originally recommended to hit the first start port 51 to the left, In this embodiment, even in this low base state, the ball entry frequency of the second starting hole 52 is set relatively high, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 52 triggers a small winning game. By performing a characteristic game (small hit RUSH) that occurs frequently, the game ball is entered into the second starting hole 52 by hitting the right hand rather than entering the game ball into the first starting hole 51 by hitting the left hand. It is better to let it be, and as a result, it becomes a game property to subjectively execute the propriety judgment of the second special symbol (variation display of the second special symbol). When staying in this latent probability variable game state, the production mode is controlled to the latent probability mode. In this latent probability variable gaming state, if the result of the success/failure determination of the second special symbol corresponds to a big win, the big win type is ``10R conditional specific jackpot 3'' at 50%, and ``10R conditional specific jackpot 4'' at 50%. Occurs with a winning probability of When the jackpot type is "10R conditional specific jackpot 3" or "10R conditional specific jackpot 4", the jackpot game is performed on condition that the game ball is entered in the specific area 548 during execution of the jackpot game. After the end of, it shifts to the latent game state. It should be noted that this hidden game state continues until the number of variable display times of the special symbol reaches 130 times after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, when the number of variable display times of the special symbols reaches 130 times without the occurrence of the next big hit in the latent probability variable game state, the latent probability variable game state is terminated and the player falls to the normal game state. Here, when the game state is the latent game state, small hits occur frequently in the judgment of whether or not the second special symbol is won, and the game ball easily enters the big winning hole 54 during the small win game. , a game (small win RUSH) aiming to increase the number of balls to be paid out by the small win game is possible. The playability of this small hit RUSH will be described below.

<Small hit RUSH>
Next, the playability of small hit RUSH (probability mode) will be described. In the small hit RUSH (latency mode), when the game ball is entered into the second start port 52, the small hit is frequently generated in the judgment of whether the second special symbol is successful, and until the big hit is won, the small hit is performed. It is a game property aiming at generating a winning game continuously and intensively.

When the game state is the latent game state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, a hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1/1.02) in the determination of whether the normal symbol is correct. In this hidden game state (low base state), when winning the winning judgment of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 522 performs the opening operation for 1 second three times. Therefore, if the right-hand shot is aimed at the second starting port 52, it is possible or easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. be. In addition, in this hidden game state, the probability of winning a small win in the determination of whether the second special symbol is successful is set to be extremely high (approximately 1/1.1), and furthermore, the probability of winning a small win is set at a very high probability (about 1/1.1). Since the fluctuation time of the 2 special symbols is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a high possibility that small hits will frequently occur based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52 .

At this time, while the normal electric accessary 522 is performing the opening operation for 1 second three times, when the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins a small hit, the second special symbol is finished in a very short time, and the small winning game is immediately started. Here, the ordinary electric accessory 522 performs a two-second closing operation immediately after performing a one-second opening operation (excluding the third opening operation). Therefore, after the small winning game is started, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 is closed while the normal electric accessory 522 is performing the closing operation for 2 seconds. It is easy to reach the big winning opening 54 by passing through the upper surface of the member 524). Therefore, during the execution of the small winning game, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 524 without entering the normal electric accessory 522, and is placed obliquely below the big winning prize. By flowing down toward the opening 54, the ball can be entered into the big winning opening 54. - 特許庁Therefore, when the game state is the latent probability variable game state, the game ball is entered into the second starting port 52 and the second special symbol is displayed with high frequency, until the next big hit occurs. It becomes a game characteristic of executing a small winning game at high frequency. As a result, about 2 to 3 game balls enter the big winning hole 54 every time a small winning game is executed, and about 20 to 30 prize balls are continuously obtained each time, thereby allowing the player to win. It is possible to proceed with the game while increasing the number of balls held.

On the other hand, even when the game state is the time-saving game state or the probability variable game state, the winning probability of the small win is extremely high in the judgment of whether the second special symbol is correct, and the fluctuation time of the small win is set to be extremely short. Minor winning games are likely to occur frequently. However, the game property of the small hit RUSH is limited only to the hidden game state, and for game states other than the hidden game state, the following measures are taken to suppress the increase in possession balls due to the small hit game. It is

Specifically, when the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state or the variable probability gaming state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, the hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1/1.01) in the determination of the success or failure of the normal symbol. be. In this game state (high base state), when winning the winning judgment of the normal symbol, the normal electric accessory 522 performs one opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if a right-hand shot is aimed at the second starting port 52, it is extremely easy to enter the game ball into the second starting port 52 while the normal electric accessory 522 is in the open state. . In addition, even in this time-saving game state or probability variable game state, the probability of winning a small hit in the success/failure determination of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (approximately 1/1.1), and a small win is won. Since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a possibility that a small hit will occur frequently based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52. expensive.

Here, while the normal electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 5.9 seconds, if the game ball enters the second start port 52 and wins a small hit, the second special symbol The variable display ends in a very short time, and the small winning game is immediately started. At this time, while the normal electric accessory 522 continues the opening operation (while the second start port 52 is in the open state), when the small hit game is executed, it flows down the right area PA2. A game ball to be played is very likely to enter the open normal electric accessory 522, and the possibility of reaching the big winning hole 54 is remarkably reduced. On the other hand, when the small hit game is executed after the normal electric accessory 522 is closed (after the second start port 52 is closed), the subsequent game ball passes through the operation gate 53 Since the time from when the normal electric accessory 522 opens is set to a very short time (variation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 second), this immediately opened normal electric accessory It is easy for a game ball to enter 522 . That is, during execution of the small winning game, the normal electric role 522 (second starting port 52) is in a state of being almost open, and the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 is the normal electric role in the open state. It is very easy to hit the object 522 (the second start hole 52), and it is extremely difficult to hit the big prize hole 54 arranged downstream thereof. Therefore, when the game state is the time-saving game state or probability variable game state (high base state), the game ball reaches the big winning opening 54 even if small hits occur frequently in the success/failure determination of the second special symbol. The possibility is remarkably low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the number of payouts through a small winning game.

Further, even when the game state is the normal game state, the winning probability of the small hit is set to an extremely high probability (approximately 1/1.1) in the determination of whether the second special symbol is successful or not, but the second special symbol is set to an extremely long period of time (10 minutes or more), even if the player enters the game ball into the second starting hole 52 and plays a game aiming for a small hit, the second special The efficiency of digestion of symbols is very low, and it is not possible to frequently generate small winning games.

In addition, as a modification, in the variable display of a predetermined number of times immediately after shifting from the time-saving gaming state, the probability variable gaming state or the latent certainty gaming state to the normal gaming state (variation display within 4 rotations), the limited frequency selection as the variation pattern selection state The state is set, and the variation time (average value of variation time) of the second special symbol is shortened from the variation display (variation display after the fifth rotation) after the predetermined number of variation displays are completed. It may be configured so that the variation efficiency of the 2 special symbols is high.

[Various productions]
In the pachinko game machine PM of the fourth embodiment having such a configuration, as described above, various game effects are controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 and the image control board 300 according to the progress of the game. is configured to In the following, among the various game effects, the "special meter effect" and the "retained jackpot suggestive effect" will be described.

<Special meter effect>
First, the special meter effects will be explained. FIG. 95 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen for special meter effects. The special meter effect can be executed in the variable display when the game state is the variable probability game state. This special meter effect changes the level of the meter image displayed on the screen (also called "meter value"), and is a effect that suggests that a predetermined high-expectation effect will occur during the variable display. be. The predetermined high-expectation effect is SP reach (END reach) in which the aforementioned specific element (enemy character called END) is displayed. The meter image is displayed in a meter display area 740 on the left side of the screen, as shown in FIG. 95, and is a vertically long image showing levels from "1" to "10", for example. In the present embodiment, when the level of the meter image reaches MAX (tenth stage), it is confirmed that END reach occurs during execution of the variable display. Therefore, it can be said that the level of the meter image is an index that suggests the degree of expectation for execution of the END reach (expected degree of reach development). In addition, as described above, when the END reach occurs in the variation display of the big hit when the game state is the variable probability game state, the degree of expectation to shift to the small hit RUSH state after the end of the big hit game increases. Therefore, the level of the meter image can also be said to be an index that suggests the degree of expectation for transition to the small hit RUSH (potential mode).

FIG. 96 is a schematic diagram for explaining the execution timing of the special meter effect. The special meter effect is one or more fluctuation display (prediction fluctuation display) before the operation suspension ball targeted for prediction is digested, and a fluctuation display when the operation suspension ball targeted for prediction is digested (the fluctuation display) It is possible to run across In the present embodiment, the special meter effect may be executed across the look-ahead variable display and the variable display, or may be executed only with the variable display. This special meter effect develops when a predetermined prefetch effect is executed during the predictive variable display, or when a predetermined advance notice effect is executed during the variable display. That is, in the special meter effect, the meter image appears and the level of the meter image changes when a predetermined look-ahead effect or a predetermined notice effect is performed.

First, during the look-ahead variable display, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a meter image appears triggered by execution of a predetermined look-ahead effect. The predetermined look-ahead effect includes a light guide plate look-ahead effect that causes a predetermined light guide plate on the board to emit light, and a special hold change that changes the display mode of the hold image to a special display mode (a display mode that suggests the occurrence of END reach). Includes performance. Then, after the meter image appears during the predictive variable display, as shown in FIG. Increases by multiple steps.

On the other hand, during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 96(C), a meter image appears triggered by execution of a predetermined advance notice effect. Predetermined advance notice effects include a light guide plate advance notice effect for causing a prescribed light guide plate on the board to emit light, and a character change notice effect for changing the display mode of the image of the prescribed character in a plurality of stages. Then, after the meter image appears during the variable display, as shown in FIG. Increases by multiple steps. In the present embodiment, in order to ensure the continuity of the effects, the light guide plate that is luminously displayed in the light guide plate pre-reading effect and the light guide plate that is luminously displayed in the light guide plate advance notice effect are the same light guide plate. It's becoming

The third embodiment includes a meter counter as counting means for controlling the level (meter value) of the meter image. The count value of this meter counter is an internal numerical value (referred to as an “internal numerical value”) corresponding to the level (meter value) of the meter image, and this internal numerical value can be updated in units of “1”. . Each time the internal numerical value of the meter counter increases by "1", the level of the meter image increases by "one step". Therefore, when the internal numerical value increases to the maximum value (10), the level of the meter image reaches MAX (tenth stage). The internal numerical value of this meter counter is cleared to zero (reset) at the start or end of the special meter effect.

The level of the meter image basically changes step by step according to an effect scenario determined by lottery at the start of execution of the special meter effect. In other words, the effect scenario defines the contents including when and how many stages the level of the meter image is added in the course of execution of the special meter effect. Here, the level of the meter image is increased by a predetermined number of steps (+1 step to +7 step) at one timing according to the production scenario. It should be noted that when the specific effect is executed during the variable display, the level of the meter image is forcibly increased to the tenth stage (maximum level). Note that the specific effect is an announcement effect in which a specific element (an enemy character called END) cuts in on the screen. That is, when a specific element is cut-in displayed during execution of the special meter effect, the level of the meter image reaches the MAX, and the generation of SP reach (END reach) including this specific element is guaranteed.

<Holding jackpot suggestion production>
Next, the on-hold big hit suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 97 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen of the on-hold jackpot suggestion effect. The on-hold big hit suggestion production is a production that suggests the possibility that there is an operation holding ball that will be a big hit in the operation holding ball of the special pattern that is the target of the prefetch lottery (referred to as a "jackpot holding ball"). This reserve big hit suggestion effect is performed when the performance mode is the latent mode (small hit RUSH), and the result of the judgment of the success or failure of the special symbol is a small hit. It is executed when the ball enters the winning hole 54 as a trigger. In this embodiment, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the second special symbol actuation suspension ball, which is the main part of the game in the latent probability mode (small hit RUSH), is targeted for the foreseeing lottery. In other words, when the performance mode is the normal mode, the time saving mode, or the probability variable mode, the game ball enters the big winning opening 54 during the execution of the small winning game performed by the result of the judgment of the success or failure of the special symbol becoming a small winning. However, the on-hold jackpot suggesting effect is not executed, and if there are a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls within 10 seconds) within a predetermined time in these effect modes, an error notification image is displayed. display.

As shown in FIG. 97, in the prize ball acquisition display area 732 of the screen, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 54 during execution of a small winning game, a prize ball to be paid out based on the entering ball is displayed. Prize ball number information "15pt" corresponding to the number (15) is displayed. At this time, when the game ball enters the big winning hole 54 during the execution of the small winning game, and the on-hold big winning suggestion effect is executed, the winning ball number information "15pt" is displayed. At the same time, a sound (special sound) is output from the speaker 11 suggesting that the big hit pending ball is included in the operation pending ball of the second special symbol.

The production pattern of the big hit suggesting production in the reservation includes a non-determined production pattern suggesting that there is a possibility that the big hit holding ball exists in the operation holding ball of the second special pattern, and the inside of the operation holding ball of the second special pattern. There is a definite performance pattern for definite notification of the presence of a big hit pending ball. The non-determined effect pattern is a effect pattern in which the first special sound "You did it" is output from the speaker 11. - 特許庁The fixed effect pattern is a effect pattern in which a second special sound "congratulations" is output from the speaker 11. - 特許庁As a modification, in the non-determined effect pattern, a prize of "15pt" corresponding to the number of prize balls (15) paid out based on the game balls entering the big winning hole 54 during execution of the small winning game. The number of balls information is displayed in a normal display mode (white), and in the fixed effect pattern, the number of prize balls (15) to be paid out based on the game balls entering the big prize opening 54 during execution of the small winning game. The corresponding number-of-balls information "15pt" may be displayed in a special display mode (rainbow color).

FIG. 98 is a schematic diagram showing a pending jackpot suggestion effect lottery table. In the on-hold big-win suggestion performance lottery table, whether or not the on-hold big-win suggestion performance can be executed and its performance pattern are defined. In the figure, for the sake of convenience, "selection rate" is indicated, but in reality, according to the obtained lottery random number value, the determination number for determining whether or not to execute the pending big hit suggestion effect and its effect pattern (Range of lottery random number) is set, and based on which determination number the lottery random number belongs to, whether or not to execute the pending jackpot suggestive effect and its effect pattern are determined. .

Whether or not the pending big hit suggestion production can be executed and its production pattern are based on the pending big hit suggestion production pattern table, and the second special symbol operation suspension ball (1st to 4th operation suspension ball ) is decided by lottery according to the preliminary judgment result (whether or not there is a big hit pending ball). In this pending jackpot suggesting performance pattern table, "no execution" corresponding to not executing the pending jackpot suggesting performance and the pending jackpot suggesting performance are executed for the preliminary determination result (whether or not there is a jackpot pending ball). It is possible to select one of "with execution" corresponding to the event, and when "with execution" is selected, select the type of effect pattern ("non-fixed effect pattern", "fixed effect pattern") Selectivity (decision number) is allocated as possible. Specifically, when there is a big hit pending ball as a result of prior determination, "no execution" is 20%, "unconfirmed production pattern" is 50%, and "confirmed production pattern" is allocated at a selection rate of 30%. is On the other hand, when the jackpot pending ball does not exist as a result of the prior judgment, the selection rate of 70% for "no execution", 30% for "unconfirmed performance pattern", and 0% for "definite performance pattern" is allocated. .

In the on-hold jackpot suggesting effect, execution of the confirmed effect pattern is prohibited until a predetermined execution condition (referred to as "fixed effect execution condition") is established after the effect mode shifts to the latent probability mode (small hit RUSH). be done. The fixed effect execution condition is that the number of variable display times of special symbols reaches a specified number of times after the latent probability mode is started (calculated after the end of the big hit game). The number of fluctuation display of the special symbol reaches the specified number of times means that the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is performed for the first number of times (first condition), or the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is the second execution. It has been performed the number of times (second condition) (at least the first condition or the second condition is set). When the variable display of the first special symbol is performed for the first number of times (four times in this embodiment), the upper limit number (four ) corresponding to the number of times (4 times) that the variable display of the first special symbol has been performed, that is, all the remaining balls of the first special symbol that remain at the start of the latent mode have been digested. . As a modification, considering irregular ball entry (ball entry when the player accidentally hits left instead of right), the upper limit number of the first special symbol's operation suspension balls (4 ) may be set (for example, 5 times). Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed only the second number of times (10 times in this embodiment), it means that the game is mainly performed by the variable display of the second special symbol, that is, It means that all of the first special symbol operation pending balls remaining at the start of the latent certainty mode are digested, and the variable display of the second special symbol, which is the main part of the game in the latent certainty mode, is constantly performed. . In other words, the confirmed effect execution condition means that all the remaining first special symbol operation pending balls at the start of the latent certainty mode have been digested. Therefore, the first execution number (1st to 4th rotation) or the second execution number (1st to 10th rotation) immediately after the production mode shifts to the potential mode (immediately after the jackpot game ends) ), the fixed effect execution conditions are not satisfied, and after the end of the variable display, the small winning game is executed and the big winning hole 54 is opened or the game ball enters the big winning hole 54. However, the confirmed effect pattern is not executed. Here, the time required to execute the small hit variation of the second special symbol for the second number of executions in the latent probability mode and the small winning game (the fluctuation display time is the shortest second special symbol fluctuation display time in the latent probability mode In this embodiment, it is 0.5 seconds, and the execution time of the small winning game is 5 seconds in this embodiment, including the time required for the small winning start demonstration time and the small winning end demonstration, that is, the second 55 seconds for 10 times, which is the number of executions) is the time required for the first special symbol to change for the first number of times in latent probability mode (for the fluctuation display time, the fluctuation of the first special symbol in latent probability mode It is preferable to configure the display time to be longer than the display time, which is 10 seconds in this embodiment, that is, 40 seconds for the first number of executions of 4 times). In the situation where the variable display of the second special symbol related to the small hit for the second number of executions has ended, it is assumed that at least the remaining balls of the first special symbol that remain at the start of the latent mode are all digested. be done. The reason for setting the confirmation effect execution condition is that when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel in the latent probability mode, the operation pending ball of the first special symbol When the existence of a big hit reserved ball in the operation reserved ball of the second special pattern is notified by the big hit suggesting performance (fixed notification performance pattern) in the reservation until it is all digested, the big hit of this second special pattern. When there is a jackpot holding ball of the first special pattern digested earlier than the holding ball, the jackpot holding ball of the second special pattern may be replaced with "lost" in the winning/failure determination process, so it is held. This is because there is a discrepancy between the effect result of the inside big win suggesting effect (big win confirmed) and the actual game result (loss replacement). More specifically, since it is a big hit in the first special pattern, there is no doubt that it is a big hit, but this pending big hit suggestion production is for the big hit in the second special pattern, so it is a big hit in the pending. If a big hit with the first special symbol occurs after the suggestive performance is executed, a discrepancy will occur. In addition, since the jackpot in the first special symbol includes the "normal jackpot with 6R conditions", there is a high possibility that the latent mode will end even though the pending jackpot suggestion effect has been executed. Since there is a possibility of a big hit (because it is an event that the player is not happy with), it is desirable to set a fixed effect execution condition.

On the other hand, the execution of the non-determined effect pattern is permitted regardless of whether the determined effect execution condition is established after the effect mode shifts to the latent probability mode. That is, the non-determined effect pattern can be executed without restriction as to whether or not all the remaining first special symbol operation pending balls at the start of the latent mode have been digested. In other words, the non-confirmed production pattern is not a production pattern that confirms the presence of the big hit pending ball in the second special symbol operation holding ball (suggests that there is a possibility that the big hit pending ball exists (Because it is a production pattern), even if the fact that the big hit holding ball exists in the operation holding ball of the second special symbol actually results in a true notification result, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is actually This is because even if a false notification result is obtained without the presence of the big hit pending ball in the game, there is no discrepancy between the effect result of the big win suggestion performance within the pending and the actual game result. Therefore, the non-definite effect pattern can be executed from the time when the small hit is drawn in the first rotation immediately after the start of the latent certainty mode. As a modified example, whether or not execution of the non-confirmed effect pattern is also determined depending on whether the condition for executing the confirmed effect is satisfied, that is, until the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, the pending jackpot suggestion is made. It may be configured to disallow the execution of the production.

In addition, as a modification of the above-mentioned pending big hit suggestion effect, when the effect mode is the latent mode (small hit RUSH), the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a small hit. Triggered by the opening of the prize winning opening 54, the in-reservation big hit suggesting effect may be executed. That is, during the stay in the latent probability mode (small hit RUSH), the opening of the big winning hole 54 during the execution of the small winning game (the start of the opening operation of the big winning hole 54) is the trigger. It may be configured such that whether or not the inside big hit suggestion performance can be executed and the performance pattern are determined by lottery. In this modification, if the big winning hole 54 is opened during execution of the small winning game, regardless of whether or not the game ball was able to enter the big winning hole 54 in the open state, the big hit in the reserve Since the suggestive performance is executed, even a beginner player can increase the chances of seeing the pending jackpot suggestive performance. In addition, as a modification of the third embodiment, immediately after the production mode shifts to the latent probability mode (immediately after the jackpot game ends), it is calculated from the time the first execution number or the second execution number is reached. After the end of the variable display (variable display reaching a predetermined number of times within the first execution number or within the second execution number), the small winning game is executed and the big winning opening 54 is opened or the game ball enters the big winning opening 54 In this case, the small winning game is executed after the first number of executions is reached or after the end of the variable display after the second number of executions is reached, and the big winning opening 54 is opened or the game ball enters the big winning opening 54. Also, the execution probability of the confirmed effect pattern may be relatively low.

The main effects achieved in the fourth embodiment can be summarized as follows.

According to the fourth embodiment, as the first barrier, the first special symbol jackpot (conditional specific jackpot) is drawn in the normal game state to shift to the probability variation gaming state, and the second barrier is the probability variation gaming state. A new small hit RUSH spec that has never existed before, with the condition of breaking through multiple stages of barriers, that is, by pulling the second special pattern jackpot (conditional specific jackpot) to shift to the latent gaming state (small hit RUSH). In addition, by differentiating the role of the same production (END reach) according to the game state during the current stay, the production when breaking through each barrier is prevented from becoming monotonous, and the production of the production concerned. It is possible to diversify the manner of having a sense of expectation due to the appearance, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

According to the fourth embodiment, in a spec called a parallel machine that simultaneously executes the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol, it becomes the subject of the game in the game state during the current stay. When performing a look-ahead performance targeting one special symbol's operation reserve ball, a discrepancy between the performance result notified in the look-ahead performance and the actual game result due to the interposition of the variable display of the other special symbol. can be prevented from occurring, and an appropriate look-ahead effect that does not disappoint the player's expectations can be realized, and as a result, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the above-described fourth embodiment, as an example of the look-ahead effect, the reservation big hit suggestion effect performed during the execution of the small winning game has been described. A plurality of types of look-ahead effects performed during execution of a small winning game may be prepared. For example, in the variable display when the current gaming state is the time-saving gaming state, the probability variable gaming state, or the latent certainty gaming state, when executing the prefetching effect in which the second special symbol operation retention ball is the target of the prefetching lottery. , on the premise that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed concurrently, the variable display of the first special symbol is the missing variable display (the remaining first special symbol It is preferable that all the operation retention balls of the symbol correspond to the loss), or that there is no big hit retention ball in the operation retention ball of the first special symbol (all the remaining operation retention balls of the first special symbol It is preferable that it is not a big hit), it may be configured to execute an effect of definitely informing that the big hit reserved ball exists in the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol.

Further, in the above-described fourth embodiment, the variation pattern table when the gaming state is the latent probability gaming state and the variation pattern table when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state are common variation pattern tables (Fig. 94 Although it is configured as the variation pattern table 3), it is not limited to this configuration, and both variation pattern tables may be configured as individual variation pattern tables. At this time, in the variation pattern table in the latent certain gaming state, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is configured to easily select a relatively long variation pattern (especially, the variation display of losing is super long variation), and the probability variation game In the variation pattern table in the state, it is preferable that the variation pattern of the first special symbol is relatively short-time variation pattern (especially, the deviation display is super shortened variation) so that it is easy to select. At this time, in the latent sure game state, the variation time (average value of variation time) for one time of the first special symbol is longer than the variation time (average value of variation time) for the predetermined number of times of the second special symbol. It is desirable that it is set to the time. "Predetermined number of times" is the number of variable display times corresponding to the denominator of the jackpot probability of the special symbols in the hidden game state (high probability state). That is, in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the special symbol jackpot probability is set to "1/80", and the variable display count of "80 times" corresponding to the denominator (80) of the jackpot probability is predetermined. It corresponds to the number of times. In other words, when the current gaming state is the hidden game state (small hit RUSH), the time (average time) during which the first special symbol is displayed only once is the second special symbol's variable display. It is preferable that the number of times is set longer than the total time of the variation time (average value) of the second special symbols until the number reaches 80 times corresponding to the denominator of the big hit probability. That is, in a parallel machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are performed in parallel, the number of times the variable display of the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (80 times) The probability of winning a big hit is about 64%, and this is because, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are simultaneously performed, until the variable display of the first special symbol is completed, It can also be said that it is a probability that a big hit is achieved by the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, by changing the predetermined number of times to the specified number of ST (130 times), when the first special symbol fluctuation display and the second special symbol fluctuation display are performed at the same time, the first special symbol fluctuation By the time the display ends, the probability of winning a big hit can be improved by the variable display of the second special symbol. As a modification, in the hidden game state, the fluctuation time (average value of fluctuation time) for one time of the first special symbol is the fluctuation time (average value of fluctuation time) for a predetermined number of times of the second special symbol. It may be set to a longer time than the execution time of the small winning game for the number of times. In addition, as another modification, the predetermined number of times may be the same number of times as the prescribed ST number of times. The time (average time) during which the special symbol is displayed only once is the second special symbol until the number of times of the variable display of the second special symbol reaches 130 times corresponding to the specified ST number of times of the jackpot probability. Than the total time of the fluctuation time (average value) (or the total time of the fluctuation time (average value) of the second special symbol until reaching 130 times corresponding to the prescribed ST number of times Small hit game for the prescribed ST number of times is preferably set to a long time (more than the execution time of the

[Common modification]
Next, modified examples of the first to fourth embodiments will be described. The gaming machine according to this modified example basically has the same configuration as the gaming machine according to the first, second, third, or fourth embodiment described above. Parts having the same configuration are given the same reference numerals and explanations thereof are omitted, and mainly different parts will be explained.

<Common modification 1>
In the above-mentioned first embodiment and the above-mentioned second embodiment, when the result of the judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, the normal probability variation gaming machine that determines the presence or absence of the probability variation transition based on the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) of the special symbol is adopted. However, it is not limited to this configuration, and when the result of the special symbol success/failure determination is a big win, it depends on whether the game ball enters the specific area during the execution of the big win game. A V probability variation gaming machine that determines the presence or absence of probability variation transition may be adopted. Conversely, in the above-described third embodiment and fourth embodiment, the V probability variation gaming machine is adopted, but it is not limited to this configuration, and a normal probability variation gaming machine may be employed. Further, as a modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, the probability variation gaming state that is given as a trigger to become a big hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol within the limit of the preset limit number of times (upper limit number of times) Alternatively, a game machine having a limiter function for limiting the number of consecutive times of the hidden game state may be adopted. In addition, in the above-described first embodiment, the probability variation function of special symbols is configured as a variable probability gaming machine that continues from after the end of the big win game until the next big win occurs, but the probability variation function of special symbols is specified. It may be configured as a probability variable gaming machine (number of times cutting probability variable machine, ST machine) that operates continuously by the ST number (for example, 100 times). On the contrary, in the second embodiment to the fourth embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a probability variation gaming machine (number cutting probability variation machine, ST machine) that continues to operate only for the specified number of times ST, but special The symbol probability variation function may be configured as a probability variable gaming machine that continues from after the end of the big win game until the next big win occurs.

<Common Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, a model with only one big winning hole installed in the game area has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a model with multiple big winning holes installed in the game area may be applied. may In addition, when adopting a model equipped with a plurality of large winning openings, the above-mentioned V probability variation gaming machine has a specific area (probability variation function operating area, V area) that triggers the operation of the probability variation function of special symbols Two or more large winning openings, that is, a first large winning opening and a second large winning opening that does not have this specific area (probability variation function operating area, V area) may be installed. As an example of the board layout, the first and second large winning slots may be arranged substantially vertically or horizontally in the right area of the game area, or the first large winning slots may be arranged. The board area where the lottery is placed and the board area where the second big winning hole is arranged may be different areas. In that case, the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the first big prize hole (number of unit prize balls) and the number of prize balls paid out when the game ball enters the second big prize hole The number of awarded balls (unit number of awarded balls) may be the same or different. In addition, of the two big winning openings, the first big winning opening (or second big winning opening) is a big winning opening for small winning games, and the second big winning opening (or first big winning opening) is for big winning games. It may be configured as a large winning opening. In that case, the number of prize balls (number of unit prize balls) in the big prize opening for the small winning game may be set to 10, and the number of prize balls (number of unit prize balls) in the big prize opening for the big hit game may be set to 15, etc. good.

<Common modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, among the plurality of game states, the latent probability variable game state is defined as a game state in which the special symbol probability variation function and the special symbol variation time reduction function are activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. However, it is not limited to this, and the latent probability variable gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which only the probability variation function of special symbols is activated, and the variation time reduction function of special symbols and the electric chew support function are not activated. may In addition, the special symbol variation time shortening function is divided into the first special symbol variation time shortening function and the second special symbol variation time shortening function, and the latent probability variable gaming state is changed to the special symbol probability variation function and the second special symbol variation time shortening function. It may be defined as a game state in which the variable time shortening function of 2 special symbols is activated and the electric chew support function is not activated. In addition, even if the electric chew support function operates in synchronization with the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time reduction function), the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time reduction function) shortening function).

Next, in order to facilitate a clearer understanding of the technical significance of the above embodiments and modifications, problems associated with the above embodiments and modifications will be outlined.

In the conventional pachinko game machine, in a specific game state, the result of the above-mentioned success or failure determination is a small hit, so that the small win game in which the acquired profit is set relatively lower than the big win game occurs frequently. A configuration is known that can gradually increase the number of balls held by a player (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-104177).

In conventional pachinko gaming machines, it is known that during the execution of a special game that is performed when the result of the above-mentioned hit/fail determination is a jackpot, a jackpot middle production is executed according to the type of the jackpot ( For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-21272).

In conventional pachinko machines, in conjunction with the variable display of decorative patterns, there are those that execute reach effects and advance notice effects that pre-notify the high degree of expectation for the transition to special games (expectation for big hits). known (see, for example, JP-A-2015-16106).

In conventional pachinko gaming machines, when the result of the above win/fail judgment is a big hit, a big win is given to the player according to the combination of symbols (so-called big win) when the decorative symbols consisting of a plurality of rows are stopped and displayed. It is known to suggest the type (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-240637).

Conventional pachinko machines are equipped with operating means such as buttons that can be operated by the player, and display an image prompting the operation of the operating means during the variable display of decorative patterns to actively encourage the player to play. A system configured to allow participation is known (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2009-172216).

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment and modified example, the configuration as described above is adopted for the purpose of improving the amusement of the game, and the effects described above are achieved.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be modified as appropriate without departing from the gist of the present invention. In addition, an appropriate combination of the constituent elements described in the above embodiments and modifications, or part of the constituent elements described in the above embodiments and modifications are deleted or converted by well-known and commonly used techniques, etc. It is also included in the scope of the present invention.

PM Pachinko game machine PA Game area PA1 Left area PA2 Right area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 5 Glass frame 15 Effect button 20 Game board 51 First start port 52 Second start port 53 Operation gate 54 Big winning port 64 General winning port 70 Effect display device 71 First special symbol display device 72 Second special symbol display device 100 Main control board 200 Effect control board 220 Effect control means 300 Image control board 400 Payout control board 500 Power supply board

Claims (1)

a game board on which a game area is formed;
A starting port provided in the game area and allowing a game ball to enter;
a success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the starting port;
a symbol display device in which a special symbol indicating the result of the pass/fail determination is variably displayed and stop-displayed;
A large winning opening provided in the game area, which is opened according to the result of the win/fail judgment and allows a game ball to enter;
a special game execution means capable of executing a special game accompanied by opening the big winning port when the result of the win/loss determination is a big win;
an effect display device for displaying a predetermined effect;
and an effect determination means for determining the effect to be displayed on the effect display device,
The effect display device can display the variable display and the stop display of the first pattern and the variable display and the stop display of the second pattern as the display of the pattern that shows the result of the win/fail judgment,
The first symbol can be temporarily stopped and displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, but the variable display of the second symbol is continued even during the temporary stop display of the first symbol,
It has multiple types of production stages, and is configured to be able to output BGM according to the type of production stage,
At least in a predetermined performance stage, it is possible to continuously output predetermined BGM without interruption from the end of the variable display of special symbols to the start of the next variable display of special symbols,
When the first pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed again, the output of the predetermined BGM that has been continued is stopped, and then the predetermined BGM is output again or the BGM different from the predetermined BGM is output. is configured to
When the first symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed and then displayed again in a variable manner, and when the development effect is executed after the re-variable display, BGM corresponding to the development effect can be output,
While the display mode of the first symbol can be changed to a predetermined mode when the first symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the display mode of the second symbol does not change to the predetermined mode,
It has a first performance pattern which is a performance pattern in which the development performance is not executed during the variable display of the special symbols and a second performance pattern which is a performance pattern in which the development performance is executed during the variable display of the special symbols,
By making it possible to display the first symbols in each of the plurality of symbol rows, it is possible to display the plurality of first symbols in variable display and stop display,
In the first effect pattern, while each of the plurality of first symbols can be changed to a predetermined mode,
In the second production pattern, some of the plurality of first patterns can be changed to a predetermined mode, but the other first patterns are configured not to change to the predetermined mode,
It is configured to be able to execute the production display according to the type of production stage,
In a predetermined production stage, it is possible to display a production display corresponding to the prescribed production stage,
In a predetermined production stage, when the development production is executed after the re-variation display of the first pattern, the production display corresponding to the development production is displayed instead of the production display corresponding to the prescribed production stage during the execution of the development production. is possible and
In a predetermined production stage, when the development production ends due to the execution of a special production during the execution of the development production after the re-variation display of the first symbol, the production display corresponding to the development production is ended and the development production is completed. Although the effect display corresponding to the predetermined effect stage can be displayed again during the variable display in which the development effect is executed, the effect display corresponding to the predetermined effect stage is not displayed during the variable display in which the development effect is executed. While the predetermined BGM is not output even in a predetermined situation in which it is displayed again, the predetermined BGM is played first when the variable display in which the development effect is executed is finished and the next variable display is started. is configured to be output from
The second pattern is variably displayed by switching a plurality of types of pattern combinations indicating a predetermined win in a predetermined order, regardless of whether the result of the success/failure determination is a big win or a loss. The combination of symbols to be displayed first immediately after the start of display is a predetermined specific combination of symbols among the plurality of types of combination of symbols indicating the failure,
The first pattern combination in the predetermined order is a specific pattern combination, and the last pattern combination in the predetermined order is a different pattern combination from the specific pattern combination. When the symbol combination is a predetermined symbol combination and is switched to the predetermined symbol combination in the variable display of the second symbol, the symbol combination to be switched next is a specific symbol combination,
A predetermined advance notice effect can be superimposed and displayed with the first pattern but not superimposed with the second pattern, and a specific advance notice effect different from the predetermined advance notice effect can be superimposed and displayed with both the first pattern and the second pattern, but the second pattern is superimposed and displayed. The display priority of the two patterns is higher than that of the specific advance notice performance, and the shooting position notification image showing the recommended shooting position of the game ball in a predetermined state can be displayed superimposed on the first pattern, but not superimposed on the second pattern. A pachinko machine characterized by:

Images